‘God hath endowed us with different faculties, suitable and proportional
to the different objects that engage them. We discover sensible things by
our senses, rational things by our reason, things intellectual by understanding;
but divine and celestial things he has reserved for the exercise
of our faith, which is a kind of divine and superior sense in the soul. Our
reason and understanding may at some times snatch a glimpse, but cannot
take a steady and adequate prospect of things so far above their reach and
sphere. Thus, by the help of natural reason, I may know there is a God,
the first cause and original of all things; but his essence, attributes, and
will, are hid within the veil of inaccessible light, and cannot be discerned
by us but through faith in his divine revelation. He that walks without
this light, walks in darkness, though he may strike out some faint and
glimmering sparkles of his own. And he that, out of the gross and wooden
dictates of his natural reason, carves out a religion to himself, is but a
more refined idolater than those who worship stocks and stones, hammering
an idol out of his fancy, and adoring the works of his own imagination.
For this reason God is nowhere said to be jealous, but upon the account of
his worship.’—Pilgrims Progress, Part III.
‘To die,—to sleep;—
To sleep! perchance to dream;—ay, there’s the rub;
For in that sleep of death what dreams may come,
When we have shuffled off this mortal coil,
Must give us pause.’—Shakespeare, Hamlet, Act iii. Scene 1.
THE
UNSEEN UNIVERSE
OR
PHYSICAL SPECULATIONS
ON A
FUTURE STATE
BY
B. STEWART AND P. G. TAIT.
——the things which are seen are temporal, but the things which are
not seen are eternal.
SEVENTH EDITION
(Revised, and Enlarged.)
London
MACMILLAN AND CO
1878.
[All Rights reserved.]
Blessed Lord, who hast caused all holy Scriptures to be written for our
learning; Grant that we may in such wise hear them, read, mark, learn,
and inwardly digest them, that by patience, and comfort of thy holy Word,
we may embrace, and ever hold fast the blessed hope of everlasting life,
which thou hast given us in our Saviour Jesus Christ.—Amen.
Edinburgh University Press:
T. AND A. CONSTABLE, PRINTERS TO HER MAJESTY.
PREFACE.
[The following was prefixed to our Sixth Edition. Though
many changes, some of importance, have since been made in the
text, we do not think it necessary to call attention to them here.]
Our readers will find near the end of our work
the following paragraph, which has appeared
in every edition:—‘We are in hopes that when
this region of thought comes to be further examined,
it may lead to some common ground
on which followers of science on the one hand,
and of revealed religion on the other, may meet
together and recognise each other’s claims without
any sacrifice of the spirit of independence,
or any diminution of self-respect. Entertaining
these views, we shall welcome with sincere
pleasure any remarks or criticism on these
speculations of ours, whether by the leaders
of scientific thought, or by those of religious
inquiry.’
A work like ours, containing a challenge of
this sort, has naturally called forth a great
amount of criticism. Bearing in mind the
existence of the ‘odium theologicum,’ we are
bound to confess that at first we were disposed
to tremble on opening any review of our work
in a theological journal of repute. We were
soon however delightfully perplexed at finding
that the leaders of religious inquiry were disposed
to treat us with the utmost courtesy,
agreeing with us in very many points, and stating
when necessary any difference of opinion
in a manner calculated alike to preserve their
independence and to conciliate our self-respect.
We feel much gratified and encouraged by this
treatment, and we think that if our fourth edition
be compared with our first, it will be found
that we possess some plasticity and have learned
to make some use of the criticism so faithfully
and courteously bestowed upon us.
Here we would wish to take an opportunity
of stating that the Principle of Continuity as
upheld by us has reference solely to the intellectual
faculties. We are led, for instance, by
this principle to assert that the process of production
of the visible universe must have been
of such a nature as to be comprehensible more
or less to the higher intelligences of the universe.
But we are not led to assert the eternity of
stuff or matter, for that would denote an unauthorised
application to the invisible universe
of the experimental law of the conservation of
matter which belongs entirely to the present
system of things.
Nor are we led to assert that the ether must
play some important part in our future bodies,
for our knowledge of things is vastly too limited
to enable us to come to any such conclusion.
Notwithstanding these remarks, if any theologian
of repute thinks that our fourth and
subsequent editions savour too much of ideas
of this nature, we will gladly amend our language
when a suitable opportunity occurs. It
is probably due to misconception of our words,
possibly to a difficulty, which we have all along
felt, of finding words exactly fitted to express
some of the more novel of the conceptions to
which we have been led, that we have been
spoken of, to a certain extent even by some
friendly critics, as ‘subtly materialistic’ or as
‘loose Positivists.’ Unless we were to coin
new terms (which we may yet find it necessary
to do), it will probably be found all but impossible
to escape such charges when writing on
such matters.
While the treatment we have experienced
from the true leaders of religious thought has
been all that we could wish, and while some of
them have come forward as our champions
rather than our critics, we regret to think that
certain of their following have not invariably
imitated the good example thus set them. All
are not Bayards, whether we regard the temper
of the blade or that of the individual who
wields it.
Pages of so-called ‘extracts’ from our book
have been strung together, now by some writers
of the High Church school, anon by writers of
the very lowest Evangelical type, in each case
with absolute disregard of their original collocation
and surroundings, and the result is of
course as utterly unfair a representation of our
meaning as could possibly be given. These ‘extracts,’
which are always scrupulously enclosed
in inverted commas, are not merely altered in
meaning by being arbitrarily detached from the
context—they are often altered by the insertion
of terms (e.g. luminiferous force!) which we,
as scientific men, could not possibly have employed.
People who adopt a system like this deserve
to have, once for all, thoroughly brought home
to them the bitter rebuke administered to their
analogues long ago by a witty if semi-profane
divine, who proposed to choose his text on their
principle, and gave out, to the astonishment
of his audience, part only of a verse, viz., ‘Hang
all the law and the prophets’!
We have placed at the commencement of this
Preface the only words of ours which appear to
commit us to controversy, and we trust that a
study of them will convince our readers, as it
has convinced us, that we do not stand committed
to the hopeless task of entering the lists
against this species of controversialist.
It is with reluctance that we have felt ourselves
compelled to allude to a method of controversy,
in our opinion, as deficient in Christian
courtesy as it is powerful to stifle the interests
of truth.
The attacks which have been made on our
work since the sixth edition was published, are
(all at least that we have seen) completely met
by the Introduction. Their basis, when such
exists, has usually been some short passage,
arbitrarily detached from its context, and thus
made susceptible of any gloss desired.
November 1877.
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.
Forgetful of the splendid example shown by
intellectual giants like Newton and Faraday, and
aghast at the materialistic statements now-a-days
freely made (often professedly in the name of science),
the orthodox in religion are in somewhat evil case.
As a natural consequence of their too hastily
reached conclusion, that modern science is incompatible
with Christian doctrine, not a few of them have
raised an outcry against science itself. This result is
doubly to be deplored; for there cannot be a doubt
that it is calculated to do mischief, not merely to
science but to religion.
Our object, in the present work, is to endeavour to
show that the presumed incompatibility of Science
and Religion does not exist. This, indeed, ought to
be self-evident to all who believe that the Creator of
the Universe is Himself the Author of Revelation.
But it is strangely impressive to note how very little
often suffices to alarm even the firmest of human
faith.
Of course we cannot, in this small volume, enter
upon the whole of so vast a subject, and we have
therefore contented ourselves with a brief, though, we
hope, sufficiently developed discussion of one very
important—even fundamental—point. We endeavour
to show, in fact, that immortality is strictly in
accordance with the principle of Continuity (rightly
viewed); that principle which has been the guide of
all modern scientific advance. As one result of this
inquiry we are led, by strict reasoning on purely
scientific grounds, to the probable conclusion that ‘a
life for the unseen, through the unseen, is to be regarded
as the only perfect life.’ (See Chap. VII.)
We need not point out here the bearing of this on
religion. Incidentally, the reader will find many
remarks and trains of reasoning which (by the alteration
of a word or two) can be made to apply to other
points of almost equal importance.
We may state that the ideas here developed—very
imperfectly of course, as must always be the case in
matters of the kind—are not the result of hasty
guessing, but have been pressed on us by the reflections
and discussions of several years.
We have to thank many of our friends, theological
as well as scientific, for ready and valuable assistance.
The matter of our work has certainly gained by this,
though it is likely that the manner may have suffered
by the introduction, here and there, of peculiarities of
style which could not easily be removed without
damage to the sense.
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
As a preface to our Second Edition, we cannot do
better than record the experience derived from our
first. It is indeed gratifying to find a wonderful
want of unanimity among the critics who assail us,
and it is probably owing to this cause that we have
been able to preserve a kind of kinetic stability, just
as a man does in consequence of being equally belaboured
on all sides by the myriad petty impacts of
little particles of air.
Some call us infidels, while others represent us as
very much too orthodoxly credulous; some call us
pantheists, some materialists, others spiritualists. As
we cannot belong at once to all these varied categories,
the presumption is that we belong to none of
them. This, by the way, is our own opinion.
Venturing to classify our critics, we would divide
them into three groups:—
(1.) There are those who have doubtless faith in
revelation; but more especially, sometimes
solely, in their own method of interpreting
it; none, however, in the method according
to which really scientific men with a wonderful
unanimity have been led to interpret
the works of nature. These critics call us,
some infidels, some pantheists, some dangerously
subtle materialists, etc.
(2.) There are those who have faith in the methods
according to which men of science interpret
the laws of nature, but none whatever in
revelation or theology. These consider us
as orthodoxly credulous and superstitious,
or as writers of ‘the most hardened and
impenitent nonsense that ever called itself
original speculation.’
(3.) There are those who have a profound belief
that the true principles of science will be
found in accordance with revelation, and
who welcome any work whose object is to
endeavour to reconcile these two fields of
thought. Such men believe that the Author
of revelation is likewise the Author of
nature, and that these works of His will
ultimately be found to be in perfect accord.
Such of this school as have yet spoken have
approved of our work.
Our readers may judge for themselves which of
these three classes of belief represents most nearly
the true Catholic Faith.
Many of our critics seem to fancy that we presume
to attempt such an absurdity as a demonstration of
Christian truth from a mere physical basis! We
simply confute those who (in the outraged name of
science) have asserted that science is incompatible
with religion. Surely it is not we who are dogmatists,
but those who assert that the principles and well-ascertained
conclusions of science are antagonistic to
Christianity and immortality. If in the course of
our discussion we are to some extent constructors,
and find analogies in nature which seem to us to
throw light upon the doctrines of Christianity, yet in
the main our object is rather to break down unfounded
objections than to construct apologetic arguments.
These we leave to the Theologian. The
Bishop of Manchester has very clearly described our
position by stating that [from a purely physical point
of view, § 204] we ‘contend for the possibility of immortality
and of a personal God.’
To vary the metaphor, we have merely stripped off
the hideous mask with which materialism has covered
the face of nature to find underneath (what every one
with faith in anything at all must expect to find)
something of surpassing beauty, but yet of inscrutable
depth. For indeed we are entire believers in
the infinite depth of nature, and hold that just as we
must imagine space and duration to be infinite, so
must we imagine the structural complexity of the
universe to be infinite also. To our minds it appears
no less false to pronounce eternal that aggregation we
call the atom, than it would be to pronounce eternal
that aggregation we call the Sun. All this follows
from the principle of Continuity, in virtue of which
we make scientific progress in the knowledge of
things, and which leads us, whatever state of things
we contemplate, to look for its antecedent in some
previous state of things also in the Universe. This
principle represents the path from the known to the
unknown, or to speak more precisely, our conviction
that there is a path. Nevertheless it does not authorise
us to dogmatise regarding the properties of the
unknown lying beyond or at the boundary of our
little ‘clearing.’ We must go up to it and examine it
often, with long continued labour, under great difficulties,
before we can at all say what its properties are.
Among those who recognise us as orthodox, and
for that reason attack us, there is one of deservedly
high authority. Our ‘brother,’ Professor W. K.
Clifford, has published a lively attack on our speculations
in a recent number of the Fortnightly Review.
We are bound respectfully to consider the arguments
of an adversary of his calibre.
He appears to be unable to conceive the possibility
of a spiritual body which shall not die with the
natural body. Or rather, he conceives that he is in a
position to assert, from his knowledge of the universe,
that such a thing cannot be. We join issue with him
at once, for the depth of our ignorance with regard to
the unseen universe forbids us to come to any such
conclusion with regard to a possible spiritual body.
Our critic begins his article by summoning up or
constructing a most grotesque and ludicrous figure,
which he calls our argument, and forthwith proceeds to
demolish; and he ends by summoning up a horrible
and awful phantom, against which he feelingly warns
us. This phantom has already, it seems, destroyed
two civilisations, and is capable of even worse things,
though it is merely the ‘sifted sediment of a residuum.’
He does not tell us whether he means
Religion in general, or only that particularly objectionable
form of it called Christianity.
Our critic shows that he has not read our work,—has,
in fact, merely glanced into it here and there.
This is proved by what he says of Struve’s notions,
on which we lay no stress whatever, while he puts
them forward as the mainstay of our argument. We
are also made out to be the assertors of a peculiar
molecular constitution of the unseen universe, although
with reference to this we say in our work, page 217,
‘for the sake of bringing our ideas in a concrete form
before the reader, and for this purpose only, we will
now adopt a definite hypothesis.’ Of course it is too
much to expect a critic now-a-days to read every
word of a book which he is content to demolish, but
we did hope he might have noticed the italics.
Our critic too commits several singular mistakes
due to imperfections of memory. Why speak of the
negative as universal, which appears in such words as
immortality, endless existence, etc., when the most
common of all expressions connected with the subject
are the phrases, ‘eternal life,’ ‘everlasting life,’ etc.,
none of which involve the negative?
How the sun could go down upon ‘Gideon’ is not
obvious. Had it done so it would certainly have
occasioned personal inconvenience (to say the least)
to that hero. But what’s in a name? Our critic
was evidently thinking of Joshua and ‘Gibeon,’ and
why should a critic care about the difference between
Amorites and Amalekites? It is a mere matter of
spelling,—a trifle. Similar mistakes in a previous
article are apologised for in a footnote appended to
that on the ‘Unseen Universe.’ Probably the author
designed the apology to extend to it also, but forgot
to say so; again a trifle. But it is of straws, some
even weaker than these, that the imposing article is
built; so that when we come forth to battle we find
nothing to reply to.
To reduce matters to order, we may confidently
assert that the only reasonable and defensible alternative
to our hypothesis (or, at least, something
similar to it) is, the stupendous pair of assumptions
that visible matter is eternal, and that IT IS ALIVE.
(See § 240.) If any one can be found to uphold
notions like these (from a scientific point of view), we
shall be most happy to enter the lists with him.
We have made numerous small though sometimes
important changes in the text, but none of them at
all modify the general tenor of the work as it first
appeared two months ago.
PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION.
We have reason to think that notwithstanding all
we have said, the position we take is not yet clearly
understood, and we would therefore utilise the Preface
to our Third Edition to put ourselves right with the
public on this vital point.
To begin with the scientific side of our argument,
we must once more make the statement that it is not
we who are the dogmatists, but rather that school of
scientific men who assert the incompatibility of science
with Christianity.
Persistent as they have been in their endeavours
to close the door leading from the seen to the unseen,
we as resolutely maintain that it must be left
open.
This class take credit to themselves for having
thus barred the entrance to a throng of superstitious
fancies which would inevitably rush through an open
avenue—forgetting that they have by the same act
barred the way to all the higher aspirations of
man.
But though we have founded no argument for immortality
on the existence of these higher aspirations,
we cannot allow our adversaries to bar the way upon
the plea that it would inevitably be the resort of
unworthy passengers.
If it be the King’s highway it must be left open;
if the unseen universe be a reality, surely we are not
to dismiss it from our minds lest some people might
entertain absurd views regarding its relation to the
present visible universe. Such fancies are no new
thing in the progress of knowledge. When two
things are known to exist, we may have ten thousand
erroneous hypotheses regarding their mutual relations,
but only one true theory.
In the next place, we would say one word to that
religious school which is more particularly affected
by our present inquiry,—we mean the school who
assert the resurrection of our material bodies, and a
grossly material future state.
We have endeavoured to explain to this class of
men that their belief is inconsistent with the integrity
of that Principle of Continuity which underlies not
only all scientific inquiry, but all action of any kind
in this world of ours.
Under these circumstances such men have three
honest alternatives before them.
In the first place they may acknowledge the truth
of our position and change their views; or, secondly,
they may combat our argument regarding the alleged
incompatibility of their position with the Principle of
Continuity; or, lastly, they may decline to accept
this scientific principle in matters which concern their
faith. What we complain of is, that the members of
this school have chosen none of these alternatives,
but have rather attempted to brand us as infidels
and materialists, apparently forgetting (as usual) that
such a method of conducting a discussion is neither
Christ-like nor convincing.
But while one class of religious men have tried to
brand us with these names, those of another school
consider our theology narrow and gloomy. We reply
to these men that we do not pretend to be theologians
in any sense of the word. Our position in this
respect has been greatly misunderstood. We are, no
doubt, endeavouring to bring about a reconciliation
between science and religion. In order to accomplish
this we must first find out what is the fundamental
principle of science, next what is the fundamental
creed of the great majority of Christians, and then
endeavour to show that the two are not incompatible
with each other. In carrying out this process we
have been led to regard the Principle of Continuity
as the great law which regulates scientific inquiry,
and there cannot be a doubt that the Old and New
Testaments are regarded as authoritative expositions
of religious truth by the great majority of the Church
of Christ.
Now we find that the expressions in the Scriptures
regarding the future of man and the constitution of
the unseen world, taken in their obvious, if not
absolutely literal meaning, are not inconsistent with
scientific deductions from the Principle of Continuity.
We know very well that, especially of late years, a
multitude of religious schools have risen up who take
many of these expressions in a non-literal and far
from obvious acceptation, and who, perhaps, do not
accord the same authority to the writers as was formerly
done. Into the disputes between these various
religious schools we do not pretend to enter, nor do
we see that the Shibboleths of such schools can be
affected by our arguments, inasmuch as their discussions
have, in the great majority of cases, nothing
whatever to do with Physical principles. They are
rather founded on historical, or moral, or metaphysical
considerations, all of which are foreign to our
argument.
Having no pretensions to a title which we certainly
do not covet, we trust that we shall no longer be
regarded as theologians either of a narrow and
gloomy, or a lax and heretical school, or indeed of
any school whatsoever.
September 1875.
PREFACE TO THE FOURTH AND FIFTH EDITIONS.
In consequence of misapprehensions into which
several of our critics have fallen, we have prefixed
to this edition an Introduction wherein the objects
of our work, and the mode in which we seek to
attain them, are fully but compactly explained. We
need therefore say nothing on these matters here.
The work has been greatly enlarged, and in many
parts almost rewritten; but we have nowhere found
it necessary to alter or recall any of the statements
hitherto made by us.
As we now give our names, we can at length
complain of the conduct of a London ‘Weekly,’
which, only a few days after the first appearance of
our book, took the (we hope) very unusual course of
stating the authorship as a matter of absolute fact,
not of conjecture. It was, of course, not authorised
to do so, either by ourselves or by our Publisher:—and
we regret to find that the exigencies of competition
for public favour can be thought capable of
justifying, in the eyes of any one, such a course of
conduct.
As Professors of Natural Philosophy we have one
sad remark to make. The great majority of our
critics have exhibited almost absolute ignorance as
to the proper use of the term Force, which has had
one, and only one, definite scientific sense since the
publication of the Principia. As such men are usually
among the exceptionally well educated, ignorance of
this important question must be all but universal.
In addition to what we have said on the subject in
the text (§ 97), we would now only mention that the
sole recorded case of true Persistency or Indestructibility
of Force which we recollect having ever met
with, occurs in connection with Baron Munchausen’s
remarkable descent from the moon. It is, no doubt,
a very striking case; but it is apparently unique, and
it was not subjected to scientific scrutiny.
The present age is one of very rapid progress
in almost all branches of knowledge.
Like a wave swelling as it advances shoreward,
this progress has violently transformed
whole regions of thought, while it has repeatedly
invaded others not heretofore deemed
accessible to such catastrophes.
Presuming upon a soil of great natural richness,
the inhabitants of these latter regions had
for a long series of years given themselves up to
a species of husbandry which was beginning at
length to be detrimental in its effects.
It thus came to pass that while the immediate
result of each inundation was a sudden alarm
and consequent confusion, yet nevertheless a
fertilising residuum was always left behind,
together with a very plain intimation that no
region of thought can permanently flourish if it
be entirely cut off from any of the intellectual
influences around it.
Suchlike, we take it, have been the results of
the recent great floods of intellectual energy,
much of them seemingly subversive, which
have repeatedly invaded the region occupied
by the followers of Christianity. At present
there is no book more read than the Bible, no
life more deeply studied and discussed than
the life of Christ. There is probably a greater
amount of earnest attention devoted to these
subjects than to any other branch of human
inquiry. Nevertheless there is great confusion,
and an almost despairing outcry from many of
the inhabitants of the Christian region. It is
imagined that fences and landmarks have disappeared,
and that at length the rising tide is
about to attack, as it has long threatened, the
very lives and holdings of the community.
It will be our endeavour to reassure these
somewhat over-timid people. Being students
of physical science, we will try to gauge the
strength of the tide, and more especially of the
forces which give it motion, and endeavour to
convince those who are sufficiently calm to receive
conviction, that there neither is nor can
be any real danger to their lives and holdings
from the violence of the waters; but that, on
the contrary, they will ultimately receive a
blessing from that which will remain behind
after the present confusion has disappeared.
‘Skin for skin,’ said a certain evil one,
‘yea all that a man hath will he give for his
life,’ and the proverb is true (with a modification)
as regards the life of the soul, no less than
as regards that of the body. Take away all
hope of a future state,—appear to demonstrate,
if not with absolute certainty, yet with an
approach to it, that such a condition of things
is antagonistic to well-understood scientific principles,
and we feel certain that the effect upon
humanity would be simply disastrous.
At any rate, those who propound an argument
of this kind must reasonably expect determined
opposition from the followers of religion.
Let us here, before proceeding further, take
the opportunity of stating that we discuss only
the physical aspects of the argument regarding
a future state. Being neither metaphysicians
nor moral philosophers, we leave to others
more competent than we can be the argument
which may be based upon the universal craving
among the intelligent races of mankind for a
life beyond the grave.
In the fourth and following editions of our
work, while we have not materially altered our
argument, we have recast to some extent the
shape in which it was first put before the reader,
and this recasting has taken a more definite form
in our present edition.
The large amount of friendly criticism which
our work has called forth has convinced us
that we did not at first sufficiently separate
between certain conclusions which inevitably
flowed from our argument, and certain others
which, while deriving their strength from a
totally different quarter, were yet not inconsistent
with the former, but even, it might
be, supported by them. The consequence has
been that we have found ourselves credited
with attempts which were very far from our
thoughts, such, for instance, as the endeavour
to deduce Christian theological doctrine from
mere physical considerations.
We have therefore thought it desirable to
bring in review before the reader, in this introductory
chapter, the fundamental points of our
argument, more especially as in what follows
we may not always be able without an undesirable
formality to keep separate the foundation
and the superstructure.
In his justly renowned Analogy, Bishop
Butler begins with a chapter on a future life.
He says with great truth that if there is an
idea that death will be the destruction of living
powers, that idea must arise either from the
reason of the thing or the analogy of nature.
‘But it does not arise (he proceeds to say) from
the reason of the thing; for we do not know
what death is. Again, we do not know on what
the existence of our living powers depends; for
we see them suspended in sleep, for example, or
in a swoon, and still not extinguished. Neither
does it arise from the analogy of nature; for
death removes all sensible proof, and precludes
us consequently from tracing out any analogy
which would warrant us in inferring their
destruction.’ Now, it is well known that since
the days of Bishop Butler a school has arisen,
the members of which assert that they have
at length learned what Death is, and that in
virtue of their knowledge they are in a position
to tell us that life is impossible after death.
It is one of the main objects of this volume
to demonstrate the fallacy which underlies the
argument brought forward by this school. We
attempt to show that we are absolutely driven
by scientific principles to acknowledge the existence
of an Unseen Universe, and by scientific
analogy to conclude that it is full of life and
intelligence—that it is in fact a spiritual universe
and not a dead one.
But while we are fully justified by scientific
considerations in asserting the existence of such
an unseen universe, we are not justified in assuming
that we have yet attained, or can easily
or perhaps ever attain, to more than a very slight
knowledge of its nature. Thus we do not believe
that we can really ascertain what death is.
To those, therefore, who assert that there is
no spiritual unseen world, and that death is an
end of the existence of the individual, we reply
by simply denying their first statement, and in
consequence of this denial, insisting that none
of us know anything whatever about death.
Indeed, it is at once apparent that a scientific
denial of the possibility of life after death must
be linked with at least something like a scientific
proof of the non-existence of a spiritual
unseen world. For if scientific analogy be
against a spiritual Unseen, then evidently it is
equally against the likelihood of life after death.
But if, on the other hand, we feel constrained
to believe in a spiritual universe, then though it
does not follow that life is certain after death,
inasmuch as we do not know whether any provision
has been made in this unseen world for
our reception, yet it does follow that we cannot
deny the possibility of a future life. For to do
so would imply on our part such an exhaustive
knowledge of the Unseen as would justify us in
believing that no arrangement had been made in
it for our transference thither. Now, our almost
absolute ignorance with regard to the Unseen
must prevent us from coming to any such conclusion.
We have been accused by some of our critics
of being dogmatists. So far is this from being
true that in the first part of our argument—namely,
that which relates to a spiritual unseen:—we
are content to develop from the
present recognised condition of things. We
take the world as we find it, and are forced by
a purely scientific process to recognise the existence
of an Unseen Universe.
We are likewise led to regard the Unseen
as having given birth to the present universe,
a conclusion to which one of our leading critics
has apparently given his assent.
Here, however, we join issue with the materialistic
school. They continue to insist—against
all analogy as we take it—that this Unseen Universe
is a dead one, having no life worthy of the
name, although it must have existed for inconceivable
ages before the present Universe arose.
Let our readers remark that in all this we
introduce no dogma—we do not require to assert
or even assume the existence of God. We
are content to develop our argument from a
position which is common to our adversaries
and to ourselves.
An objection has been raised that our argument
tends to the Swedenborgian doctrine of a
spiritual body. Now, the same principles which
guide us from the continuous existence of the
outer world to acknowledge an Unseen, lead us
on the assumption of our own existence after
death to acknowledge what we may term a
spiritual body. In other words, our conception
of something which retains at once a hold upon
the past and a possibility of future life assumes
the form which we clothe in this or similar
language.[1] But why Swedenborgian? Why
not Pauline? Was it not the great Apostle
who first gave utterance to his belief in these
very words? If it be said to us that the way in
which we regard the spiritual body is decidedly
Swedenborgian, we would reply by asking our
critics to tell us in what way we regard it.
We certainly hold that if we are to accept
scientific principles, one of the necessary conditions
of immortality is a frame surviving death,
but we as resolutely maintain that of the nature
of this frame we are and must probably remain
profoundly ignorant.
It has likewise been objected that we do not
sufficiently allow for the possibility that the present
universe may be infinite, and that thus it
might last for ever and continue, although spasmodically,
to be the residence of living beings
even in spite of the constant degradation of its
energy. Unquestionably we cannot prove that
the present visible universe is not infinite; this
we have acknowledged in our work. But our
chief argument is derived rather from the past
than from the future. We maintain that the
visible universe—that is to say the universe of
atoms—must have had its origin in time, and
that while The Universe is, in its widest sense,
alike eternal and infinite, the universe of atoms
certainly cannot have existed from all eternity.
While we freely confess that we cannot prove
the finite magnitude of the universe of atoms,
inasmuch as we cannot be sure that the stars
which we see represent more than a small portion
of this universe, we are unable to perceive
any scientific principle which leads us to conclude
that the number of such atoms must
necessarily be infinite.
But whether it be finite or infinite, we have
very great difficulty in imagining this universe
to be eternal. Regarding the atom as something
that has been developed from a previously existing
unseen universe, we cannot readily believe
it capable of lasting for ever. But if there be
any element of decay in the material substance
of the visible universe, the assumption of its
present infinity will not enable us to predicate
its future eternity.
Having thus defined our position, we may
allow that in our earlier editions we have possibly
given undue prominence to the particular
argument in favour of an Unseen, which is
derived from the future degradation of the
energy of the present visible universe.
We come now to the second part of our
subject. All that we have yet endeavoured to
show is that the theory of a future life is not in
any way whatever in contradiction to any ascertained
facts or principles of science. But we
have not succeeded in finding any proof that
arrangements have been made in the Unseen
world for our translation thither after death.
It has been shown that there is nothing in
the whole range of science to lead us to suppose
that life is impossible after death; but we
have yet to inquire what evidence, if any, exists
in favour of a future state. Now it is well
known that the followers of Christianity believe
they have received such evidence in virtue of
the resurrection of Christ, and it is equally well
known that of late years a school of scientific
men have arisen who reject such an event as
one impossible to be believed.
It is not, however, rejected mainly because it
is an uncommon event, or one unconfirmed by
modern experience, for it is sufficiently well
known that uncommon events have a recognised
place in the universe. Thus, for instance,
there are certain conjunctions of the planets
which are very uncommon, and have not occurred
in modern experience, but we do not hesitate
for a moment to believe in the possibility of
their occurrence. Nay, we are in a position to
go further, and to assert that at particular epochs
of time, which we are capable of defining with
greater or less precision, such uncommon conjunctions
took place in the past, and will again
take place in the future. An absolutely new
comet, one which (from the fact that its orbit
is hyperbolic) was probably never in the solar
system before, and probably cannot again return
to it, is by no means a rarity.
Now we believe that an extension of purely
scientific logic drives us to receive as quite
certain the occurrence of two events which are
as incomprehensible as any miracle; these are:—the
introduction of visible matter and its energy,
and of visible living things into the universe.
Furthermore, we are led by scientific analogy to
regard the agency in virtue of which these two
astounding events were brought about as an
intelligent agency, an agency whose choice of the
time for action is determined by considerations
similar in their nature to those which influence
a human being when he chooses the proper
moment for the accomplishment of his purpose.
If this be true, the discussion regarding
miracles must be removed altogether from the
domain of science, and this for the very good
reason that scientific logic admits the occurrence
of events at least as astounding. The question
is now rather one for the historian and the moral
philosopher to decide. The first of these is
clearly bound to examine the evidence in
favour of the life and resurrection of Christ,
while the latter is bound to look around and
ask what moral necessity there was for the
interference of this peculiar intelligent agency,
and also whether, as a matter of fact, the interference
has proved beneficial.
But neither of these two ways of regarding
the subject is at all cognate to our inquiry.
We simply show that a reception of the
miracles of Christ leads to no intellectual confusion.
Meanwhile, there are some who regard
such a reception as tending to historical confusion,
or to moral confusion, or to both; but
with these sources of doubt we have nothing
whatever to do. It may be thought by some of
our readers that here our discussion ought to
end; but, as it appears to us, there yet remains
another point vitally connected with our inquiry.
There is, perhaps, hardly a human being who
seriously questions the moral beauty of the
character of Christ; there are many who
question the truth of the miracles recorded as
having been wrought by Him; while still more,
it may be, question the truth of certain of His
sayings, especially such as have reference to the
constitution of the Unseen world.
Entertaining the most profound reverence for
Christ Himself, many of the latter class, rather
than believe that Christ enuntiated the doctrine
to which they object, maintain that it may have
been a late human fiction which grew up with
and finally incrusted itself around the true sayings
of Christ: some again maintain that the
sayings were really those of Christ, but insist
that the common interpretation of them is erroneous.
On this account we conceive that in
order to complete our programme we should
extend our inquiry beyond the miracles of
Christ so as to embrace those of His sayings
which have reference to Himself and to the constitution
of the Unseen world. We are thus
led to the consideration of another subject, which
is, we venture to think, intimately connected
with that which appears on our title-page; and
in this respect the Bishop of Manchester has
very clearly defined our position by stating
that (from a purely physical point of view) we
contend for the possibility of immortality and
of a personal God.
We must now, however, start from a new
basis and assume the existence of a Deity
who is the Creator and Upholder of all things.
It is not our intention to enter into the argument
by which the existence of a Deity may be
derived from a consideration of His works.
Here, therefore, we must necessarily part company
with our materialistic friends, for while
they may have been content to go along with
us in our first argument to a greater or less
length, they will most assuredly not even set foot
upon the second stage of our journey. We
cannot help it.
Assuming therefore the existence of a Deity,
who is the Creator and Upholder of all things,
we further look upon the laws of the universe
as those laws according to which the beings in
the universe are conditioned by the Governor
thereof, as regards time, place, and sensation.
Nothing whatever lies, or can be even conceived
to lie, outside of this sovereign and paramount
influence. There is no impression made
upon the bodily senses—no thought or other
mental operation which does not take place
under conditions imposed by the will of God.
If it be asked how we can imagine any free-will
or moral responsibility to exist consistently
with this doctrine, we may reply that we cannot
tell in virtue of what peculiar constitution of
things the sovereignty of God is consistent with
our moral responsibility, nor can we even conceive
the possibility of our obtaining the knowledge
requisite to reply to this question. But
it may, we think, be shown that the doctrine of
the sovereign power of God as above defined
is not inconsistent with moral responsibility.
For in the statement made three things are
spoken of. In the first place, there is God, the
source of power; secondly, there are the conditions
which He imposes; and thirdly, there is
the Ego, the being who is thus conditioned.
Now, the laws of thought absolutely forbid our
dismissing this Ego. It may possibly be argued
that we consist of a bundle of sensations bound
together, just as a bundle of threads are, by
something which is no less a sensation, namely,
the impression that we have an individual
existence and moral responsibility; to which we
would reply that even if this be granted we
must submit to impressions from which there is
no escape.
Now, it appears to us that we cannot possibly
have any impression more deeply seated or
more impossible to uproot than this:—that we
ourselves exist and are responsible; it is something
which we continually carry about with us,
even into the grotesque regions of thought,
where all individuality is denied. It is into
these regions that the materialists invite us to
accompany them in order to perform, or rather
to delude ourselves with the idea that we have
performed, this singularly unhappy despatch!
But, just as we cannot conceive of a man
swallowing up himself, so neither can we conceive
of his getting rid of his own individuality
by any legitimate process of thought. Can we
conceive of consciousness without a being who
is conscious? or of sensation without a being
who feels? We may perhaps take it for granted
that the statements we have now made, acknowledging
at once a Sovereign Power and our own
moral responsibility, will commend themselves to
a large body of thinkers who will virtually agree
with our conclusions. It is to these we would
now address ourselves, inviting them to accompany
us upon the second stage of our journey.
Let us here, therefore, regarding ourselves as
moral and intellectual beings, bear in mind that
there are various avenues through which we
receive instruction. We do not, of course,
mean that these avenues are absolutely separate
from each other, inasmuch as they must all somehow
or other merge into the one grand avenue
through which we perceive the Sovereign Power
of God. Such avenues are,—the study of matter
and its laws,—communion with our fellows, and—example.
Now why should not all these various avenues
be filled with the knowledge of God, thus effecting
the displacement of a vast throng of mean
and loathsome influences which would otherwise
run riot there?
Surely that must be a singular process of
reasoning by which the Most High is altogether
banished from these avenues into which it is
alleged He cannot possibly condescend to enter.
We are confident there is some misapprehension
here; let us therefore try to point out its
probable nature.
We have assumed that a study of creation
leads us up to some conception of God—that
we are driven by the faculties which He has
given us to acknowledge the existence of a
Paramount Power, and inasmuch as scientific
thought leads us to regard The Universe as
both infinite and eternal, so are we driven to
regard this Power which underlies all phenomena
as infinite and eternal also.
This at least appears to us to be the conclusion
to which we are driven if we endeavour
to reduce mental confusion to a minimum.
It is, however, manifestly absurd to imagine
that by means of this process we can ever comprehend
the essential nature of God. We can
no more comprehend His essential nature by
this means than we can the essential nature of
matter or of life. But surely we can judge of
His character by the various modes in which
He influences us, and indeed all scientific generalisations—even
the simple conclusion that the
sun will rise to-morrow—are in a sense expressions
of our faith in the unchanging character
of God. Now if we examine the process by
which we have obtained this conception of God
it will be seen that we start with a single intellectual
being who is applying himself to a scientific
study of the works of nature. The idea of
our neighbour does not enter into it, and we
agree to regard ourselves as intellectual rather
than as moral or social beings. The result is
that having voluntarily confined our argument to
one channel, we obtain a knowledge of God’s
character—that is to say, of His manifested
relations towards us—which is necessarily incomplete.
But are we therefore entitled to say:—Because
we obtain a very imperfect conception
of God by this method, we will not
believe there is any other method by which this
conception may be rendered more complete?
Sound argument, it appears to us, leads the
other way altogether. For if we assume that
the knowledge of God derived from one source
is incomplete, ought we not to try whether it can
be supplemented by knowledge derived from
other sources? Undoubtedly if other sources
furnish, or seem to furnish, conceptions of God
which are fundamentally inconsistent with that
which we have derived through the scientific
channel, we are entitled to sit in intellectual
judgment upon them until the source of confusion
is in some way removed.
But does this inconsistency as a matter of
fact exist? We do not think it does. The
statements in the New Testament scriptures
regarding God are necessarily mysterious, but
mystery can be no test of their truth or falsehood,
inasmuch as it must in such regions be
the almost inevitable accompaniment of truth.
The question is not whether they are mysterious,
but whether they are consistent with
themselves, and with the knowledge we derive
from other sources. We therefore devote considerable
portions of this volume to a proof that
the conception of God which the majority of
Christians derive from the New Testament is
in no way inconsistent with that deduced from
scientific principles.
Meanwhile, and in conclusion, we must be
allowed to express our conviction that much
evil has been wrought by a certain class of
sincere and well-meaning men in the various
churches of Christ. By dint of contemplating
lofty truths from one point of view, and only
one, and by dint of developing excessively, and
in one direction only, those analogies by which
the mysterious has been rendered thinkable,
they have produced a result for which they
themselves are mainly to blame. With a
strange reversal of the process by which Satan
transforms himself into an Angel of Light, we
have the noble, the beautiful, and the true presented
to us by these men in a form which is
fit only to inspire aversion or to create disgust.
It is in such terms that we reply to those of
our critics, on the one hand, who attack us for
adopting what they call a narrow and gloomy
theology; and to those, on the other hand, who
regard as dangerous the method of discussion
we have pursued. We have tried honestly to
view things with two eyes,—the eye of knowledge
and the eye of faith: first with one, then
with the other, finally with both. To what extent
we have succeeded is, after all, a matter of
minor importance if only the lawfulness of this
mode of vision be ultimately allowed. And
just as we have a better appretiation of the form
and distance of natural objects when we view
them with both our physical eyes, so, we venture
to think, must it prove with the truths of
which we now speak.
We have explained that the first part of our
argument is altogether independent of revelation;
proceeding as it does solely upon scientific
data, and the conclusions which these seem to
render inevitable. In the second part, however,
we feel that we ought not to deprive ourselves
of the overwhelming additional evidence which
we derive from Christian records. Here, therefore,
we shall neither gratify one class of our
critics by starting from a point which ignores
what we regard as the fully warranted belief of
the great majority of Christians, nor shall we be
overruled by the excessive timidity of another
class who apparently regard a two-eyed man as
a monster in those regions where truths of
really vital importance are concerned.
The horrors and blasphemies of Materialism
are at least every first day of the week so fully
treated by many theologians that it is almost unnecessary
for us to say anything on their view of
the subject, especially as we could not compete
with the great majority of them in strength and
happy audacity of language. We would therefore
content ourselves with mildly inquiring
what sort of regard for the image of the Divine
in humanity is shown by those whose creed
levels us all with ‘the beasts that perish.’
Even the antient Pagans were less disposed to
such monstrosities:—
‘. . . . . . . . .
finxit in effigiem moderantum cuncta Deorum.
pronaque cum spectent animalia cetera terram,
os homini sublime dedit: cœlumque tueri
jussit, et erectos ad sidera tollere vultus.
sic, modo quae fuerat rudis et sine imagine, tellus
induit ignotas hominum conversa figuras.’
It is well for the human race that such
sophistical doctrines as those of Materialism
are as yet received by a small minority only.
‘If in this life alone we have hope,’ we should
be led by common sense and prudence to make
the best of it, our neighbour’s sufferings notwithstanding.
At least we should listen to
him only as did the judge ‘who neither feared
God, nor regarded man,’ when he said, ‘This
widow troubleth me; I will avenge her, lest by
her continual coming she weary me.’
We would conclude by observing that the
natural disinclination to receive as true a religion
whose very first effect is ‘to convict the
world of sin,’ is admirably set forth in the
striking words of Peter[2]: ‘Depart from me,
for I am a sinful man, O Lord.’
CHAPTER I. INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.
‘L’immortalité de l’âme est une chose qui nous importe si fort, et
qui nous touche si profondément, qu’il faut avoir perdu tout sentiment
pour être dans l’indifférence de savoir ce qui en est.’—Pascal.
‘For he should persevere until he has attained one of two things;
either he should discover or learn the truth about them, or, if this is
impossible, I would have him take the best and most irrefragable of
human notions, and let this be the raft upon which he sails through
life—not without risk, as I admit, if he cannot find some word of God
which will more surely and safely carry him.’—Plato’s Phædo;
translated by Jowett.
1. The great majority of mankind have always
believed in some fashion in a life after death; many
in the essential immortality of the soul; but it is
certain that we find many disbelievers in such doctrines
who yet retain the nobler attributes of humanity.
It may, however, be questioned whether it be possible
even to imagine the great bulk of our race to have
lost their belief in a future state of existence, and yet
to have retained the virtues of civilised and well-ordered
communities.
We have said that the disbelievers in such doctrines
form a minority of the race; but at the same
time it must be acknowledged that the strength of
this minority has of late years greatly increased, so
much so that at the present moment it numbers in
its ranks not a few of the most intelligent, the most
earnest, and the most virtuous of men.
It is, however, possible that, could we examine
these, we should find them to be unwilling disbelievers,
compelled by the working of their intellects
to abandon the desire of their hearts, only after many
struggles, and with much bitterness of spirit.
Others, again, without absolutely abandoning all
hope of a future existence, are yet full of doubt
regarding it, and have settled down into the belief that
we cannot come to any reasonable conclusion upon
the subject. Now, these men can have had nothing
to gain, but rather much to lose, in arriving at this
result. It has been reached by them with reluctance,
with misgivings, not without a certain kind of persecution,
nor without the loss of friends and the stirring
up of strife; still they have fearlessly looked things
in the face, and have followed whithersoever they
imagined they were led by facts, even to the brink of
an abyss.
It is the object of the present volume to examine
the intellectual process which has brought about such
results, and we hope to be able to show not only that
the conclusion at which these men have arrived is
not justified by what we know of the physical universe,
but that on the other hand there are many
lines of thought which point very strongly towards
an opposite conclusion.
2. A division as old as Aristotle separates[3] speculators
into two great classes,—those who study the
How of the Universe, and those who study the Why.
All men of science are embraced in the former of
these, all men of religion in the latter. The former
regard the Universe as a huge machine, and their
object is to study the laws which regulate its working;
the latter again speculate about the object of the
machine, and what sort of work it is intended to
produce. The disciples of How are accused by their
adversaries of being willing to sacrifice the individual
to the system; while the disciples of Why are
accused by their adversaries of being willing to
sacrifice the system to the individual.
We may compare the Universe to a great steamer
plying between two well-known ports, and carrying
two sets of passengers. The one set remain on deck
and try to make out, as well as they can, the mind of
the Captain regarding the future of their voyage after
they have reached the port to which they know they
are all fast hastening, while the other set remain below
and examine the engines. Occasionally there is much
wrangling at the top of the ladder where the two
sets meet, some of those who have examined the
engines and the ship asserting that the passengers
will all be inevitably wrecked at the next port, it
being physically impossible that the good ship can
carry them further. To whom those on deck reply,
that they have perfect confidence in the Captain, who
has informed some of those nearest him that the
passengers will not be wrecked, but will be carried in
safety past the port to an unknown land of felicity.
And so the altercation goes on; some who have been
on deck being unwilling or unable to examine the
engines, and some who have examined the engines
preferring to remain below.
3. Our readers will perceive from what we have
said, that difficulties regarding the possibility of a
future state of existence are most likely to arise
amidst the disciples of How or those who study the
machinery of the Universe, and inasmuch as this class
has greatly increased of late, it follows that the disbelievers
in or doubters of the future state have
increased likewise. The disciples of Why have, on
the other hand, existed from time immemorial, and
have, in the plenitude of their power, frequently
carried themselves with much violence towards the
disciples of How, who are of comparatively modern
origin. It must not, however, be inferred that this
old and venerable family have always been at peace
amongst themselves, for there have been numerous
contentions among their various sections, not the less
acrimonious because the contending members have
been to some extent supporters of a common cause,
believing in some fashion in the reality of a world to
come. We shall therefore begin by giving our
readers a sketch, necessarily and purposely a very
meagre one, of the various beliefs on these subjects
held by the different branches of this great family.
4. Let us begin with the Egyptians, who are perhaps
the most antient people of whom we have
historical records. The manners and customs of this
nation have been very minutely described by Sir
Gardner Wilkinson, to whose work we are chiefly
indebted for the following account. In the first place
it appears that we must separate between what the
priests believed and what was held by the great body
of the people. The bulk of the nation were left by
the priests to believe in a multiplicity of deities, and
even to reverence animals as divine, while on the
other hand the higher orders of the priesthood, who
were initiated into the greater mysteries of their
religion, appear to have acknowledged the unity of
God. These believed in one Eternal God, from
whom all other deities were produced, and whom
they did not permit themselves even to name, far less
to represent under any visible form. The Egyptians
likewise believed in the existence of Dæmons or Genii,
who were present unseen amongst mankind.
5. The earliest Egyptian records attest the belief of
this nation in the immortality of the soul:—‘Dissolution,
according to them, is only the cause of reproduction—nothing
perishes which has once existed, and
things which appear to be destroyed only change
their natures and pass into another form.’[4]
Anubis held in Egypt an office similar to that of
Mercury among the Greeks, being the usher of souls
in their passage to the future state. Amenti was the
region to which the souls of men were supposed to go
after death, and Sir Gardner Wilkinson notices the
resemblance between this name and that of Ement
‘the West’—the west, where the sun was seen to sink,
being looked upon as the end of the world. The
guardian of the lower regions was called Ouom-n-Amenti,
or the Devourer of Amenti. It had frequently
the appearance of a hippopotamus, but was
drawn sometimes with the head of a fanciful creature
something between the hippopotamus and the
crocodile.
‘The judgment of the soul was conducted by Osiris,
aided by forty-two assessors, supposed to represent
the forty-two crimes from which a virtuous man was
expected to be free when judged in a future state, or
rather the accusing spirits, each of whom examined if
the deceased was guilty of the peculiar crime which it
was his province to avenge.’[5]
6. As regards the fate of the soul when once the
judgment had been passed upon it,—the Egyptians
considered the souls of men to be emanations of the
Divine soul, and each was supposed to return to its
Divine origin when sufficiently pure to unite with the
Deity. On the other hand, those who had been guilty
of sin were doomed to pass through a series of torments
ending in the second death.
7. It is considered probable by some that the Egyptian
custom of embalming the body had relation to
this religious doctrine, and before the mummy was
allowed burial it had to be judged and acquitted by
terrestrial authorities. Diodorus gives a detailed account
of the ceremonies which then took place, in
which forty-two judges were summoned to act as
assessors and determine the fate of the body. If it
could be proved that the deceased had led an evil life,
his body was deprived of the accustomed burial, and
on such occasions the grief and shame felt by the
family were excessive. Diodorus considers that this
was in itself a strong inducement to every one to
abstain from crime, and praises very strongly the
authors of so wise an institution.
8. Let us next consider the antient belief of the
Hebrew nation.
Referring to the records of this nation, we find that
at an early period they had been slaves or serfs to
the Egyptians, from whom they were delivered by
Moses, who became afterwards their lawgiver. Moses
had by a species of adoption obtained a very prominent
position among the Egyptians, and had probably
been initiated into their sacred mysteries, for we read
that he was ‘learned in all the wisdom of the Egyptians.’
Without discussing the question of inspiration,
we may readily imagine that, himself a believer
in the unity of God, this sagacious leader must have
perceived the deficiency of a religious system in which
the truth was confined to a few, while the many were
allowed to remain in the most degrading idolatry.
He was thus in a fit state to recognise the paramount
importance of the whole mind and mass of the
nation being pervaded with a belief in one invisible,
ever-present, ever-living God. We do not, however,
mean to assert that Moses got his religious notions
from Egypt, but we think it possible that his mind
may have been prepared by the failure of the Egyptian
system to receive a better one.
9. In the Egyptian system there were two peculiarities
which were probably connected together. We
have seen (Art. 4) that amongst the higher orders
of the priesthood there was a profound, but at the
same time a superstitious, reverence for the name of
God, who was unnamed and unapproachable, unless
under some deified attribute. At the same time
there was, and probably in consequence of the former,
an ignorance of the unity of God amongst the great
mass of the people, and a worship of the various
deified attributes of one supreme being as so many
separate divinities.
10. Now the task which Moses believed himself
divinely commissioned to accomplish was the revelation
of this one living and ruling God to the whole
body of his countrymen. Thus we find God, in the
sacred writings of the Jews, saying to Moses, ‘I am
the Lord (Jehovah), and I appeared unto Abraham,
unto Isaac, and unto Jacob, by the name of God
Almighty (El Shaddai); but by my name Jehovah
was I not known to them.’[6] We do not however intend
to discuss the precise meaning of the two names
of God, which we find in the Hebrew Scriptures—sufficient
for us that Moses endeavoured to impress
upon his people the unity and ever-living presence of
the Divine Being.
11. Again, it would appear that the Jews, in addition
to their belief as a nation in the unity of God,
believed also in the reality of an invisible world containing
spiritual intelligences, some of whom were the
loyal servants and messengers of God, while others
delighted in the endeavour to thwart His counsels,
and were in rebellion against Him. Apparently both
orders of these were supposed to have very considerable
power, not only over the minds and bodies of
men, but also over the operations of nature. Thus
two angels were commissioned by God to destroy
Sodom;[7] and again, in the poem of Job, when Satan
received power over the Patriarch, he overwhelmed
him by at once inciting robbers who plundered his
substance, killing his children by a wind from the
wilderness, and finally smiting the body of Job himself
with a loathsome disease.
It is perhaps worthy of note that while we read in
these records of various appearances of good spirits
in the human form, we have no certain account of
any such manifestation of evil spirits. It may even
be supposed that a good deal of the Demonology of
Scripture belongs to poetic or semi-parabolic representation
of spiritual truths. Thus Coleridge and
others have thought that the Satan of Job is only
the dramatic accuser or adversary imagined by the
poet.
12. Very little is said about man’s future state in
the Scriptures of the Jews. The Hebrews, like the
Assyrians and Chaldeans, believed in Sheol (Hades),
a dark and gloomy abode peopled by the shades of
the dead. But the continued existence of the ‘pithless’
shades (Rephaim) in this land of powerlessness
and forgetfulness was not thought of as constituting
immortality, but rather as the essence of death itself.
The religious hope of immortality which appears in
some passages of the Old Testament takes the form
of a victory over or rescue from the fear of Sheol.
But this higher hope was not brought before the
mind of the Hebrew nation in the same way as was
the presence and unity of God. It seems to us that
Dean Stanley’s conjecture is probably correct where
he says, with reference to this omission, ‘Not from
want of religion, but (if we might use the expression)
from excess of religion, was this void left in the Jewish
mind. The future life was not denied or contradicted,
but it was overlooked, set aside, overshadowed
by the consciousness of the living, actual presence of
God Himself. That truth, at least in the limited conceptions
of the youthful nation, was too vast to admit
of any rival truth, however precious. When David
or Hezekiah shrank from the gloomy vacancy of the
grave, it was because they feared lest, when death
closed their eyes in the present world, they should
lose their hold on that Divine friend with whose
being and communion the present world had in their
minds been so closely interwoven.’[8]
13. As the nation grew older we find frequent and
distinct allusions indicating a belief in a resurrection
of some kind. Thus we find the angel saying to
Daniel, ‘And many of them which sleep in the dust
of the earth shall awake, some to everlasting life, and
some to shame and everlasting contempt. And they
that be wise shall shine as the brightness of the
firmament; and they that turn many to righteousness
as the stars for ever and ever.’[9] And again: ‘Go
thy way till the end be; for thou shalt rest and stand
in thy lot at the end of the days.’[10] Again, in the
Apocrypha, we find one of seven brethren who were
put to death by Antiochus, saying to that tyrant,—‘It
is good, being put to death by men, to look for
hope from God, to be raised up again by Him; as
for thee, thou shalt have no resurrection to life,’[11] and
the other brethren spoke in like manner. Here it is
evident from the whole chapter that the hope expressed
was rather the result of perfect trust in God
than derived from any process of their own reason,
or even from any revelation on the subject which
they imagined to have been made.
We have likewise the testimony of Josephus as
well as of the New Testament that the Pharisees
believed in a resurrection. Josephus tells us,—‘They
[the Pharisees] say that all souls are incorruptible,
but that the souls of good men only are removed into
other bodies, but that the souls of bad men are subject
to eternal punishment.’[12] Again, we learn from
the same two authorities that the Sadducees held
sceptical notions on the subject, and Josephus says—‘They
take away the belief of the immortal duration
of the soul, and the punishments and rewards in
Hades.’
14. If we next turn to the Greek and Roman mythologies
we find ideas of a future state very similar
to those entertained by the Egyptians, from whom
probably the Greek notions were originally largely
derived.
They called by the name of Elysium the abode
appropriated to the souls of the good, while those of
the wicked suffered punishment in Tartarus. It has
been well remarked by Archbishop Whately that
these regions were supposed to be of the most
dreamy and unsubstantial nature:—
‘The poet [remarks Whately] from whom so many
were content to derive their creed [meaning Homer]
represents Achilles among the shades as declaring
that the life of the meanest drudge on earth is preferable
to the very highest of the unsubstantial glories
of Elysium:—
Βουλοίμην κ’ ἐπάρουρος ἐὼν θητευέμεν ἄλλῳ,
Ἀνδρὶ παρ’ ἀκλήρῳ, ᾧ μὴ βίοτος πολὺς εἴη,
Ἢ πᾶσιν νεκύεσσι καταφθιμένοισιν ἀνάσσειν.
It is remarkable too that the same poet seems plainly
to regard the body not the soul as being properly “the
man” after death has separated them. We should be
apt to say that such a one’s body is here, and that he,
properly the person himself, is departed to the other
world; but Homer uses the very opposite language
in speaking of the heroes slain before Troy: viz.,
that their souls were despatched to the shades, and
that THEY themselves were left a prey to dogs and
birds:—
We agree with this writer that the belief in an unsubstantial
region of this description can have had no
real influence either in deterring men from vice, or in
encouraging them to virtue. Indeed its inevitable
tendency must have been to foster an undue regard
for the pleasures of this present life to the absolute
discouragement of goodness and virtue. For while
we of the present day regard the future life as in
some sense the reward of piety and goodness, the
antients looked upon Hades rather as a penalty
which inexorable fate had reserved for all men, and
from which even piety and goodness were powerless
to exempt their possessors.
Cum semel occideris, et de te splendida Minos
Fecerit arbitria;
Non, Torquate, genus, non te facundia, non te
Restituet pietas.
Infernis neque enim tenebris Diana pudicum
Liberat Hippolytum;
Nec Lethæa valet Theseus abrumpere caro
Vincula Pirithöo.
15. The active-minded as well as the gross-minded
members of the community could hardly be expected
to care much for such an unsubstantial future, and
this consideration may probably have led to the
readier acceptance of the doctrine of some of the
Greek philosophers who introduced a bodily state
after death. But these, in so doing, rather favoured
the doctrine of transmigration than that of a resurrection
of the body which was seen to die, and which,
after being devoured by dogs, or destroyed in some
other manner, they could hardly conceive to rise
again. It is well known that Pythagoras taught
the doctrine of transmigration, although as none
of his writings have come down to us we are
not sure of the exact manner in which he held
it. Plato also alludes to a similar doctrine, in a
passage which refers no doubt to the doctrine of the
pre-existence of souls, and to the view that it is a
punishment to become corporeal at all. He tells us:—‘If
any one’s life has been virtuous he shall obtain a
better fate hereafter; if wicked a worse. But no soul
will return to its pristine condition till the expiration of
ten thousand years, since it will not recover the use
of its wings until that period, except it be the soul of
one who has philosophised sincerely or together with
philosophy has loved beautiful forms. These indeed
in the third period of a thousand years, if they have
thrice chosen this mode of life in succession, ...
shall in the three thousandth year fly away to their
pristine abode, but other souls, being arrived at the
end of their first life, shall be judged. And of those who
are judged, some, proceeding to a subterraneous place
of judgment, shall there sustain the punishments they
have deserved; but others, in consequence of a
favourable judgment, being elevated into a certain
celestial place, shall pass their time in a manner
becoming the life they have lived in a human shape.
And in the thousandth year both the kinds of those
who have been judged, returning to the lot and election
of a second life, shall each of them receive a life
agreeable to his desire. Here also the human soul
shall pass into the life of a beast, and from that of a
beast again into a man if it has first been the soul of
a man. For the soul which has never perceived the
truth cannot pass into the human form.’[14] A certain
degree of choice is here supposed to be left to the
soul, and those who cannot attain to the more ethereal
and refined existence, have to choose a bodily one,
returning, after they have become sufficiently purified,
once more into human shape.
16. As a matter of course, a dim belief of this
nature gave rise to a class of philosophers who denied
the possibility of a future state altogether. The
advent of this school of thought was probably hastened
by outward events. In the golden age of
Greece a vigorous republic served to concentrate upon
itself the energies of the citizens, and under these
circumstances their minds were not likely to question
the truth of the national creed. While the gods
smiled upon them they were content to acknowledge
their active existence. It has been remarked by
Schmitz, that the unfavourable political circumstances
of the time may have been concerned in the rise of
the Epicurean school—‘thinking men were led to seek
within for that which they could not find without.’
The gods of Epicurus, this writer goes on to remark,
‘consisted of atoms, and were in the enjoyment of
perfect happiness, which had not been disturbed by
the laborious business of creating the world, and as
the government of the world would interfere with their
happiness, Epicurus conceived them as exercising no
influence whatever upon the world or man.’
It is of such gods the poet speaks when he says:—
‘For they lie beside their nectar, and the bolts are hurl’d
Far below them in the valleys, and the clouds are lightly curl’d
Round their golden houses, girdled with the gleaming world
Where they smile in secret, looking over wasted lands,
Blight and famine, plague and earthquake, roaring deeps and fiery sands,
Clanging fights, and flaming towns, and sinking ships and praying hands.’
The antient Roman poet Lucretius, in his well-known
poem ‘De Rerum Natura,’ has beautifully
interpreted the Epicurean philosophy. Adopting like
Epicurus the atomic or corpuscular theory of things,
he tells his readers that the soul of man perishes
along with the body, and that it is the height of folly
for man to be afraid of that which may happen to
him after death.
17. It is unnecessary to discuss in detail the tenets
of the various Greek and Roman philosophers. A
number of indefinite and sometimes contradictory
expressions sufficiently betrays the uncertainty of
their opinions. Desirous, it may be, themselves to
believe—desirous at least that the body of their countrymen
should believe—in a future state, it is yet
not wonderful that they should have felt strongly the
difficulty of believing, or have expressed their doubts
in writings which were not intended to be read by
the great mass of the people.
18. Proceeding now to the extreme east, it is well
known that of late years very great light has been
thrown upon the antient religions of the Brahmans,
the Magians, and the Buddhists. In an admirable
collection of essays by Professor Max Müller,[15] we
have a good epitome of what has been accomplished
by the laborious investigations of oriental scholars.
We learn from these that the most antient document
is the Rig-Veda, or Sacred Hymns of the Brahmans,
in which we have the religious belief of a large section
of the Indo-Germanic race at a period supposed
to be from 1200 to 2000 years before the Christian
era. In these hymns the gods are called Deva, a
word which is conjectured to be the same with the
Latin Deus. ‘It would be easy,’ says Max Müller,
‘to find in the numerous hymns of the Veda passages
in which every important deity is represented as
supreme and absolute. Thus in one hymn, Agni
(fire) is called “the ruler of the universe.”... In
another hymn, another god, Indra, is said to be
greater than all. “The gods,” it is said, “do not
reach thee, Indra, nor men,—thou overcomest all
creatures in strength.”... Another god, Soma, is
called the king of the world, the king of heaven and
earth, the conqueror of all.... Another poet says
of another god, Varuna, “Thou art lord of all, of
heaven and earth; thou art the king of all, of those
who are gods, and of those who are men.”... This
surely,’ remarks Max Müller, ‘is not what is commonly
understood by Polytheism. Yet it would be
equally wrong to call it Monotheism. If we must
have a name for it, I should call it Kathenotheism.
The consciousness that all the deities are but different
names of one and the same godhead, breaks
forth indeed here and there in the Veda. But it is
far from being general. One poet for instance says,
“They call him Indra, Mitra, Varuna, Agni; then he
is the beautiful-winged heavenly Garutmat—that
which is one, the wise call it, in divers manners; they
call it Agni, Yama, Mâtarisvan.”’
19. We learn from the same author that ‘there is
in the Veda no trace of metempsychosis, or that
transmigration of souls from human to animal bodies,
which is generally supposed to be a distinguishing
feature of Indian religion. Instead of this we find
what is really the sine quâ non of all real religion, a
belief in immortality and in personal immortality....
Thus we read, He who gives alms goes to the highest
place in heaven; he goes to the gods.... Again
we find this prayer addressed to Soma:—
‘Where there is eternal light, in the world where
the sun is placed, in that immortal, imperishable
world place me, O Soma!
‘Where King Vaivasvata reigns, where the secret
place of heaven is, where these mighty waters are,
there make me immortal!
‘Where there is happiness and delight, where joy
and pleasure reside, where the desires of our desire
are attained, there make me immortal!’
Max Müller further remarks, that the Rig-Veda
contains allusions, although vague, to a place of punishment
for the wicked. ‘The dogs of Yama, the
king of the departed, present some terrible aspects,
and Yama is asked to protect the departed from
them. Again, a pit is mentioned, into which the
lawless are said to be hurled down, and into which
Indra casts those who offer no sacrifices.’
20. A religion like this, however pure at its commencement,
was likely soon to become corrupted.
It speedily merged into idolatry and polytheism, as
far at least as the main body of the worshippers were
concerned, while at the same time the rule of the
Brahmans or officiating priests became strengthened
into an insupportable social tyranny. Thus a double
reformation was to be apprehended, corresponding on
the one hand to the religious, and on the other to the
ceremonial and social, development of the system.
21. The first reformation was that attributed to
Zoroaster and his disciples, whose belief is contained
in the Zend-Avesta. In his confession of faith, the
disciple of the Eranian or Zoroastrian religion declares,
‘I cease to be a worshipper of the daêvas.’
It must however be remembered that in this religion
daeva means devil, or evil spirit. Thus the
earliest forms of the Zoroastrian religion need not
have excluded, and apparently did not exclude, the
worship of good spirits.
Whilst the Zoroastrian disciples believed in a
supreme God who rules the world, they yet gave a
prominent place to a spirit of evil, which afterwards
received the name of Ahriman, and was supposed to
exercise very considerable influence over the order of
nature and the minds of men. Indeed, Ahriman is
apparently an independent power so strong that but
for the fact that he acts before he thinks, while
Ormuzd (the good spirit) thinks before he acts, the
victory of good would be doubtful. The whole
system hinges on this and on the fact that everything
noxious and evil in creation is the work of Ahriman.
Max Müller is of opinion that ‘the Zoroastrian
religion was founded on a solemn protest against the
whole worship of the powers of nature involved in
the Vedas;’ and again the same writer says, ‘The
characteristic change that has taken place between
the Veda and Avesta is, that the battle is no longer
a conflict of gods and demons for cows (alluding to
a Vaidik myth), nor of light and darkness for rain.
It is the battle of a pious man against the power of
evil.’
22. The disciples of the Zoroastrian religion believed
in a future state; the ill-speaker (the devil),
we are told in the Zend-Avesta, shall not destroy the
second life.
The following extracts given by Max Müller from
a catechism of the modern Parsis or disciples of
Zoroaster give us a very good idea of their present
creed:—
‘Q. Whom do we of the Zarthosti community
believe in?
‘A. We believe in only one God, and we do not
believe in any besides Him.
‘Q. Do we not believe in any other God?
‘A. Whoever believes in any other God but this is
an infidel, and shall suffer the punishment of hell.’
In another extract the disciples are told that in
the world to come they shall receive the return
according to their actions.
23. The next reform of the Brahminical system
had reference to its social characteristics, and was
occasioned by the insupportable tyranny of the
priesthood. The reformer, a young prince, was born
about 500 years B.C., and from his life and doctrines
received the name of Buddha, or the Enlightened.
After having learned from various famous Brahmans,
he came to the conclusion that their austerities and
doctrines could neither free men from the miseries of
this life nor from the fear of death. From this stage
Buddha passed into the belief that all we see is
vanity—a delusion, a dream—and that the highest
wisdom consists in perceiving this, and in desiring to
enter into Nirvâna, or, in other words, to be blown
out like a flame.
It would seem from these words that Buddha
himself regarded annihilation rather than immortality
as the summum bonum; but no account of
Buddhism would be satisfactory which did not pay
special regard to the notion so widely diffused in
heathenism, that matter is the source of all evil. To
be liberated from matter is to be liberated from evil;
and this would seem to be the fundamental thought
in the Nirvâna in all its different senses. But however
this may be, we know that, allied to these
extreme metaphysical opinions, Buddha inculcated a
moral code which is one of the purest the world has
ever known. M. Laboulaye says, ‘It is difficult to
comprehend how men not assisted by revelation
could have soared so high;’ and M. Barthélemy
Saint-Hilaire does not hesitate to assert that ‘with
the sole exception of Christ, there is not amongst the
founders of religion a more pure or touching figure
than that of Buddha.’
24. In process of time, among the followers of the
Buddhist religion, the word Nirvâna came to have a
very different meaning from that which it had at
first. Buddha was himself worshipped as a divinity,
and his Nirvâna came to denote a state in which
there was a total absence of pain, or in other words
an Elysium.
In illustration of this we may quote the account
given by Max Müller of the dying words of Hiouen-Thsang,
a famous pilgrim from China to the shrine of
Buddha, who died in the year of our era 664:—
‘I desire,’ he said, ‘that whatever merits I may
have gained by good works may fall upon other
people. May I be born again with them in the
heaven of the blessed, be admitted to the family of
Mi-le, and serve the Buddha of the future who is full
of kindness and affection. When I descend again
upon earth, to pass through other forms of existence,
I desire at every new birth to fulfil my duties towards
Buddha, and arrive at the last at the highest and
most perfect intelligence.’
25. Having thus surveyed, however imperfectly, the
belief regarding a future state held by the greater
nations both of the East and West before the advent
of Christianity, let us now make a few observations.
In the first place, there are manifestly two ways in
which such a belief may be held. In one of these it
becomes the natural result of an implicit faith in God
and his goodness, which will not suffer him to disappoint
the natural and innate longings of his intelligent
creatures. And such a belief is most likely to
arise amongst a nation which has already vividly
realised the living presence and goodness of God.
Now the ancient Jews were such a nation, and the
belief that even death cannot break the fellowship of
the believer with God comes out clearly enough in
several of the Psalms. Moreover, the notion of some
sort of future life lies clearly in what is said of
Enoch. All this goes beyond the mere notion of
Sheol, which is not thought of as a happy place.
But in the time of the Maccabees this had grown into
a definite belief in the resurrection, and without insisting
on the truthfulness of the Second Book of
Maccabees as an historical document, we may yet be
sure that it embodies the feelings of the Jewish nation
at the time when it was written. It is of little consequence
whether a mother and seven brethren were
actually put to death because they would not transgress
what they believed to be the laws of God, or
whether in dying they expressed their belief that
they would be continued in a bodily existence by
the Creator. For it is manifest from what we know
of the Jews, that not merely one family but many
would under similar circumstances have acted in the
manner described by the historian, dying with the
same fortitude and encouraged by the same hope.
We have here a region in which there is no thought
of the How—this troublesome question has not yet
arisen, nor is it likely to arise. No doubt has yet
been entertained regarding the power of God, nor
would such a doubt be likely to receive much encouragement
here.
26. But the human mind will not refrain from
speculation, and this brings us to the second method
in which a belief regarding a future state may be
held. It may be held after a mode determined by
speculations regarding the possible conditions of a
future state. Such speculations may of course take
every variety of form, but yet there are three well-defined
classes into which they naturally group themselves:—
In the first place, we have the doctrine of an ethereal
state, which may or may not be eternal;
Secondly, we have the doctrine of a bodily existence,
which may or may not be eternal; and,
In the third place, we have the doctrine that a future
state is inconceivable or impossible.
27. The first of these beliefs was probably held by
a portion of the Egyptians, Greeks, and Romans, and
by most of the Jews. It was likewise held by many
amongst the eastern nations. It formed indeed one
of the two ways of imagining a future state, but it
was of a very vague and dreary nature; and from
the passage of Homer already quoted (Art. 14), we
realise the longing supposed to be felt by the inhabitants
of such a place to escape into a more substantial
region. Unquestionably it was not a place in
which practical men like the Jews, for instance, would
wish to dwell, and yet no doubt it had great attraction
for minds of a visionary and ecstatic nature,
who held matter to be the source of evil.
The return of the soul to its divine original, an
Egyptian doctrine, the entrance into Nirvâna, proclaimed
by Buddha, and the absorption into Buddha
himself, proclaimed by some of his followers, are all
proofs that a doctrine of this nature has peculiar fascinations
for a dreamy order of minds. Nor must we
analyse too rigidly the exact meaning and tendency
of such doctrines, inasmuch as we cannot easily enter
into the real feelings of those who propounded them,
and who probably entertained conceptions which cannot
adequately be expressed in words.
28. Coming now to the belief in a bodily future
existence, it is remarkable that the doctrine of a transmigration
of souls was extensively prevalent among
all the nations we have named, if we except the Jews.
It was believed in, as we have seen, by a large class
of the Egyptians; it was introduced into Greece by
Pythagoras and his followers; it is considered to
have been from time immemorial a common property
of the various religions of the extreme East; and it
is recorded by Cæsar that the Druids believed in the
same doctrine, although they confined the transmigration
to human bodies.
It will perhaps surprise many of our readers to
learn the extensive prevalence of such a doctrine,
wondering as they must how it is possible to attach
certainty to an existence which passes through the
body of various men and animals—something perhaps
like a draught of Lethe being administered at
the moment of passage. But the antients, being unable
to rise to a higher conception of a bodily future,
were compelled to admit either this doctrine or one
yet more absurd, namely, that the very same body
which was laid in the tomb will once more be animated
by the spirit which formerly possessed it. It
does not therefore surprise us that the antients, with
the exception probably of a portion of the inhabitants
of Egypt, and some of the Jews, should have preferred
the doctrine of transmigration; but we are exceedingly
surprised that the alternative doctrine, of
manifestly Egyptian parentage, should have come to
be accepted by the modern nations of Europe under
the garb of Christianity. We shall return again to
this subject, but meanwhile let us observe that, when
men first began to ask the How of a future state, the
reply was something extremely vague and unsatisfying.
No wonder, then, that a class of men who had
not unlimited confidence in God, and who could not
believe in either of the doctrines of a future state,
should have lapsed into philosophical infidelity and
denied altogether the possibility of a future state.
29. We have thus arrived at a stage of development
in which we may imagine the next step to be
one which will throw some light upon this question
of How—that is, which will give, or at any rate profess
to give, some information regarding the conditions
of a future life. The intellect of man had
attempted to obtain such knowledge for itself, but
the result was a conspicuous failure; the sword was
not sharp enough, nor the arm which wielded it
powerful enough, to hew down the thick and seemingly
impenetrable barrier which closes the avenue to
the world of spirits.
‘We cannot go to them,’ was the unanimous wail
of the antient philosophers; till some of the more
hopeful of them suggested as an alternative that they
might come to us. For clearly, if A and B are separated
from each other by a barrier, and there yet
remains good-will between them, two courses are
possible, and only two, if they are to be made acquainted
with each other. One or other must surmount
the barrier. If A be so weak as to be unable
to do so, and if at the same time it would be a matter
of importance to him to become better acquainted
with B, then B may be expected to surmount the
barrier if it be surmountable, and exhibit himself
to A.
30. As a matter of history, it appears that about
the time of the birth of Christ there was an expectation,
however vague, that something of this nature
was about to take place. And when Christ made
His appearance, and gathered round Him a little
band of disciples, there can be no doubt that He
claimed to be the bearer of intelligence from the
world of spirits. All who accept the gospel narratives,
however much they may differ from one another
as to the light in which they regard His person and
doctrine, will yet, we think, agree in this. The claim
made by His disciples for His gospel was that it ‘had
brought life and immortality to light’ (2 Tim. i. 10),
and that Christ had by his resurrection ‘abolished
death.’ The grounds of the claim were built upon
the belief that He showed Himself after His resurrection
to a body of men who had not previously
believed that the Messiah Himself was to die and
rise again.
His disciples in short took His resurrection for a
proof that life is possible after death. Christ was
believed to be the first-fruits of a system which was
destined ultimately to enfold in the same glorious
immortality all those of His disciples who were united
to their Master by a sincere and living faith. Evidently
Paul attached the utmost importance to the
fact of Christ’s resurrection, for he says (1 Cor. xv. 14),
‘If Christ be not risen, then is our preaching vain,
and your faith is also vain. Yea, and we are found
false witnesses of God: because we have testified of
God that he raised up Christ; whom he raised not
up, if so be that the dead rise not. For if the dead
rise not, then is not Christ raised: and if Christ be
not raised, your faith is vain; ye are yet in your
sins.’
31. Let us now try to ascertain what sort of future
state was taught by Christ. In the first place, it was
a bodily state—a state which could even adapt itself
with some modification to the views of the Pharisees
who believed in the resurrection of the body. But
the modification introduced is sufficiently important.
The occasion of its announcement was a disputation
with the Sadducees, who attempted to perplex Christ
by stating to Him the case of a woman who had been
married in this life to seven brethren in succession,
and then asking Him whose wife she should be in
the resurrection. We are told (Matthew xxii. 29)
that in reply to this question, ‘Jesus answered and
said unto them, Ye do err, not knowing the scriptures,
nor the power of God. For in the resurrection they
neither marry nor are given in marriage, but are as
the angels of God in heaven.’ We may gather by
implication from this narrative, that the question
would have puzzled the Pharisees, who had certainly
not arrived at this idea of the resurrection state.
They must evidently have thought that the resurrection
body was to be similar to the present one,
and although they believed in the existence of angels,
and their occasional appearance to human beings,
they cannot have risen to the idea that it was possible
for man to reach a similar state after death.
32. It may perhaps be said that many of Christ’s
sayings would seem to lead towards the doctrine of a
resurrection of the very same material particles which
are laid in the grave. To this, however, it may be
replied that Christ undoubtedly wished to impress
upon His hearers, who were for the most part unlearned
and ignorant men, the substantial and bodily
reality of the future state, and therefore spoke in
plain language without entering into scientific minutiæ,
which would only have perplexed them, and diminished
the impression which His words were otherwise
calculated to produce. Few of His hearers would
trouble themselves about the mode, nor was it until
an objection was started by the learned Sadducees
that Christ took occasion to develop His doctrine.
In accordance with this view we see that a similar
difficulty must have occurred more than once in the
life of Paul, who was brought into contact with the
philosophy of Greece and Rome. For in one of his
Epistles[16] he asks the question,—How are the dead
raised up? and with what body do they come? He
then replies to the supposed objector in the following
noble and beautiful language:—‘There is one glory
of the sun, and another glory of the moon, and
another glory of the stars; for one star differeth from
another star in glory. So also is the resurrection
of the dead; it is sown in corruption, it is raised in
incorruption: it is sown in dishonour, it is raised in
glory: it is sown in weakness, it is raised in power:
it is sown a natural body, it is raised a spiritual body.
There is a natural body, and there is a spiritual
body.’
33. In the next place we remark, that this conception
of a spiritual body similar to that of the angels
is accompanied in the religious system of Christ by
a conviction that the present visible universe will
assuredly pass away. This is expressed in both
divisions of the writings acknowledged as sacred by
the disciples of Christ. Thus it is said:—‘Of old
hast thou laid the foundation of the earth; and the
heavens are the works of thy hands. They shall
perish, but thou shalt endure; yea, all of them shall
wax old like a garment: as a vesture shalt thou
change them, and they shall be changed.’[17] Again,
Paul tells us that ‘the things which are seen are
temporal, but the things which are not seen are
eternal.’[18] Likewise also Peter says—‘The day of
the Lord will come as a thief in the night; in the
which the heavens shall pass away with a great noise,
and the elements shall melt with fervent heat; the
earth also, and the works that are therein, shall be
burned up.... Nevertheless we, according to his
promise, look for new heavens and a new earth,
wherein dwelleth righteousness.’[19] In like manner
John tells us that he saw in a vision ‘a great white
throne, and him that sat on it, from whose face the
earth and the heaven fled away; and there was found
no place for them.’[20]
From all this we may conclude that the more advanced
disciples of Christ supposed the resurrection
body to be angelic in its nature, and similar to that
which they believed Christ had himself assumed;
and further, that they supposed this body would remain
when the present visible universe had passed
away.
34. We have already remarked that it was the
object of Christ to bring the future state in a very
vivid manner before His disciples, so that they might
realise its substantial existence, and He has accordingly
given them on the one hand exalted descriptions
of the joys of heaven, and on the other awful
accounts of the fate of the lost. Heaven was variously
described by Him as a banqueting house, as a beautiful
city, as Abraham’s bosom, and, when speaking
to His immediate disciples, as a place where they
shall dwell together with their Master. On the
other hand, it is believed that Christ’s description of
hell was borrowed from the valley of Hinnom, a
place near Jerusalem, which formed the receptacle for
every species of filth, the combustible parts of which
were consumed by fire. Putrefaction, or the worm,
was always busy there, and the fire was always burning,
and this may have given rise to the expression:
‘Where their worm dieth not, and the fire is not
quenched.’ There can be no doubt, we think, that
such descriptions were meant to be allegorical, the
intention being by forcible earthly images to convey
an idea of what could not otherwise be conveyed.
35. It is well known that many varieties of opinion
have been entertained regarding the person of Christ
even by those who profess to be His disciples. It is
not however here our object to enter into theological
controversies; our treatment of this subject is at
present historical, and we will therefore bring before
our readers only those views regarding the person of
Christ and the constitution of the invisible world,
which are held by the large majority of those who
call themselves Christians.
Whilst all the Christian Churches believe in one
God, yet by most of them the Godhead is believed to
consist of three persons, the Father, the Son, and the
Holy Ghost. The first of these appears to be regarded
as the Being or Essence in virtue of whom the
Universe exists. Thus in reciting the Apostles’
Creed the Christian disciple says:—‘I believe in God,
the Father Almighty, maker of Heaven and Earth;’
and the laws of the Universe are regarded by Christian
theologians as being expressions of the will
acting in conformity with the character of this Being.
Thus Nature (according to Whately) is the course in
which the Author and Governor of all things proceeds
in His works.
But the majority of Christian Churches virtually
assert that there are two other Divine Persons, who
work through and by the Universe.[21] One great object
of the second Person of the Trinity is held to be the
manifestation of God to man, and possibly to other
beings, in a manner and to an extent which could not
be accomplished by finite intelligences. One great
object of the third Person is to enter, as Lord and
giver of life, into the souls of men, and possibly of
other beings, and to dwell there in such a manner as
to fit them for the position which they are destined
ultimately to occupy in the universe of God.
36. In Christ it is supposed that we have an incarnation
of the second Person of the Trinity, and the
work which He accomplished is regarded as done not
in violation of the order of things as established by
God the Father, but rather in strict obedience to it.
But while this is generally accepted by the Church of
Christ, yet the doctrine of the submission of Christ
to law has been held by some as not inconsistent
with a view which regards the miraculous works of
Christ as manifestations of His divine nature, so
changing the order of things as to denote something
wrought upon the universe rather than something
wrought through it and by its means. We do not
think that this theory is borne out by the words of
Christ himself. He says: ‘I seek not mine own will,
but the will of the Father who sent me.’[22] Again, we
are told by Paul, that ‘when the fulness of the time
was come, God sent forth his Son, made of a woman,
made under the law, to redeem them that were under
the law, that they might receive the adoption of
sons.’[23]
Christ also frequently represents His works as
wrought by the Father, as for instance when he says:—‘I
do nothing of myself; but as the Father hath
taught me, I speak these things.’[24] In fine, the whole
genius of Christianity would appear to point towards
a total submission of Christ in every respect to all
the laws of the universe: for these, indeed, as we shall
soon have occasion to show, form but another expression
for the will of God acting in conformity with His
character. To make our meaning clear, we may say
that the will of man is accomplished in conformity
with the laws of the universe, while on the other hand
the will of God, as above defined, constitutes in itself
the laws of the universe. Now it appears to us from
what we find contained in the books of the Christian
religion, that Christ must in this sense be regarded as
similar to man; but, inasmuch as the relation of
Christ to the universe is there asserted to have been
different from that of any mere man, so the works of
Christ are to be regarded as different from those which
any mere man can accomplish.
37. The Christian system, of which we have thus
briefly described the peculiarities, was soon called
upon to do battle, on the one hand with the antient
philosophies of Greece and Rome, and on the other
with the semi-savage creeds of those less civilised
races of man which were destined ultimately to overpower
the Roman Empire. But it was chiefly when
the apostolic pioneers came into contact with the
acute minds of the antient philosophers that we have
light struck regarding what may be termed the philosophical
system of Christianity; thus we have already
remarked (Art. 32), that the nature of the glorified
body is most clearly indicated to us by the Apostle
Paul. As respects the more barbarous nations which
afterwards embraced Christianity, they were not likely
to puzzle themselves about the physical possibilities
of a future state, nor even to contest the reality of a
place of eternal physical torment. And so it happened
that, when dealing with a lower class of converts,
some prominent Christians in post-apostolic
periods appealed more to their fears than to their
hopes, bringing vividly before them awful ideas of the
nature of hell; while on the other hand, the higher
class of converts, if they had not a very clear idea of
heaven, were yet drawn with intense longing to a
future which they were to spend in the company of
Christ.
38. In the course of a few hundred years we find
the whole Roman Empire converted to Christianity,
while, however, in Arabia and the East it appears
either to have made very little progress, or to have
become corrupted into something very different from
that which we read of in the New Testament. It
had not become the national religion of the Arabs;
and we can well imagine that this nation, with their
pretensions to be regarded as the most antient representatives
of the Semitic race, would not look kindly
upon a religion which took its origin in a rival branch
of the same family. We can further imagine that, with
such a feeling, they would be very ready to welcome
any skilfully devised religious system which should
spring up amongst themselves. Such an opportunity
was afforded them by Mohammed. Acknowledging
in some measure the claims of Moses and of Christ,
Mohammed yet claimed for himself and his religion
a superiority over his rivals, flattering by this means
the vanity of his own countrymen, who considered
themselves the elder branch of the Semitic race. The
heaven which was promised by Mohammed was altogether
of a sensuous character, and well calculated to
strike the imagination of his countrymen. He succeeded
equally well in describing hell as a place of
physical torture reserved for those who did not believe
in his religion. He further commissioned his
followers to propagate his tenets by the sword, so
that men became converts from dread of earthly
punishment, and were retained in his ranks by the
success which attended his arms, and by the promise
of a paradise full of earthly delights, as well as by the
threat of a horrible material hell which was reserved
for unbelievers. We could not possibly have a better
or more graphic description of such a system than
that which is given us by Byron:—
‘But him the maids of paradise
Impatient to their halls invite,
And the dark Heaven of Houris’ eyes
On him shall shine for ever bright;
They come—their kerchiefs green they wave,
And welcome with a kiss the brave!
Who falls in battle ’gainst the Giaour
Is worthiest an immortal bower.
But thou, false Infidel! shalt writhe
Beneath avenging Monkir’s scythe;
And from its torment ’scape alone
To wander round lost Eblis’ throne,
And fire unquench’d, unquenchable,
Around, within, thy heart shall dwell;
Nor ear can hear nor tongue can tell
The tortures of that inward hell!’
The disciples of Mohammed believed in the unity of
God, but it is evident that they had not a very exalted
conception of His character. Their trust in Him
could infuse zeal into their hearts and vigour into
their arms when they went to make proselytes by the
sword, but could not produce that lofty type of character
which has so frequently appeared amongst the
followers of Christ.
39. We have now reached in the history of our
problem the period known as the dark ages, during
which the spirit of scientific inquiry was well-nigh
extinct. At length, however, there arrived a time
when the human mind, from a variety of causes, suddenly
awoke from the lethargy into which it had sunk.
When scientific thought was once more directed to
the subject of immortality it was easily seen that the
doctrine of the resurrection in its vulgar acceptation
could not possibly be true, since a case might easily
be imagined in which there might be a contention
between rival claimants for the same body. We
might, for instance, imagine a Christian missionary
to be killed and eaten by a savage, who was afterwards
killed himself. It is indeed both curious and
instructive to note the reluctance with which various
sections of the Christian Church have been driven
from their old erroneous conceptions on this subject;
and the expedients, always grotesque, and sometimes
positively loathsome, with which they have attempted
to buttress up the tottering edifice. Some deem it
necessary that a single material germ or organised
particle of the body at death should survive until the
resurrection, forgetting that under such a hypothesis
it would be easy to deprive a man of the somewhat
doubtful benefits of such a resurrection, by sealing
him up (while yet alive) in a strong iron coffin, and
by appropriate means reducing his whole physical
body into an inorganic mass. Boston, again, in his
Fourfold State, goes still further, adopting the idea
that a single particle of insensible perspiration which
has escaped from a man during his life, will be sufficient
to serve as a nucleus for the resurrection body.
So that according to the disciples of this school, the
resurrection will be preceded by a gigantic manufacture
of shoddy, the effete and loathsome rags of what
was once the body being worked up along with a
large quantity of new material into a glorious and
immortal garment, to form the clothing of a being
who is to live for ever! Unquestionably we have
continuity in this hypothesis, but it is the continuity
of the Irishman’s coat in the story, the owner of
which always made a point of retaining as many as
possible of the rags which were present on the last
occasion, those only which had absolutely fallen to
pieces being replaced by something new! We have
only to compare this grotesquely hideous conception
with the noble and beautiful language of Paul, to
recognise the depth of abasement into which the
Church had sunk through the materialistic conceptions
of the Dark Ages.
40. But it is needless to say that this offer of a
certain class of theologians to surrender everything
except a single shred of the worn-out body, liberal
as it may appear, was nevertheless at once rejected
by the school of scientific men. Death, they replied,
must be regarded as a total and complete destruction
of the visible body, so far at least as the individual
life is concerned. At the same time professing themselves
unable to conceive such an existence as a disembodied
spirit, they were forced to conclude like
Priestley,[25] that the soul is not in its nature immortal.
At this point, however, the scientific school splits up
into two or even three sections, one believing with
Priestley and others that immortality is a fresh and
miraculous gift conferred upon man at the resurrection;
another, unable to conceive the possibility of
a miracle in the case of each individual, denying a
future state altogether; while a third section maintains
that there is no use in discussing the subject,
because man after death has passed beyond the
sphere of human inquiry.
41. Regarding the existence and nature of the
Deity, various opinions have been entertained by the
disciples of what we may term the extreme school
of science. Some have maintained that we have no
evidence of the existence of any such Being, others
that we have no evidence of His personality, while
others argue that although we may become convinced
of His great power and wisdom from the
works of creation, there are other attributes of His
character which are not so revealed. We cannot, for
instance, say they, maintain the benevolence of the
Deity in the way in which we understand the word
benevolence, nor have we any evidence that He is
just in the way in which we understand the word
justice. It is well known that the late John Stuart
Mill would have regarded the claims of Christianity
with more favour had its character been more Manichæan,
that is to say, had the spirit of evil been
allowed a position more nearly equal to that of the
spirit of good in the government of the universe.
42. Let us here pause to indicate two points of
similarity between this scientific school and the system
of Christianity. Both, we conceive, maintain in
some sense the supremacy of law or the invariability
of the procedure adopted by the Deity in the government
of the universe (Art. 36); both maintain likewise
that the outer works of the visible universe are
insufficient to manifest certain attributes of the Deity.
Here, however, the likeness ends; this scientific
school conceive they have no information beyond the
visible universe, while the Christian system asserts
the existence of an invisible order of things, and the
fact of communications having taken place between
the two for the double purpose of revealing God to
man, and of raising man towards God.
43. Leaving now the views of those who may be
said to constitute the extreme left, let us shortly
consider the various opinions held regarding a future
state by those who, though often differing widely
from one another, yet rank themselves within the
pale of Christianity.
Not a few who revere the sacred writings, believe
nevertheless that the descriptions of the unseen world
contained therein are purely allegorical. These do
not believe in the existence of evil spirits exercising
an influence over the mind of man. Satan is regarded
by them as a personification of evil (Διαβόλος,
the accuser, Devil’s advocate) rather than as possessing
a real objective existence. The worst half
of the unseen world having thus been got rid of,
the other half follows in due course. Such men do
not believe in the unseen presence of angels (ἄγγελος,
messenger); in fine they conceive that there is nothing
above man but the Deity, and that He always
acts according to rigid law. It is an immediate step
from this to believe in the futility of prayer, which is
looked upon as necessarily devoid of any objective
influence, although the practice of it may be regarded
as possessing a beneficial subjective effect. A future
life is believed to be conceivable, but only under conditions
and in a universe about which we know and
can know nothing. At this point, however, the views
of what may be called the left centre come into contact
with those of the extreme left.
44. But there are others quite disposed to believe
in the existence of the unseen world, who yet regard
as figurative a large part of the Biblical descriptions.
Some, like the Church of Rome, consider the separation
of the souls of men after death into two categories,
and only two, as insufficient and unsupported
by the spirit of Scripture; while others cannot admit
the eternity of misery, but believe that the most
reprobate will ultimately be reclaimed and elevated
into the regions of bliss.
Others again, arguing from some expressions in the
Bible, regard immortality as a boon reserved for the
good alone, believing that the wicked will be annihilated,
both soul and body, in hell. No doubt by
an energetic nature such a fate would be regarded as
even worse than endless misery:
Sad cure! for who would lose,
Though full of pain, this intellectual being?
Those thoughts that wander through eternity
To perish rather, swallowed up and lost
In the wide womb of uncreated night,
Devoid of sense and motion.
So speaks Milton, putting the idea into the mouth of
Belial, the fallen spirit, when addressing his peers.
45. Such are a few of the ways in which the statements
of Christ and his Apostles regarding immortality
have been interpreted by those who call themselves
Christians. But amid this great diversity there
is yet one principle common to all. It is imagined
that something peculiar in the history of the world
took place at the coming of Christ, which has not
since been repeated. Communications were then
made to mankind which are regarded as unique, and
the truth of which it is held will only be verified in
the case of each individual when he has passed into
that country from which we receive no travellers’
tales.
Notwithstanding this general belief, not a few
have arisen pretending to have received a new and
supplementary revelation. In most of these cases
the scientific historian may at once come to a conclusion
without any violation of his impartiality,—they
are so manifestly the products of delusion if not
of imposture. There is however one system which
merits fuller treatment, inasmuch as it has led to a
mode of viewing the spiritual world which has many
followers even at the present day.
46. Emanuel Swedenborg, the apostle of this
system, was in many respects a remarkable man.
Living more than a century ago, and during the time
when Science was pausing for the spring she has since
made, he seems to have foreshadowed, if he did not
anticipate, many of the doctrines now current. We
are not however now concerned with his purely
physical speculations.
Swedenborg has written at great length regarding
the nature and destiny of man, and the constitution
of the unseen world into which he asserts he had the
power of entering.
He assumes the existence of a human or semi-human
race before Adam, of which he remarks that
they lived as beasts. ‘Man,’ he tells us, ‘considered
in himself, is nothing but a beast.... Man’s
peculiarity over animals—a peculiarity they neither
have nor can have—consists in the presence of the
Lord in his will and understanding. It is in consequence
of this conjunction with the Lord that man
lives after death; and although he should exist like
a beast, caring for nothing but himself and his relations,
yet the Lord’s mercy is so great, being Divine
and Infinite, that He never leaves him, but continually
breathes into him His own life, whereby he is
enabled to recognise what is good and evil and true
and false.’
Regarding man’s mortal nature we are told by
Swedenborg that ‘man at birth puts on the grosser
substances of nature, his body consisting of such.
These grosser substances by death he puts off, but
retains the purer substances of nature, which are next
to those that are spiritual. These purer substances
serve thereafter as his body, the continent and expression
of his mind.’[26]
‘A man at death,’ he tells us again, ‘escapes from
his material body as from a rent or worn-out vesture,
carrying with him every member, faculty, and function
complete, with not one wanting, yet the corpse
is as heavy as when he dwelt therein.’
Regarding the spiritual world, he tells us ‘that the
whole natural world corresponds to the spiritual
world collectively and in every part; for the natural
world exists and subsists from the spiritual world,
just as an effect does from its cause.’ He also tells
us ‘that if in the spiritual world two desire intensely
to see each other, that desire at once brings about a
meeting. When any angel goes from one place to
another, whether it is in his own city, or in the courts,
or the gardens, or to others out of his own city, he
arrives sooner or later, just as he is ardent or indifferent,
the way itself being shortened or lengthened
in proportion.... Change of place being only
change of state, it is evident that approximations in
the spiritual world arise from similitudes of mind
and removals from dissimilitudes; and thus spaces
are merely signs of inner differences.... From
that cause alone the hells are altogether separated
from the heavens.’
Of God he says: ‘The Divine is incomprehensible
even by the angels, for there is no ratio between the
finite and the infinite.
‘No man or angel can ever approach the Father
and immediately worship Him; for He is invisible,
and being invisible can neither be thought of nor
loved.’
Of God’s Providence he says: ‘As in the Lord we
are and act, His Providence is over us from birth to
death, and even to eternity.... To talk of the
Lord’s Providence as universal, and to separate it
from particulars, is like talking of a whole in which
there are no parts, or of something in which there is
nothing. Consequently it is most false, a mere picture
of the imagination, and downright stupidity, to
say that the Lord’s Providence is universal, and not
at the same time in the minutest particulars; for to
provide and rule in the universal, and not at the same
time in the minutest particulars, is not to rule at all.’
Swedenborg likewise believed in an intermediate
state analogous to purgatory, although he objected
to the name. This was called by him the world of
spirits, after staying in which, for a longer or shorter
time, the souls of the departed were drafted off to
heaven on the one side, and to hell on the other.
47. We have now said enough to give our readers
some idea of Swedenborg’s spiritual system. Unquestionably
it is the system of a profound thinker,
and many great men have not hesitated to express
their admiration of Swedenborg and his works. It is
one thing however to admit the beauty, the philosophical
completeness, and even the possible truth of
many of his statements, and another thing to believe
that he actually conversed with the inhabitants of
another world in the way in which one man converses
with another.
But, after all, suppose that the every-day experience
of men is that only he who lives in the world as not of
the world lives a true life, and this is the Bible teaching,—whose
then is the true doctrine? Swedenborg
errs if he claims this as his exclusive personal experience.
Paul claimed it as belonging to all men.
Surely men of science should of all men claim this
likewise.
Now, when a man unquestionably honest makes an
assertion such as Swedenborg made, there are only
two possible conclusions to which we can come, unless
we choose to remain in a state of mental suspense.
We must either believe that he really saw
what he professes to have seen, or that he was the
victim of some strange hallucination, in virtue of
which his subjective impressions became transferred
into the realms of objective realities. We know very
well that the human mind is extremely prone to such
delusions, and that the nature of the case is frequently
betrayed by some indiscreet admission which we have
external grounds for believing to be incorrect. Had
Swedenborg confined himself to the invisible world it
would have been very difficult to prove him the subject
of a delusion, but when he converses with angels
from the planets, and thus comes to describe their
inhabitants, he enters at once upon dangerous ground.
Concerning his description of the various planets it
has been remarked that his information relates only
to those, the existence of which was known when he
wrote, Uranus and Neptune being passed over. This
of itself is a suspicious circumstance. Again, he
peoples the planets Jupiter and Saturn with inhabitants
as well as our own Moon; now, scientific
analogy is strongly against either of these two planets
being inhabited, while it is next to certain that our
moon is entirely without inhabitants.
In fine, there is no reason to suppose that the
speculations of Swedenborg were anything else than
the product of his own mind, in the same sense as
that in which the speculations of this volume may be
regarded as the product of the minds of its authors.
48. Before concluding this historical sketch let us
say a few words about modern spiritualists in so far
as their pretensions have reference to our subject.
They assert the presence among them of the spirits of
the departed, assuming sometimes a visible shape,
and they compare these appearances to those which
are recorded in the Sacred writings. But there is
this prominent distinction between the two: the
spiritual communications recorded in the Scriptures
are represented as made to those who were unprepared
to receive them, and also for the most part as
taking place in open daylight, or, to speak more properly,
having no sort of reference to light or darkness.
Whatever be their explanation they have an open-air
look about them. On the other hand, the manifestations
recorded by the spiritualists take place as a
rule in insufficient light, if not in total darkness, and
in presence of those who are in a state of mental
excitement.
Now, for our own part, we should not be disposed
to credit any communication from the world of spirits
that was not made openly, and to those unprepared
to receive it, and therefore unprejudiced.
The man of science must be perfectly recipient,
but he must in the interests of truth guard himself
against the possibility of delusion. We know the
almost infinite power of the mind not only to delude
itself, but to propagate its delusions to other minds,
and, as we have already remarked, the conditions
of these manifestations are specially favourable to
the spread of such delusions. We do not therefore
hesitate to choose between the two alternative
explanations, and to regard these pretended manifestations
as having no objective reality.
49. But while we altogether deny the reality of
these appearances, we think it likely that the spiritualists
have enlarged our knowledge of the power
which one mind has of influencing another, and this
is in itself a valuable subject of inquiry. We agree
too in the position assumed by Swedenborg, and by
the spiritualists, according to which they look upon
the invisible world not as something absolutely distinct
from the visible universe, and absolutely unconnected
with it, as is frequently thought to be the case,
but rather as a universe which has some bond of
union with the present.
This line of argument will be developed in the
following chapters of our book.
CHAPTER II. POSITION TAKEN BY THE AUTHORS—PHYSICAL AXIOMS.
‘Through faith we understand that the worlds were framed by the
word of God; so that things which are seen were not made of things
which do appear.’—Hebrews xi. 3.
50. In the preceding chapter we have given a very
brief epitome of the various beliefs regarding immortality
and the invisible world held by the civilised
nations of the earth, from the earliest dawn of history
to the present day. Our object has been not so
much to enter even into general details as to present
boldly those particular features of each system of
belief which are most closely concerned with the
subject of our work. Thus our account of each
separate system is intentionally incomplete, even as
a simple sketch. It is now time to say something
about the object of this book, as well as to define the
position from which we mean to start in pursuance of
that object. We shall therefore commence by dividing
those who at all concern themselves about our
theme into three great classes.
First, we have those who are so absolutely certain of
the truth of their views of religion, and of the immortality
which they believe it teaches, that they are not
qualified to entertain or even to perceive any scientific
objection. They acknowledge that certain deductions
made by men of science appear to contradict
or to be incompatible with certain truths of their
religion. But these they regard as premature conclusions,
averring that when the laws of nature have
been more deeply investigated, there will be found a
perfect concord between science and revelation. Certain
scientific truths they readily assent to, and it
is only the altogether human superstructure of speculation
built upon these that they profess to question.
‘You have built,’ they say, ‘upon the rock of truth a
structure of wood, hay, stubble, and you would
persuade us that it is the very temple of God. We
will not enter it, but will patiently wait in the expectation
of seeing it speedily consumed with fire.’
Now, whatever be the merits or demerits of such
men, it is not for them we write. Their merit may
consist in having made a perfectly true charge against
certain classes of scientific men—their demerit probably
in having themselves treated religion precisely
as they accuse their adversaries of having treated
scientific truth. We must let them alone—they will
not be influenced by anything that we can say. We
may perhaps be praised by them in a certain measure
if it be thought that we have helped to overthrow the
superstructure built by their adversaries; we shall
certainly be condemned by them if it be thought
that we have helped to weaken any portion of the
superstructure which they themselves have reared.
51. In the next place, and occupying a middle
position, we have those who see strong grounds for
believing in a future life for man and in the existence
of an invisible world, but who at the same time are
forced to acknowledge the strength of the objections
urged against these doctrines by certain men of
science. Some of this class attach much weight to
the evidence in favour of these doctrines derived from
the Christian records; others again, unable to believe
in these records, are yet powerfully impressed by the
universal longing for immortality which civilised man
has always shown, while others attach nearly equal
importance to both kinds of evidence. Nevertheless,
all of the class of which we now speak have deeply
studied the scientific objections, and do not well see
how to surmount them. It is to this class that we
shall especially address ourselves in the following
chapters.
52. The third class of men are those of the extreme
materialistic school. All human history, including
the life of Christ and that which took place in connection
with it, all yearnings of man for immortality,
all life, from that of the noblest of human beings to
that of the primordial animated germ, are explained
by this class as the result of the interaction of
material atoms guided by certain measurable physical
forces. They consider that they have no reason to
believe that there is anything beyond or beside the
visible universe, and in consequence they decline
entering into any argument upon the subject. Their
premiss may be wrong, but their conclusion follows
from it as a matter of course. We have examined
(say they) all the evidence in favour of another universe,
and find it utterly worthless, why then should
we discuss the subject?—it is one of those delusions
that are common in man. When a traveller pretends
to have received information about some strange and
distant country, our first step is to inquire whether he
is a trustworthy and sane man, and if we find he is
otherwise, it is quite unnecessary for us to discuss
either the information which he brings, or the objections
to that information. You pretend to show the
scientific possibility that this information may be
correct, but why should we study your argument since
there is no evidence for supposing that there is any
such place?
53. To these men we would reply that, even
assuming their own point of view, our scheme will,
we venture to suggest, be found to give a more complete
and continuous explanation of the visible order
of things than one which proceeds upon the assumption
that there is nothing else. In this respect we
may liken it to the hypothesis of atoms, or that of an
ethereal medium, for neither of which have we the
direct evidence of our senses, both of which have
nevertheless been adopted as affording the best explanations
of the phenomena of the visible universe.
54. Our readers being thus classed will now be
anxious to learn our position. Let us begin by
stating at once that we assume, as absolutely self-evident,
the existence of a Deity who is the Creator
and Upholder of all things. (Romans i. 19-21.)
We further look upon the laws of the universe as
those laws according to which the beings in the
universe are conditioned by the Governor thereof, as
regards time, place, and sensation.
It is for instance on account of these laws that we
cannot be present in different places at the same
time; or move over more than a certain space in a
certain time, or think more than a certain number of
thoughts; or feel more than a certain number of
sensations in a certain given time.
And hence while we can very easily imagine an
intelligence superior to ourselves, but yet finite, to be
very differently conditioned, we cannot imagine any
finite intelligence to be absolutely without conditions.
At any rate, if finite intelligences unconditioned with
respect to time and space be conceivable existences,
they must of necessity be so absolutely unconnected
with the present universe, which has reference to time
and space, that their existence need not be contemplated
so far at least as our argument is concerned.
55. It will thus be seen that we cannot conceive
of finite intelligences existing in the universe without
being in some way conditioned; but we now come
to a point which deserves a somewhat fuller discussion.
We can imagine the materialists saying to us:
‘You are right in asserting the inconceivability of
such intelligence as that of man existing without being
conditioned, which to our mind implies some sort of
association with matter—that is precisely the view we
ourselves take. But, on the other hand, we can very
well conceive of matter existing without intelligence,
as for instance a block of wood, or a bar of iron.[27]
Thus the connection between these two things, matter
and mind, is of such a nature, that mind cannot exist
without matter, while matter can and does exist
without mind. Is there not therefore a reality about
matter which there is not about mind?[28] Can we
conceive a single particle of matter to go out of the
universe for six or eight hours and then to return to it;
but do we not every day see our consciousness disappearing
in the case of deep sleep, or in a swoon,
and then returning to us again? Far be it from us
to deny that we have something which is called consciousness,
and is utterly distinct from matter and
the properties of matter, as these are regarded in
Physics. But may not the connection between the
two be of this nature?—When a certain number of
material particles consisting of phosphorus, carbon,
oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, and perhaps some other
elements, are, in consequence of the operations of
their mutual forces, in certain positions with respect
to each other, and in certain states of motion, consciousness
is the result, but whenever this relative
state is brought to an end, there is also an end of
consciousness and the sense of individual existence,
while however the particles of phosphorus, carbon,
etc., remain as truly as ever.’
56. Now this means that matter must be looked
upon as mistress of the house, and individual consciousness
as an occasional visitor whom she permits
to partake of her hospitality, turning him out of doors
whenever the larder is empty. It is worth while to investigate
the process of thought which gives rise to this
curious conception of the economy of the universe.
In the first place, it is clear that certain arrangements
are made in the universe, in virtue of which
corresponding sensations are produced simultaneously
in different individuals, while in other arrangements
the sensations produced are the peculiar property of
some one individual. The one set have come to be
associated with objective realities, while the other set
are concerned with subjective impressions. I am
affected by a pain in my head, and I am also affected
by the sun, but the one affection is the peculiar product
of my brain, and I carry it about with me, while
experience has shown me that I cannot appropriate
the other; yet it also becomes mine so soon as it has
reached my brain.
It will further be allowed, that there are certain
material particles which may become vehicles for
either or both of these kinds of sensations, while there
are others which have the power of producing one
only. Gold, silver, and platinum are substances
which may become the vehicle of common impressions,
but not of peculiar impressions, since they do
not occur in our brains. Phosphorus, on the other
hand, is a substance which may become the vehicle
of either kind. When we burn a piece of phosphorus
in a lecture-room it is the vehicle of a common impression,
while the phosphorus in our brain is the
vehicle of a peculiar impression. Now there is a very
noteworthy difference between portions of phosphorus
playing these two parts. When phosphorus is in the
common state, we can experiment upon it and investigate
its properties, but this we cannot do when
it exists in the brain in its peculiar state. The assertion,
therefore, that phosphorus and its allied particles,
whose motions and positions are accompanied by
individual consciousness, are nevertheless, when in
this state, essentially the same as they are in the
ordinary state, appears to us to be altogether without
foundation. We have no right thus to argue from the
one state to the other. For that most peculiar and
interesting condition of phosphorus and other matter
in which it is intimately connected with the production
of individual consciousness, and where some
peculiarity of properties or behaviour due to this connection
might most warrantably be expected, is the
very thing which we cannot investigate. To say therefore
that the living brain consists of particles of phosphorus,
carbon, etc., such as we know them in the
common state, and that when the particles of the brain
have, in consequence of the operation of physical
forces, a certain position and motion, then individual
consciousness follows, is to assign a peculiar relation
between the brain-particles and such consciousness
for which we have no scientific warrant.
57. Allied to this assumption there is another in
the materialistic argument as we have stated it. If
in the body there be no other material than the
visible particles, and in the brain no other material
than a certain quantity of phosphorus and other
things, such as we know them in the common state,
and if individual consciousness depends upon the
structural presence of these substances in the body
and brain, then when this structure falls to pieces
there are of course reasonable grounds for supposing
that such consciousness has entirely ceased. But it
is the object of this volume to exhibit various scientific
reasons for believing that there is something beyond
that which we call the visible universe; and that individual
consciousness is in some mysterious manner
related to, or dependent upon, the interaction of the
seen and unseen.
58. There remains yet that part of the argument
which hints that individual consciousness is less permanent
than matter, inasmuch as such consciousness
frequently departs from the universe for six or eight
hours and then returns to it again. In one sense
this is unquestionably true, while, however, there is
a potential or latent consciousness or possibility of
consciousness that remains behind.[29] It will be seen
in the sequel that this fact of latent consciousness
will be used by us to strengthen our argument in
favour of a future state.
59. We may conclude, as the result of this discussion,
that the connection between mind and matter
is a very intimate one, although we are in profound
ignorance as to its exact nature.
The intimacy of this connection is a doctrine almost
universally held by modern physiologists. Just as no
single action of the body takes place without the
waste of some muscular tissue, so, it is believed, no
thought takes place without some waste of the brain.
Nay, physiologists go even further, and assert that
each specific thought denotes some specific waste of
brain matter, so that there is some mysterious and
obscure connection between the nature of the thought
and the nature of the waste which it occasions. In
like manner memory is looked upon as dependent
upon traces, left behind in the brain, of the state in
which it was when the sensation remembered took
place. Thus Professor Huxley in his Belfast address
(1874)
tells us: ‘It is not to be doubted that those
motions which give rise to sensation leave on the
brain changes of its substance which answer to what
Haller called “vestigia rerum,” and to what that great
thinker David Hartley termed “Vibratiuncules.” The
sensation which has passed away leaves behind molecules
of the brain competent to its reproduction—“sensigenous
molecules,” so to speak—which constitute
the physical foundation of memory.’
60. It will be inferred from what we have said that
one of the essential requisites of continued existence
of the individual is the capability of retaining some
sort of hold upon the past: and, inasmuch as we are
unable to contemplate such a thing as a finite disembodied
spirit, or, to speak more precisely, an unconditioned
finite spirit, it is further evident that this hold
implies an organ of some sort. This we conceive to
be a perfectly general proposition. We do not limit
ourselves in making it to any particular arrangement
of bodily form, or to any particular rank of finite organised
intelligence. From the archangel to the brute
we conceive that something analogous to an organ of
memory must be possessed by each. This is, in fact,
merely a corollary to what has been stated in Art. 54
above, and does not require any further discussion.
61. But if one general requisite of independent
and responsible life be a connection with the past,
another is the possibility of action in the present. A
living being must have in his frame the capacity
of varied movement. He must possess an organisation
in which there is the power of calling internal
forces into play at irregular intervals dependent on
his will. We cannot imagine life to be associated
with a motionless mass or with a mass which moves
in an invariable manner.
The living being need not always be in motion,
but he must retain the capacity of moving. He need
not always be thinking, but he must retain the capacity
of thought. He need not always be conscious,
but he must retain the capacity of consciousness.
To sum up—it thus appears that there are two
general conditions of organised life. There must in
the first place be an organ connecting the individual
with the past, and in the next place there must be
such a frame and such a universe that he has the
power of varied action in the present. We particularly
request our readers to keep well in mind these
two propositions, since it is upon them that our argument
will ultimately in great part be built.
62. We come now to a very important part of our
inquiry. It will be necessary to discuss that which
we term the Principle of Continuity, and desirable to
begin by defining exactly what is meant by us when
these words are used.[30] Let us introduce our definition
by one or two illustrative examples.
Take a particular problem of astronomy, for instance,
and, beginning at the very commencement,
let us suppose an early Egyptian or Chaldean astronomer
to be observing the sun in the middle of
summer. Day after day, for perhaps a week, he has
noticed that this luminary rises over a certain place
and sets over a certain other place, and he conceives
that he has now obtained some definite information
regarding the sun. His idea is, that the sun will go
on always doing the same thing, and he therefore
predicts to his fellows, who are less observant than
himself, exactly where it will rise and where it will
set. They join him in observing the luminary for a
week or more, and the sagacity of our primeval astronomer
is triumphantly vindicated: the sun is found
doing as nearly as possible that which had been predicted
of it.
63. These men have now got hold of the idea that
the sun will always rise and set at the same places,
that in fact his daily journey is always the same, and
that he performs it in the same time. But in the
course of six months they suspect they are mistaken.
Discredit is thrown upon the sagacity of our astronomer,
and he broods over his disgrace for six
months longer. At the end of this time, on turning
his eyes towards the sun, what is his surprise and
delight to find that luminary doing the very thing
that he had all along predicted, returning once more
to his old points of rising and setting,—places, we
may presume, which could be easily remembered on
account of some peculiarity of landscape. He is not
yet prepared however for a higher generalisation, but
again calls for his fellows, and while he suspects a
certain amount of irregularity in the sun, yet succeeds
in convincing them that his guess was after all
not far from the truth. Once again he is reinstated
in their good opinion.
64. However, six months after, precisely the same
thing recurs once more; the rising and setting points
are now considerably different from those predicted.
Our astronomer again loses credit, and regains it only
partially six months afterwards, when the points are
once more right. But he has now learned a lesson.
He perceives a method in all this, and ultimately
rises, by means of the difficulty, to a higher generalisation.
He sees that the rising and setting points
of the sun go through the complete series of their
changes of position in about 365 days; and he has
thus learned, in a rude way, that the sun has two
motions, one of which he accomplishes in 24 hours,
or one day, while the other has a period of 365 days,
or one year.
65. While these things are in progress, a portentous
and wholly unexpected event takes place: the
sun for four minutes is totally extinguished. Our
astronomer meditates much on this strange phenomenon,
and is inclined to regard it as a triumph of the
powers of Darkness, in personal conflict with those
of Light. Nevertheless he does not neglect to keep
a record of the precise day on which it took place.
66. Years pass away, and our astronomer has
passed away with them—he and all his generation;
but a regular record is now kept of celestial occurrences,
and especially of eclipses. At length it comes
to be perceived that there is a periodicity even in
such untoward phenomena, and an attempt is ultimately
made, by means of this knowledge, to predict
when the next eclipse will take place. It is perfectly
successful, and the event loses from thenceforth much
of its portentous significance.
67. Centuries roll on, and the apparent motions of
the heavenly bodies have now been gradually reduced
to system. The stars in particular are found to move,
just as if they were attached to the roof of a great
hollow vault which revolves round the earth once in
twenty-four hours. But even amongst them there
are five exceptions—namely, Mercury, Venus, Mars,
Jupiter, and Saturn—which perform a sort of wandering
or zigzag motion in the midst of their stationary
brethren, and have in consequence received the
name of planets. All, however, are supposed to move
round the earth, which forms the centre of the
universe.
68. In process of time, this superiority of the earth
over the heavenly bodies comes to be questioned.
There is a rising tendency to regard our earth as a
somewhat insignificant member of a great system,
rather than as something apart by itself. These
tendencies are, however, strongly opposed by the
authorities of a large section of the Christian Church,
on the ground that the language employed in the
Jewish Scriptures is against such a method of regarding
the universe. Nevertheless the Copernican system
ultimately prevails, and the planets and the earth are
associated together as stars which travel round the
sun; while the diurnal motion of the heavenly bodies
is attributed to a motion of the earth round its axis.
And we cannot help thinking that philosophers of
the present day are too much disposed to undervalue
the absolutely enormous stride that was made when
the Copernican system was fully established.
69. But the planets are still supposed to move in
perfect circles round the sun; for besides the fact
that this hypothesis agrees very well with observation,
there is a simplicity in the circle which leads philosophers
to believe that nature would adopt it in
preference to any more complicated curve. Has it
not been found that all apparent deviation from
simplicity was in reality due to the fact that our
point of view is a movable one, and does not this
lead us to believe that the truth will be found in a
circular orbit?
70. While such speculations are indulged in, Tycho
Brahe is busy with his instruments. He is a thoroughly
accurate man of science, and makes most excellent
observations of the various planets. These are ultimately
discussed by Kepler, who finds that the
planets do not move round the sun in circles, but
in ellipses, having the sun in one focus. He finds too
that any one planet describes areas which are proportional
to the times of description; while the
squares of the periodic times of the various planets
are proportional to the cubes of their mean distances
from the sun. These are Kepler’s laws; they are
yet, however, only empirical. We know them to be
true, but we cannot tell why they should be as they
are and not otherwise.
71. It was reserved for the genius of Newton to
show us why the planets should obey these laws, and
to reduce the planetary system under the domain of
ordinary mechanics. He succeeded in showing that
every mass of matter attracts every other mass with
a force which is directly proportional to the product
of the masses, and inversely proportional to the square
of the distance, and that this universal force accounts,
not only for Kepler’s laws of planetary motion but,
for the orbit of the moon, as well as for that of a
projectile discharged near the surface of the earth.
72. If we now pause for a moment, and review the
progress of this investigation, we shall see that it
began with a disposition to regard simplicity of
motion as the test of truth, and when the Copernican
system showed that our point of view is a movable
one, it was at first thought that this would explain
all departures from absolute simplicity. But Tycho
Brahe and Kepler soon showed that the planets do
not move in circles, and we now know that their
motions, as well as that of the moon, can only be
represented by curves of extreme complexity. Simplicity
of motion has disappeared, but it has been
replaced by simplicity of inter-relation between the
various members of the system which are supposed
to attract each other according to a simple and
definite law. This law may be supposed to contain
in itself implicitly all the various and complicated
motions of the solar system. If applied to the past
it will enable us to ascertain the exact date of the
antient historical eclipses; if applied to the future it
will enable us to foretell all but catastrophic astronomical
occurrences.
73. Let us now turn to another branch of the same
subject. When Galileo first applied his telescope to
the sun, he discovered the existence of sun-spots. Their
solar origin was however for some time disputed, the
schoolmen of that day, holding resolutely to the dicta
of Aristotle, being indisposed to believe that there
could possibly be any imperfection in the sun. The
telescope alone was in fault. There was even a
sermon preached on Galileo, the text of which was
‘Viri Galilæi, quid statis in coelum spectantes?’
However, as time went on, observation showed
that spots were unmistakably solar phenomena, and
these very imperfections are made use of by modern
science to obtain for us information regarding the
chemical and physical structure of our luminary. It
also appears that the position and size of these spots
depend upon the positions of the planets Mercury
and Venus, and this as well as other phenomena
indicate the existence of some mysterious bond between
the sun and the various members of his system,
possibly other than the law of gravitation, as we now
understand it, can express.[31] In fine, simplicity of
relation threatens to disappear, just as simplicity of
motion disappeared before it.
74. Nevertheless in this triumphal march the progress
has always been from the less to the more
perfect, from the glimmering of early dawn to the
clear morning light, if not to the bright beams of the
noon-day sun. Temporary obstacles have appeared
only to be surmounted, and like Augustine’s ladder
to constitute a platform from which a higher and
more comprehensive view might be obtained. Difficulties
too, other than physical,—struggles, weariness,
opposition—have been encountered and overcome,
nor has there been anything like a grave defeat, or
the production of permanent confusion. The concluding
words of the Te Deum have been abundantly
fulfilled in the experience of the astronomer. He has
trusted in God, and he has never been confounded.
75. Here then we have an instance of what is meant
by Continuity. It does not imply an easy progress,
or a smooth level road; it is consistent with a
temporary halt, perhaps not even inconsistent with a
temporary break-down, or with momentary despair.
We are met by difficulties of many kinds—the rock,
the tangled growth, the swamp, the thick darkness,
but never by the abyss. Nothing has occurred to
convince us that our path has been absolutely wrong
from the very commencement, and that we must
altogether retrace our steps; and the same thing
holds in other problems besides those of astronomy.
Once we have accumulated sufficient trustworthy
evidence to show us that we are in the right way, we
are never afterwards irretrievably defeated.
Before proceeding further, let us here notice a
peculiarity which, if it be clearly exhibited in the
progress of astronomy, is yet by no means confined
to that science, but appears to be characteristic of all
physical knowledge.
Things are so arranged and the intellect of man
is so constituted that we are led in the progress of
science to recognise certain laws which appear at first
sight to hold exactly, or which, in other words, have
the appearance of absolute truths. As time passes
on, and our instruments become more delicate, while
our observations with them are multiplied, signs begin
to show themselves of very slight deviations from
exactitude in these laws.
Meanwhile, these approximate expressions of truth
during the long ages (it may be) through which
they have been believed, have taken such a hold
upon the minds of men that all signs of their
imperfect exactitude are at first utterly discredited.
Ultimately, however, it is by means of these slight
discrepancies that we are led forward to higher generalisations.
This was well pointed out by Sir J.
Herschel in his Discourse on the Study of Natural
Philosophy. In fine, does not something analogous to
the principle of continuity prevent us from supposing
that we can ever arrive at the ultimate expression of
truth on any, however limited, subject? Whenever,
therefore, the language in which any scientific truth
is embodied appears to us to savour too much of the
absolute, is it not a proper and hopeful task to
endeavour to break this down? It is on this account
that we welcome all attempts to modify the expression
of the law of gravitation, which, as our knowledge of
it stands at present, seems to present too much of
the appearance of an absolute and final truth.[32]
76. Our readers will now perhaps wish to have an
example of what we should term a breach of Continuity,—this
is easily given. Let us suppose for
instance that the sun, moon, and stars were to move
about in strange and fantastic orbits during one day,
after which they returned to their previous courses.
Here we should have an excellent example of a breach
of Continuity, for even if things were so arranged as
to prevent physical disaster, it is evident that the
whole intelligent universe would be plunged into
irretrievable mental confusion. Never again could it
be said that astronomy is competent to explain the
varied motions of the heavenly bodies. The observers
would lay down their instruments, and the mathematicians
their calculations, and the science would
come to an end.
Other examples of a breach of Continuity may be
as easily imagined. Suppose for instance that the
gold of the world were to disappear for six hours
and then return to it again,—should we not have all
the social relations of men as well as their conceptions
of matter thrown into irretrievable confusion? This
would not, however, be due to the mere fact that
something had disappeared from the visible universe.
Individual consciousness we have seen is seemingly
in the habit of doing so and again reappearing, and
we do not trouble ourselves much about it.
Continuity, in fine, does not preclude the occurrence
of strange, abrupt, unforeseen events in the
history of the universe, but only of such events as
must finally and for ever put to confusion the intelligent
beings who regard them.
77. It thus appears that, assuming the existence of
a Supreme Governor of the universe, the principle of
Continuity may be said to be the definite expression
in words of our trust that He will not put us to permanent
intellectual confusion, and we can easily conceive
similar expressions of trust with reference to
the other faculties of man. Our subject may therefore
be approached from other points of view, and
other arguments may be used founded on the
principle that of two or more alternatives that one is
to be selected which puts our faculties to the least
confusion. But it is dangerous to speculate much
further upon such subjects; the path is so easy, like
the ‘pleasant, green lane’ spoken of by Ignorance in
the Pilgrim’s Progress, that it cannot but soon lead
us into certain hopeless realms.[33]
78. Let us now endeavour to apply this principle
to a preliminary discussion of the miraculous events
which are alleged to have taken place in connection
with the life of Christ. We may certainly begin by
assuming that had these events been ordinary ones
no doubt would have been entertained regarding
their actual occurrence; it is not, however, our province
to discuss the historical evidence in favour of
Christianity.
Now, until of late years, the divines who have
asserted the actual occurrence of these events have
for the most part attached to this assertion a hypothesis
of their own, representing the events in question
as due to absolute interferences of the Divine Governor
with his usual physical procedure. Each was thus
supposed to represent in its physical aspect something
which could not possibly be deduced from that which
went before or that which followed after.
It was not exactly asserted that they were arbitrary
events, or that they were not the results of purpose,
but only that the purpose of which they were the
accomplishment could not be carried out without
some physical break. In fine, with the view of
removing spiritual confusion, intellectual confusion
was introduced, as being the lesser evil of the two.
Thus, if he submits to be guided by such interpreters,
each intelligent being will for ever continue to be
baffled in any attempt to explain these phenomena,
because they are said to have no physical relation
to anything that went before or that followed after.
In fine, they are made to form a universe within a
universe, a portion cut off by an insurmountable
barrier from the domain of scientific inquiry.
79. It is not enough to say that we cannot see any
foundation for this hypothesis introduced by certain
theologians regarding these events. It is certainly
necessary to add, as we have already done (Art. 36),
that such a method of regarding them is essentially
opposed to the genius of Christianity. Whatever may
be thought of the person of Christ, it cannot for a
moment be said that He was above law. He speaks
of himself, and is spoken of by the apostles, as bound
in all respects by the laws of the universe. Nor
will it suffice to say that He obeyed the moral and
spiritual, but broke occasionally the physical, laws of
the universe, or had them broken for Him. In fine,
we conceive that the New Testament plainly asserts
that what Christ accomplished was not in defiance
of law, but in fulfilment of it; and that His ability
to do so much was simply due to the fact that His
position with reference to the universe was different
from that of any other man.
80. Of late years, however, a vastly better method of
explanation has been introduced. Charles Babbage,
the designer of the well-known calculating engine,
showed (in a very remarkable book which he called a
ninth Bridgewater treatise) that it would be possible
to design and construct a machine which, after having
worked for a long time according to a particular
method of procedure, should suddenly manifest a
single breach in its method, and then resume and for
ever afterwards keep to its original law. He argued
from this that an apparent breach in the physical
procedure of the universe is quite consistent with the
fundamental idea of law. Jevons also, commenting
upon these speculations of Babbage, remarks thus in
his Principles of Science (vol. ii. p. 438), ‘If such
occurrences can be designed and foreseen by a human
artist, it is surely within the capacity of the Divine
artist to provide for similar changes of law in the
mechanism of the atom, or the construction of the
heavens.’
81. While we think that this is a very distinct and
important advance upon the old idea, we venture to
pronounce it altogether incomplete without some
further explanation and modification.
The power of the Divine Being is surely unlimited,
but, nevertheless, we have perfect trust that God,
whom we believe to have given us intelligence, will
work in such a way as not to put us to permanent
intellectual confusion. Yet even on this hypothesis,
and with this trust, a single apparent exception to
the usual procedure may be supposed to occur, if
it be allowed that this may be made use of in order
to deduce from it the great general law of working
which includes both the usual course and the apparent
exception. But it appears obvious to us that if the
exception be of such a nature that it must for ever
confound all the intelligences of the universe who
regard it, then we gain nothing by the supposition
that it was allowed for in the secret counsels of God.
82. Undoubtedly we cannot permit certain events
to be set aside by merely human authority as questions
into which it is deemed irreligious, unprofitable,
or useless for our reason to pry; nay, we are tempted
to advance even further than this, and to assert that
it constitutes our duty as well as our privilege to do
our best to grasp the meaning of all events which
come before us. Does not the material upon which
the intellect of man is intended to work include all
occurrences, of whatever nature, upon earth—that
earth which man is commanded to subdue—a command
equivalent to victory?
83. We have now indicated with sufficient clearness
the fault we have to find with the theological
position as it stood until recently,—let us next briefly
allude to the position of the extreme school of science.
Ignoring all but the visible universe, and applying
the principle of Continuity to its phenomena, the
members of this school were indubitably led to most
important generalisations regarding the method of
working of that great system. They even drove back
with much success, and very properly, certain detachments
of theologians who had occupied portions of
the field in an unwarrantable manner. So far the
Genius whom they had summoned up appeared to
be the very principle of order. But things wore
a different complexion as time went on. It was
fancied that historical Christianity must disappear,
and that the belief in the reality of a future state
must follow after it. They were surrendered. But
it was extremely startling when the Genius invoked,
not content with what he had already devoured,
broadly hinted that the whole visible universe would
furnish an acceptable sacrifice,—then even the most
extreme partisans of the school began at length to be
alarmed. It was too much to be borne, that a
Genius summoned up in the very name of order
should turn out to be a demon so insatiate as this!
Must the whole visible universe, indeed, arrive at such
a state as to be totally unfit for the habitation of
living beings? The individual they were content to
sacrifice, perhaps even the race, but they would spare
the universe. Undoubtedly, if it be possible to pity
men who could so easily dispense with Christianity
and immortality, they had at length got themselves
into a deplorable dilemma. For the principle they
had invoked was absolutely without pity, and in the
most heartless manner continued to point towards the
sacrifice of the visible universe. This, they were told,
was only a huge fire, and must ultimately burn itself
out. Nothing would be left but the ashes,—the dead
and worthless body of the present system.
84. No wonder, then, that these men should be
startled at their conclusion, and try somehow to evade
it. Such an attempt was actually made, and a gleam
of lurid light seemed for a moment to illuminate the
thick darkness conjured up by the hypothesis. It
was conjectured that the visible universe might in
reality be infinite, even if the number of stars be not
so, and that such a universe might last from eternity
to eternity, and if it might not be supposed that such
a system could continuously and without interruption
afford a habitation for animated beings, yet it might
do so discontinuously and by fits and starts, its available
energy being recruited by repeated collisions,
extending in a series from eternity to eternity. The
life of whole systems, perhaps even of whole galaxies,
would thus disappear, to be replaced after myriads of
ages by the feeble beginnings of an entirely new order
of things.
Such a hypothesis no doubt contemplates a ceaseless
change, and satisfies so far the requirements of
energy. But while the structures built are perishable,
the stones out of which they are built—the atoms—are
supposed to be eternal. It is this eternity of the
atom which vitiates the hypothesis, for we shall show
in the sequel that this is a doctrine which can only
be held by ignoring the fundamental principles of
scientific inquiry. Indeed we can hardly escape from
the conclusion that the visible universe must in
matter, as well as in transformable energy, come to
an end. But the principle of Continuity upon which
all such arguments are based still demanding a continuance
of the universe, we are forced to believe that
there is something beyond that which is visible, or
that, to use the words of an old writer (which we have
inscribed on our title-page),—‘the things which are
seen are temporal, but the things which are not seen
are eternal.’
85. Looking back instead of forward—to the origin
of this visible universe, rather than to its end, we are
brought even more definitely to a similar conclusion.
It is perfectly certain, as we shall afterwards see, that
the visible universe must have had a beginning in
time; but if it be all that exists, then the first abrupt
manifestation of it is as truly a break of continuity
as its final overthrow.
It may sound strange to some of our readers to be
told that it is the duty of the man of science to push
back the Great First Cause in time as far as possible;
nevertheless, this accurately represents the part in the
universe which he is called upon to play.
We dig into the crust of the earth and find therein
stratified deposits containing fossil forms, and we
may either suppose that God created these as they
are, or that they came into their place through the
operation of natural forces, and represent the relics
of an antient world of life; the latter of these is undoubtedly
the scientific hypothesis. The only other
hypothesis is that of certain writers belonging to the
Church of Rome, who asserted that the devil put the
fossils there.
Or, again, we may suppose that God created the
sun, placed the earth and the other planets in their
present orbits, and gave them the requisite velocities,
all at once, or that the solar system gradually condensed
into its present state from a chaotic mass of
nebulous material; certainly, again, the latter is the
scientific hypothesis.
In like manner, if we can suppose any phenomenon,
any conditioned order of things, antecedent to the
appearance of the visible universe, we have gained
a step. In fact, we conceive it to be the duty of
the man of science to treat the original production
of the visible universe just in the same way as he
would any other phenomenon. It is no doubt a
very large thing, but we must not be terrified at
mere bigness,—we must mete out the same scientific
measure to all events, whether they be great or small.
We therefore welcome a hypothesis like that of Sir
W. Thomson,[34] which regards the primordial atoms of
the visible universe as vortices somehow produced in
a pre-existing perfect fluid, provided that such a
hypothesis is otherwise tenable.
86. Let not any of our readers regard this process
as an attempt to drive the Creator out of the field
altogether, for this is most assuredly not the case. Is
it less reverent to regard the universe as an illimitable
avenue which leads up to God, than to look
upon it as a limited area bounded by an impenetrable
wall, which, if we could only pierce it, would
admit us at once into the presence of the Eternal?
In fine, we do not hesitate to assert that the visible
universe cannot comprehend the whole works of God,
because it had its beginning in time, and will also
come to an end. Perhaps, indeed, it forms only an
infinitesimal portion of that stupendous whole which
is alone entitled to be called The Universe.
87. We thus see that the extreme scientific school,
as well as the old theological school, have erred in
their conclusions, because they have neither of them
loyally followed the principle of Continuity. The
theologians, regarding (like the antient philosopher)
matter and its laws with contempt, have without
scruple assumed that frequent invasions of these laws
could be consistent with a tenable hypothesis. On
the other hand, the extreme scientific school, when
they were brought by the principle of Continuity
into such a position that their next logical step should
have been the realisation of the unseen, failed to take
it, and have suffered grievously in consequence.
88. It remains now, before concluding this chapter,
to sketch briefly the application of the principle of
Continuity to the problem we have in hand.
There are three conceivable suppositions with reference
to individual existence after death. It may be
regarded as the result of a transference from one
grade of being to another in the present visible universe;
or secondly, of a transference from the visible
universe to some other order of things intimately
connected with it; or lastly, we may conceive it to
represent the result of a transference from the present
visible universe to an order of things entirely unconnected
with it.
89. This last hypothesis may however be very
speedily disposed of if we are to maintain the principle
of Continuity. We have seen that one of the
requisites for conscious individual existence is an
organ connecting the individual with the past. Now,
were we to suppose a transference of living beings
from the present visible universe to an order of things
otherwise entirely unconnected with it, this would be
a manifest breach of the law of Continuity. Imagine
the utter confusion into which this present universe
would be plunged, if a set of inhabitants were transferred
into it having organs connecting them with a
past existence in an entirely different universe. A
confusion precisely similar would be occasioned by
carrying out a transfer according to the hypothesis in
question; so that we are able at once to reduce our
suppositions to two: the first involving a transference
from one grade to another of the visible universe,
and the second a transference from the visible universe
to some other order of things intimately connected
with it.
90. In what precedes, we have argued by anticipation
that the present visible universe will become
effete; but in the following chapters it will be necessary
to maintain this assertion by a minute examination
of those laws which represent the course of things
observed in the present universe. In other words,
we must settle the fitness or unfitness of the present
visible universe before we proceed to discuss our
second hypothesis.
91. But whether the transfer be supposed to take
place in the visible universe, or from it to another intimately
connected with it, the subject in either case
is certainly one on which we may legitimately employ
our reasoning faculties. So far indeed is the subject
from being one which it will be utterly and for ever
useless to discuss, that it has become our duty as well
as our privilege to make the attempt, in the perfect
trust that time will inevitably bring truth with it.
We think that this fact has been too much overlooked
by those whom we may term the moderate
school of scientific thinkers. Not denying the possibility
of a future state, they have yet shrunk from all
attempts to investigate its conditions. We are in
hopes that a perusal of this volume will lead these
writers to see that the subject is one which may be
profitably discussed.
92. Having in the last chapter briefly indicated
the nature of the proposition which we intend to
bring forward, we must next study, as a preliminary
to further discussion, what science tells us about the
present physical universe: what are the general laws
to which it is now subject; when and what must
have been its beginning; when and what will be its
inevitable end.
We have been driven into becoming accustomed
to the phrase, ‘the material universe,’ which is generally
used in a sense absolutely identical with that
which we have chosen as the title of this chapter.
We shall soon see that the term is a very inapt one,
inasmuch as matter is (though it may sound paradoxical
to say so) the less important half of the
material of the physical universe.
In the present chapter we shall still further restrict
ourselves by omitting, as far as possible, any reference
to life (even in its lowest aspect), and we likewise
defer to a future chapter our account of the more
reasonable speculations which have been advanced
with regard to the intimate structure of matter and
ether.
93. It is only within the last thirty or forty years
that there has gradually dawned upon the minds of
scientific men the conviction that there is something
besides matter or stuff in the physical universe, something
which has at least as much claim as matter to
recognition as an objective reality, though, of course,
far less directly obvious to our senses as such, and
therefore much later in being detected. So long as
men spoke of light, heat, electricity, etc., as imponderables,
they merely avoided or put aside the difficulty.
When they attempted to rank them as matter,—heat,
for instance, as caloric,—they at once fell into
errors, from which a closer scrutiny of experimental
results would assuredly have saved them. The idea
of substance or stuff as necessary to objective existence
very naturally arises from ordinary observations
on matter; and as there could be little doubt of the
physical reality of heat, light, etc., these were in
early times at once set down as matter. Fire, in
fact (including, it is to be presumed, everything which
involved either heat or flame, real or apparent), was
in early times one of the four so-called elements.
In those days the sun was supposed to be only a
great fire; a lightning-flash, an aurora, or a comet,
was merely a flame; in other words, the essence of
all these was the element fire, or, as it was later
called, caloric. The sun, except when he appeared as
the spreader of pestilence, was the beneficent fire, as
were also some of the planets; the lightning, the
comet, even the moon and Saturn, were baleful fires.
This endeavour to assign a substantive existence to
every phenomenon is, of course, perfectly natural; but
on that very account excessively likely to be wrong.
Humanum est errare comes with quite as much
heart-felt conviction of its truth from the lips of the
honest Pagan as from those of the Christian believer;
though perhaps its meaning may be considerably less
extended in the former than in the latter case.
94. But, before discussing what is that something
else besides stuff which has an objective though not a
substantive[35] existence, let us in the first place inquire
into the grounds of our belief, that matter itself has a
real existence external to us; that, in fact, the so-called
evidence of our senses is not a mere delusion.
There is a strong temptation to be metaphysical
here, but we will endeavour to resist it.
Now physical science furnishes us with the following
among many other arguments in proof of the
reality of the external universe:—
Experience of the most varied kind consistently shows
us that we cannot produce or destroy even the smallest
quantity of matter.
Exercise our greatest powers of imagination, do
with it what we please, we cannot make our senses
indicate to us an increase or diminution in a given
quantity of what we call matter. We find it so far
amenable to our control that we can alter its arrangement,
form, density, state of aggregation, temperature,
etc.; nay, by so approximating it to other matter
as to produce a chemical combination, we may entirely
transform its appearance and properties,—all but one:
its mass or quantity is completely beyond our control.
Measure it by what process we please, by the ‘muscular
sense,’ by weight, anyhow, there it is, altogether
independent of us, laughing our efforts to scorn!
Can this be a mere mental idea which the mind that
conceived it (or, at all events, in some way received
the conception of it) is unable to destroy?
But there is one other argument on this point which
must be mentioned. Not only do our own senses
invariably indicate to us the impossibility of altering
the quantity of matter, but the senses of all men alike
point to the same quantity, quality, and collocation
of matter in the earth and external to the earth.
Whence this extraordinary agreement between the
evidences of the senses in different men, when the
minds are so different?
Our conviction then of the objective reality of
matter (at least from the point of view of the Natural
Philosopher) is based upon the experimental truth
that we can neither increase nor diminish its quantity,
in fact on what we may conveniently for our present
purpose call the Conservation of Matter.
95. Here let us pause for a moment to compare
together this view of matter and the definition of the
laws of the universe, which we have already given.
The laws of the universe we defined (Art. 54) to be
the laws according to which the beings in the universe
are trammelled by the Governor thereof as regards
time, space, and sensation. Now, it may be asked, is
this definition consistent with a belief in the objective
reality of matter? Our reply is, that to our minds
the two are in perfect accordance.
We do not here intend to enter into any metaphysical
discussion. It is enough for us to say that our
practical working certainty of the reality of matter
depends upon the facts, firstly, that it offers resistance
to our imagination and our will, and, secondly,
that in particular it offers absolute resistance to all
attempts to change its quantity. We shall soon see
that experiment teaches us that both properties
belong to something else.
96. Returning from this digression let us therefore
assume that the objective reality of the external universe
has been proved, and that this reality is strongly
impressed upon us in virtue of that principle which
we have called the conservation of matter.
But as soon as we grant this, we are obliged by
our reason, however little our senses may incline us
to it, or rather however much they may dispose us
against it, to allow objective reality to whatever else
may be found to be in the same sense conserved. (We
have here italicised these four words for a reason
which will afterwards appear.) This is a question
which deserves and must secure careful consideration.
97. In abstract dynamics several things are said
and mathematically proved by deductions from experiment
to be conserved, but one only of these in
the strict sense in which we have spoken of the conservation
of matter. We will examine them briefly,
and our non-mathematical readers must pardon us if
we make use of certain technical expressions belonging
to the domain of mathematical physics.
[It is absolutely essential that the reader should
have clear notions on these points, for there is widespread
confusion and error as to the meaning even
of so simple and elementary a term as ‘force.’ He
will often find it used indifferently in either of two
senses which have no connection whatever with one
another; and unless he completely gets over this
abuse of language he need not hope to be able to
follow the present portion of our preliminary argument.
Force proper is a pull, push, weight, pressure,
etc., and can be measured, in the vernacular of
engineers, as equivalent to so many pounds weight;
but the unjustifiable use of the word applies it to work
done by a force, so many pounds raised so many feet,
i.e. force overcome through a space. Two such things
are of different kinds, and cannot possibly be compared
together. They differ in fact in precisely the same
way as length or breadth differs from superficial area,
i.e. as a linear foot differs from a square foot! And
the modern abuse of the word is more outrageous,
alike to science and to common sense, than would be the
attempt to assign the height of a mountain in acres!
For the absurdity does not end even here. We have,
as yet, absolutely no proof whatever that force proper
has objective existence. In all probability there is
no such thing as force (which is suggested to us by
the impressions of our muscular sense), any more
than there is such a thing as Sound, or Light, which
are mere names for physical impressions produced
upon special nerves by the energy of undulatory
motions of certain media. The term, however, is a
very convenient one for the rate of transference or
transformation of energy per unit of length in a given
direction.]
(1.) Conservation of Momentum.—What is understood
by this is a mere direct consequence of Newton’s
first interpretation of his Third Law of Motion,
viz., that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite.
In this first interpretation Newton tells us to consider
actions and reactions as forces proper, or (their
equivalents) quantities of motion. This is the term
employed by Newton; but we now designate it momentum,
and measure it by the product of the mass and
the velocity of a body. Stated in its simplest form, this
law asserts that the momentum of a system of bodies,
measured in any direction whatever, is not altered by
their mutual action, whether that action be of the
nature of traction, attraction, repulsion, or impact.
And we see at once from this third law of motion
that it must be so, because the change of momentum,
in any direction, of any one part of the system, per
unit of time, is the measure of the force acting on
that part in that direction. Whatever momentum in
this particular direction is gained by one member of
the system must have been lost by other members,
but not from their whole momentum, merely from
the part of it in this direction. It thus appears that
the (algebraic) sum of the momenta generated by the
mutual actions of the system is zero.
These momenta are in fact directed magnitudes
(like the forces of which they are the measure), and
are therefore capable of cancelling one another when
their numerical amounts are equal and their directions
are opposite. In this sense the conservation is
of the same nature as that of the imagined electric or
magnetic fluids, where no portion whatever of one
kind can be produced without the simultaneous appearance
of an equal quantity of the other, a quantity
just capable of neutralising it. This is obviously not
in any sense analogous to the Conservation of Matter
of which we have just spoken.
As an illustration take a loaded cannon. Before
firing, neither cannon nor ball had momentum. After
firing, the ball has a certain momentum, the cannon
(in virtue of its recoil) an equal and opposite momentum.
If we could exactly reverse the motions of
the cannon and ball just as they separate, the impact
between them would just reduce each to rest, and no
momentum would be left. Considered separately
after the discharge, each has momentum, but in the
complete system of cannon and ball there is no
momentum—there being equal quantities of positive
and negative, in the same line. In fact momentum cannot
be produced or destroyed in any system as a whole.
This is the Conservation referred to. It is as if a
man always when he received a sum of money fell to
the same amount in debt—the state of his affairs, as
shown by his books, would of course not be altered.
(2.) Conservation of Moment of Momentum.—Here
we deal with quantities of the order of the moments
of forces about an axis, i.e. couples in Poinsot’s sense.
These also are directed magnitudes depending for
their conservation upon the first interpretation of
Newton’s third law, and therefore the same remarks
apply to them as to the preceding.
(3.) Conservation of Vis Viva.—Vis viva is the old
name for energy of motion or the consequent power
of doing work. We now deal with quantities which
cannot possess direction, because they are essentially
products of pairs of quantities similarly directed, and
are therefore all to be treated as of the same algebraic
sign, or rather (to adopt the language of Sir W.
R. Hamilton) as signless quantities. With such there
can of course be no cancelling.
To make our meaning clear, let us consider upon
what vis viva depends. It depends upon and is proportional
to the product of the mass into the square
of the velocity. Compare, or rather contrast, this
with the definition of momentum given above, and
it will be seen that vis viva is the product of the
momentum and the velocity. Now mass is of course
a signless quantity; evidently we cannot have negative
mass. Then with regard to the square of the velocity,
this will be positive whether the velocity be
positive or negative, whether it be in one direction or
the opposite. Vis viva, therefore, or energy of motion,
is something which is not affected with the sign of
direction, or, as we have already said, it is a signless
quantity. It is found to be convenient to measure
it as half the product of the moving mass into the
square of its velocity. So measured, it is now called
(see § 99) kinetic energy.
Now to our cannon again. Before firing there is
no vis viva of either cannon or ball. After firing each
has vis viva, but that of the ball is greater than that
of the cannon in the proportion in which the cannon’s
mass exceeds that of the ball. And the system as a
whole has vis viva though it has no momentum. If,
as before, we could reverse the motions of cannon
and ball, then, even when they impinged, the vis viva
would not be lost. As will presently be seen, it would
be employed in heating both the impinging bodies.
98. We have said that the energy which a body
contains—its vis viva—its power of doing work, is
independent of the direction in which it is moving;
and, further, that while the mass is the same, it is
proportional to the square of the velocity. For instance,
we may measure the energy of a cannon-ball
or of an arrow by the distance it will carry itself up
against the force of gravity, represented by its own
weight, when shot vertically upwards, and we find
that with a double velocity it will go four times as
high. Or we may point the cannon horizontally, and
measure the energy of the same ball by the number
of planks of oak wood which it can penetrate, and we
shall find that a ball with double the velocity will
penetrate nearly four times as many as one with the
single velocity. All such experiments concur together
in convincing us that the energy of the ball is independent
of the direction in which the cannon is pointed,
and is proportional to the square of the velocity, so
that a double velocity will give a fourfold energy.
99. We have just now spoken about a cannon-ball
fired into the air against the force of gravity. Such
a ball, as it mounts, will each moment lose part of its
velocity, until it finally comes to a standstill, after
which it will begin to descend. When it is just turning
it is perfectly harmless, and if we were standing
on the top of a cliff to which it had just reached, we
might without danger catch it in our arms and lodge
it on the cliff. Its energy has apparently disappeared.
Let us, however, see whether this is really true or not.
It was fired up at us, let us say, by a foe at the bottom
of the cliff, and the thought occurs to us to drop
it down upon him again, which we do with great success,
for he is smashed to pieces by the ball.
In truth, dynamics informs us that such a ball will
again strike the ground with a velocity, and therefore
with an energy precisely equal to that with which it
was originally projected upwards. Now, when at the
top of the cliff, if it had not the energy due to actual
motion, it had nevertheless some sort of energy due
to its elevated position, for it had obviously the power
of doing work. A pond of still water, unless it can
fall, i.e. unless it has what is technically called a
‘head,’ is of no use in driving a water-wheel. The
head, or the power of descending, gives it a store of
dormant energy, which becomes active as the water
gradually descends. And the same amount of work
may be obtained (by means of a turbine for instance)
from a small quantity of water, provided it has a great
‘head,’ as can be obtained (by means of an ordinary
overshot or breast wheel) from water with far less
head, provided it be supplied in proportionally greater
quantity. We thus recognise two forms of energy which
change into one another, the one due to actual motion
and the other to position; the former of these is generally
called kinetic, and the latter potential energy.
All this appears to have been clearly perceived by
Newton, who gave it as a second interpretation of his
Third Law of Motion. His statement is equivalent,
in modern language, to the following:[36]—Work done
on any system of bodies has its equivalent in the form
of work done against friction, molecular forces, or
gravity, if there be no acceleration; but if there be
acceleration, part of the work is expended in overcoming
resistance to acceleration, and the additional kinetic
energy developed is equivalent to the work so spent.
100. Thus Newton expressly tells us (though not
in these words) that we are to include in the same
category work done by or against a force—whether
that force be due to gravity, friction, or molecular
action (such as elasticity, for instance), or even to
acceleration.
(a.) When work is done against gravity, as in lifting
a mass from the ground, we have just seen that it
is (as it were) stored up in the raised mass; we can
recover it at any time by letting the mass descend.
Thus it is that we furnish a clock with motive power
sufficient to keep it going for a week in spite of friction
and other resistance, by simply winding up its
weights.
(b.) When work is done against molecular forces,
we have a similar storing up, as, for instance, in drawing
a bow or in winding up a watch.
(c.) When work is done against the inertia of a
body, i.e. to accelerate its velocity, Newton’s definitions
show that the additional kinetic energy so produced
is equal to the work so spent.
(d.) In abstract dynamics we simply consider as
lost the work spent against friction. In Newton’s
time it was not known what became of it.
101. Leaving out, then, for the present, the fourth
alternative, we see that whatever work is spent, we
must, according to Newton, even in abstract dynamics
recognise that it is not lost, but only transformed
into an equivalent quantity stored up for future use,
either in a quiescent form (as, for instance, the potential
energy of a raised weight or bent spring), or in an
active form (as the kinetic energy of a moving mass).
Here, then, at last, we recognise the same sort of conservation
as that which we found in matter. But the
statement so far is defective, as we have seen, in one
particular. What becomes of work spent in overcoming
friction? or what becomes of the energy of
the blacksmith’s hammer after it has struck the anvil?
To this experiment alone can give the answer. Let
us see what it has told us.
Man has been called a reasoning animal, a laughing
animal, etc., according to the momentary whim or
humour of the classifier; but he is perhaps still more
definitely separated from all other animals when
specified as the ‘cooking animal.’ Now, it has always
appeared to us as something little short of marvellous
that, even for the high purpose of cooking his food,
or of inflicting exquisite torture on a vanquished foe,
savage man should ever have hit upon the process of
procuring fire by friction. Considering his condition,
and comparing his opportunities and his success with
those of even our greatest modern physicists, we cannot
but look upon this as one of the very greatest and
most notable discoveries ever made in physics. All
the more notable, too, from the fact that a man like
Newton, though of course aware of it, absolutely
missed its significance even at the very moment
when it alone was wanted to fill a serious lacuna in
one of his grandest and most important practical
generalisations.
The missing link was all but supplied by Rumford
and Davy at the very end of last century. Rumford’s
boiling of water by the heat generated in the boring
of a cannon, and Davy’s melting of ice by friction in
vacuo, were each conclusively demonstrative alike of
the non-materiality of heat and of the ultimate fate
of work spent in friction, which is thus seen to be
converted into heat; or at least these experiments
could easily have been made demonstrative by very
slight additions to, or modifications of, their author’s
methods or reasoning. But the exact and formal
enuntiation of the equivalence of heat and work required
to fill the lacuna in Newton’s statement was
first given by Davy in 1812.
102. Let us here pause for a moment and contemplate
the position to which the solution of our problem
had even then attained. Visible kinetic energy, such
as that of a cannon-ball shot upwards, is transformed
as it rises into visible potential energy. As the ball
descends its energy is retransformed from the potential
into the kinetic variety until, when it is about to
strike the earth, it has, or rather would have if there
were no atmosphere, as much kinetic energy as it
had when it was first shot upwards.
When the ball has once struck the earth its kinetic
energy of visible motion is changed by impact into
that kinetic energy of invisible motion of its particles
which is called heat; and, generally speaking, in all
cases of friction, percussion, and atmospheric resistance
we have a change of visible energy into heat, as
for instance when a railway train is stopped by the
action of the brake, when a blacksmith strikes the
anvil with his hammer, when a cannon-ball moves
through and heats the air, or when a meteorite or
falling-star is rendered incandescent by the resistance
it meets with even in the higher and rarer strata of
the atmosphere.
We had thus come to the stage of regarding heat
as a species of molecular energy into which visible
energy is often transformed, and very soon afterwards
it came to be perceived that there were other forms
of molecular energy besides heat—some of these being
potential and some kinetic. Thus two substances
may possess mutual chemical affinity when separated
from each other, just as a raised stone tends to fall
again to the earth, and we obtain a form of potential
energy in the one case as truly as in the other. When,
for instance, we have carbon or coal in our cellars or
our mines, and oxygen in the air, we are in possession
of a store of chemical potential energy upon which we
can draw at any moment and change it during the
process of combustion from the potential to the kinetic
form. Again, in a current of electricity we have no
doubt a species of kinetic energy, although it still
puzzles men of science to say what form of invisible
motion such a current implies. From all this, without
being further perplexed with scientific details, our
readers will perceive that there are many different
forms, some of them potential, and others of them
kinetic, in which energy may appear.
While we were thus grasping the fact that energy
can appear under various forms, we were also beginning
to perceive that it had great powers of transmutation—going
about from one form to another, and
Sir W. R. Grove did good work at this stage of the
inquiry in bringing together the various cases of such
transmutations in his work on the Correlation of the
Physical Forces.
In spite of this, it was left for Joule and Colding,
who worked almost simultaneously and by well-devised
experimental methods from about the year
1840, independently to discover, and by degrees to
enuntiate, by means of arguments founded on the only
admissible basis—experiment, the grand law of the
Conservation of Energy. In its most general form,
the statement of the conservation of energy is merely
a completed version of the passage we have already
quoted from Newton; and the experimental discoveries
of Rumford and Davy, extended and completed
by Joule and Colding, allow us now to put
Newton’s second or alternative interpretation of his
Third Law of Motion into the modern statement of
the Conservation of Energy.
In any system of bodies whatever, to which no energy
is communicated by external bodies, and which parts
with no energy to external bodies, the sum of the various
potential and kinetic energies remains for ever unaltered.
In other words, while the one form of energy becomes
changed into the other,—potential into kinetic
and kinetic into potential, or one species of either
into another;—yet each change represents at once a
creation of one kind of energy and a simultaneous
and equal annihilation of another, the total energy
present, as we have already said, remaining for ever
unaltered.
103. Taking as our ‘system of bodies’ the whole
physical universe, we now see that, according to the
test we have already laid down, energy has as much
claim to be regarded as an objective reality as matter
itself. But the forms of statement are most markedly
different for the two. We before spoke of the
quantity of matter without qualification, but we now
speak of the sum of the two kinds of energy. Let us
think for a moment of this, and we see that whereas
(to our present knowledge, at least) matter is always
the same, though it may be masked in various combinations,
energy is constantly changing the form in
which it presents itself. The one is like the eternal,
unchangeable Fate or Necessitas of the antients; the
other is Proteus himself in the variety and rapidity
of its transformations.
104. And again, energy is of use to us solely because
it is constantly being transformed. When the sluice
is shut, or the fire put out, the machinery stops;
when a man cannot digest his food, he breaks down
altogether. Coal in itself, except on account of an
occasional fossil it may contain, or its still somewhat
uncertain mode of formation, or (to take a lower
point of view) as a material for ornament, is a very
useless thing indeed: its grand value consists in its
chemical affinity, in virtue of which it possesses great
potential energy as regards the oxygen of the air,
which can very easily be transformed into its equivalent
in heat. ‘Keep your powder dry’ is merely
one way of saying ‘preserve the ready transformability
of your energy.’ In fact, if we think for a
moment over what has just been said, to the effect
that the only real things in the physical universe are
matter and energy, and that of these matter is simply
passive, it is obvious that all the physical changes
which take place, including those which are inseparably
associated with the thoughts as well as the
actions of living beings, are merely transformations
of energy. Thus it is an inquiry of the very utmost
importance as regards the present universe: Are all
forms of energy equally susceptible of transformation?
To see the importance of this question, the reader
has only to reflect that if there be any one form of
energy less readily or less completely transformable
than the others, and if transformations constantly go
on, more and more of the whole energy of the
universe will inevitably sink into this lower grade as
time advances. Hence the whole possibility of transformation
must steadily grow less and less; in
scientific language, though the quantity of energy
remains for ever unchanged, its availability steadily
decreases.
105. Now, every one knows a case in which there
may be an unlimited amount of energy present, no
part of which is available for transformation. It is
the simple one of heat in a number of bodies, when
all are at the same temperature. To obtain work from
heat we must have hotter and colder bodies, to correspond,
as it were, with the boiler and condenser
of a heat-engine; and just as we can get no work
from still water if it be all at the same level, i.e. if no
part of it can fall, so in like manner we can get no
work from heat unless part of it can fall from a
higher to a lower temperature. This is a remark of
the very utmost consequence to our argument, and
must therefore be fully elucidated. Unfortunately it
is not as yet possible to do this without introducing
a good many scientific technicalities which are unsuited
to the great majority of readers. In the next
eight sections we endeavour to explain it as simply
as we can. The reader who cannot easily follow us
may pass, without break of continuity in the argument,
at once to Art. 114.
* 106. The first step in the investigation of the transformation
of heat into work was taken by Sadi
Carnot in 1824: a step which has recently been
found of inestimable value in every branch of modern
physical science. He devised a method of startling
originality for the purpose of attacking this special
question of the production of work from heat. His
inferences from its application were not all correct;
this was due however to no fault of the method, but
to the fact that he unfortunately assumed (though
with caution, and under a protest almost amounting
to an assertion of the opposite) the materiality of
heat. His method embraces two perfectly new
ideas:—
(1.) That, at least with our present knowledge, no
inference is possible as to the relation between heat
and work, until the heated or working substance is
brought back, after a complete Cycle of operations,
to its initial physical state.
Obvious as this statement, once made, is, it was
altogether ignored (twenty years after Carnot) by
Séguin and Mayer, whom some authors still persist
in setting forth as the founders of the dynamical
theory of heat. Their speculations were entirely
vitiated by their violation of this principle.
(2.) That an engine whose cycle of operations is
reversible is a perfect engine, that is to say, gives the
greatest possible amount of work from a given
quantity of heat with any assigned temperatures of
boiler and condenser.
The term reversible is not here used in the popular
sense in which a mere reversal of the direction of
motion of each part is contemplated, i.e. what would
be more properly termed ‘backing,’ it is used in the
higher sense of taking an engine which converts a
certain quantity of the heat spent on it into work,
while it lets the rest down from the boiler to the
condenser, and then spending upon it the same
amount of work with the result of taking back the
heat from the condenser, adding thereto the heat-equivalent
of the work so spent, and thus restoring
the whole of its original loss in heat to the boiler;
simply in fact reversing all the results of the direct
action.[38]
* 107. Sir W. Thomson, in 1848, was the
first to recall attention to the work of Carnot, after Colding
and Joule had published their experimental discoveries;
and he pointed out that the action of the
reversible engine gave what had been up to that time
vainly sought, an absolute definition of temperature—a
definition, that is, altogether independent of the
properties of any particular species of matter. In
fact it is obvious that as reversibility in the sense we
have just explained is the stamp of perfection in a
heat-engine, all reversible engines, whatever be the
working substance, will, under the same circumstances,
that is to say, with the same temperatures of boiler
and condenser, convert the same fraction of the heat
spent on them into work. This, of course, still leaves
wide scope for choice of a definition of temperature:
but that finally determined on by Thomson was
chosen (in consequence of a hint from some experimental
results of Joule) so as to make the absolute
measurement agree nearly with that of the long-familiar
air-thermometer. It therefore stands as
follows:—
The heat taken in by a perfect engine is to the
heat given out by it in the same proportion as the
absolute temperature of the boiler to that of the condenser.
Of course it is hardly necessary to state that it is
only the excess of the heat taken in over that given
out by any engine that can have been converted into
available work. This follows at once from the conservation
of energy.
Experiments carried on by Joule and Thomson[39]
together have shown that the absolute zero of temperature
is nearly 274° below zero of the centigrade
scale; so that on the absolute scale the temperature
of melting ice is 274°, while that of water boiling
under the standard pressure is 374°.
* 108. In 1849 James Thomson made a very remarkable
application of Carnot’s reasoning, the first of a
series of such applications which have since done
immense service in the extension of almost every
branch of physics. He showed in fact that, because
water expands in the act of freezing, the melting point
of ice must be lowered by pressure. Sir W. Thomson
in the same year verified this deduction, to its
numerical details, by direct experiment. Trifling as
the predicted and measured effect appears (one degree
centigrade for each 2000 lbs. additional pressure
per square inch), there can now be no doubt that it
goes at least very far to explain the varied effects of
the extraordinary plasticity of glacier-ice so beautifully
made out by the direct measurements of Forbes.
* 109. We have said that Carnot unfortunately
based his reasoning on the assumed materiality (and
therefore indestructibility) of heat. It therefore became
a question of great importance to find how
properly to adapt his methods to the true theory.
James Thomson’s verified prediction had already
given a correct and absolutely new physical result
from Carnot’s principles. How then must we get
rid of his false assumption?
Clausius attempted this in 1850, but his method is
based solely upon the observed fact that in general
heat tends from hotter to colder bodies. This we
know is not always the case, for a fine wire may be
made red-hot by the current from a thermo-electric
battery (of a sufficient number of pairs) where ice and
boiling water alone are used to cool and heat the alternate
junctions. Here heat certainly passes from colder
bodies to a hotter one. Clausius, no doubt, several
years later, extended his original statement, so as
to make it stand thus:—Heat cannot of itself pass
from a colder to a hotter body. We do not consider
even this sufficiently obvious for an axiom, were it
certainly true, but, as will be seen presently, it is not.
In fact the so-called axiom is constantly being
violated, though on a very small scale, in every mass
of gas.
* 110. It was Sir W. Thomson[40] who (in 1851) first
correctly adapted Carnot’s magnificently original
methods to the true theory of heat; and it is especially
noteworthy to remark how, even at that early
time, he saw the full danger of attempting to lay
down anything too definite on the subject. The
following is the axiom he gives:—
‘It is impossible by means of inanimate material
agency to derive mechanical effect from any portion of
matter by cooling it below the temperature of the coldest
of the surrounding objects.’
But he appends the following guarded note:—
‘If this axiom be denied for all temperatures, it
would have to be admitted that a self-acting machine
might be set to work and produce mechanical effect
by cooling the sea or earth, with no limit but the total
loss of heat from the earth and sea, or, in reality,
from the whole material world.’
The full importance of this will appear presently.
To those who can accept Thomson’s axiom with
the explanation appended to it, Carnot’s proposition
that a reversible engine is perfect (in the sense of
being the best possible) is demonstrated at once, as
follows, ex absurdo.
Suppose there could be an engine, M, more perfect
than a reversible engine, N. Set the two to work
together as a compound engine, M letting down heat
from boiler to condenser, and doing work; N spending
work in pumping back again the heat to the
boiler. If N be made to restore to the boiler at every
stroke exactly what M takes from it, the compound
engine will do external work, for, by hypothesis, M
is more perfect than N. Whence does the work
come? Not from the boiler, for it remains as it was.
Hence N must take more heat from the condenser
than M gives it; i.e. you get work by cooling the
condenser.
Carry the reasoning a little further, and we see that
if the excess of work given by M were spent upon
N, and thus no work on the whole either spent or
given out, the condenser would be still further cooled,
and the boiler heated! This, to most people, would
seem to imply an ample reductio ad absurdum. But
Clerk-Maxwell has shown it to be physically possible,
and has thus thoroughly justified Thomson’s caution
about his axiom. As this is a point of very great
importance, we offer no excuse for treating it pretty
fully.
* 111. Clerk-Maxwell’s reasoning is given as depending
upon the molecular theory of gases, but the
only necessity for so restricting it appears to be that
we thereby connect the reasoning more directly with
Heat, which, on this theory, is supposed to be the
energy of motion of the molecules of the gas. The
illustration, however, is more general, and at the same
time more simple, if we do not at first refer either to
heat or to the molecular hypothesis of the constitution
of gases, but treat the question simply as one
concerning the possible motions of a number of
little material particles.
Assume, then, that a great number of small equal
spherical particles of matter are enclosed in a vessel
of any form, and assume further that (either by collision
or by repulsive force) each of these has the
power of rebounding from another or from the wall
of the vessel, as if it were elastic, and had unit co-efficient
of restitution,[41] as defined in treatises on natural
philosophy. Then it can be shown, as a matter of
direct calculation, that—start these particles as we
please, in all sorts of directions, and with velocities
as varied as we please—after a time, which will be
shorter as the number of particles is greater, a sort
of permanent state will be arrived at in which a certain
law of distribution of velocity prevails among
the particles (the same law as that of the Probability
of Error, as it is technically called), the greater
number of them having nearly the mean square velocity,
and those which have much less or more than
that being fewer and fewer as the defect or excess is
greater. The tendency is to an average distribution
of these varieties of velocity throughout the vessel,
and the impacts on the sides will thus be nearly the
same on every square inch of its surface. After this
there is—always provided the particles be sufficiently
numerous—no perceptible change in the statistics of
the group, except in so far as concerns individual
particles, which may sometimes be moving with great,
sometimes with very small, velocity, but which, in the
long-run, will far more often be moving with the
mean square velocity, or at least some velocity very
near it. Hence, in no part of the vessel will the
average energy be sensibly greater than in another,
and therefore (so far as the contents of the vessel
alone are concerned) there is no possibility of getting
work from them. But by enlisting in our service
conceivable finite beings (imagined by Clerk-Maxwell,
and called demons by Thomson), it would be
possible materially to alter this state of things, even
although these beings should do absolutely no work.
* 112. For suppose a firm partition, full of little
doors (themselves without mass) to be placed so as
to divide the vessel into two, and set a demon at
each door, with instructions to open it for an instant
whenever he sees he can thereby let a quick-moving
particle escape from the first compartment to the
second, or a slow-moving particle from the second
into the first. Then, because the tendency is not to a
uniform distribution of velocity among the particles,
but to a distribution which involves quicker and
slower in certain proportions, we may imagine this
process to be carried on long enough to make a considerable
difference in the average velocities of the
particles in the two compartments, though the numbers
of particles in each compartment may remain
almost unchanged. The consequence will of course
be a greater pressure per square inch on the walls
of the second compartment than of the first; and
thus, if the partition wall were moveable, a certain
amount of work might be obtained by allowing it to
move. Thus a group of particles originally incapable,
without external assistance, of doing work, may be
rendered capable of doing work by mere guidance
applied by finite intelligence.
* 113. Now let us refer for a moment to the molecular
theory of gases, and we see that what the
demons (without any expenditure of work, each
being, so far as he is required, virtually a combination
of two intelligent perfect engines, one working
direct, the other reversed) have guided the gas to do,
is to transfer heat from a colder to a hotter portion of
the gas.
The only reason why this does not occur without
the assistance of demons (at least to an extent, or
for a length of time, sufficient to produce a sensible
effect) lies in the enormous number of particles per
cubic inch in even the most rarefied gas. Hence,
solely because of the excessive numbers and minuteness
of the particles of matter, the one chance of escape
from Carnot’s proposition is denied us, and therefore
we must allow that, so far as the physical universe
is concerned, a reversible heat-engine is the
best possible.
But if a reversible heat-engine be the best possible,
then the principle which we have italicised in Art. 107
must hold good, and from this it follows that only a
portion of the heat passing through a perfect engine
can be transformed into useful work unless the condenser
of the engine be at the absolute zero of temperature—a
condition which can never be attained.
114. It thus appears that at each transformation of
heat-energy into work a large portion is degraded,
while only a small portion is transformed into work.
So that while it is very easy to change all of our
mechanical or useful energy into heat, it is only possible
to transform a portion of this heat-energy back
again into work. After each change too the heat becomes
more and more dissipated or degraded, that is,
less and less available for any future transformation.
In other words, the tendency of heat is towards
equalisation; heat is par excellence the communist of
our universe, and it will no doubt ultimately bring
the present system to an end. The visible universe
may with perfect truth be compared to a vast heat-engine,
and this is the reason why we have brought
such engines so prominently before our readers.
The sun is the furnace or source of high-temperature heat
of our system, just as the stars are for other
systems, and the energy which is essential to our
existence is derived from the heat which the sun
radiates, and represents only an excessively minute
portion of that heat. But while the sun thus supplies
us with energy he is himself getting colder, and must
ultimately, by radiation into space, part with the
life-sustaining power which he at present possesses.
Besides the inevitable cooling of the sun we must
also suppose that owing to something analogous to
ethereal friction[42] the earth and the other planets of
our system will be drawn spirally nearer and nearer
to the sun, and will at length be engulfed in his mass.
In each case there will be, as the result of the collision,
the conversion of visible energy into heat, and a
partial and temporary restoration of the power of the
sun. At length, however, this process will have come
to an end, and he will be extinguished until, after long
but not immeasurable ages, by means of the same
ethereal friction his black mass is brought into contact
with that of one or more of his nearer neighbours.
115. Not much further need we dilate on this. It
is absolutely certain that life, so far as it is physical,
depends essentially upon transformations of energy;
it is also absolutely certain that age after age the
possibility of such transformations is becoming less
and less; and, so far as we yet know, the final state
of the present universe must be an aggregation (into
one mass) of all the matter it contains, i.e. the potential
energy gone, and a practically useless state of
kinetic energy, i.e. uniform temperature throughout
that mass.
But the present potential energy of the solar
system is so enormous, approaching in fact possibly
to what in our helplessness we call infinite, that it
may supply for absolutely incalculable future ages
what is required for the physical existence of life.
Again, the fall together, from the distance of Sirius
let us say, of the sun and an equal star would at
once supply the sun with at least as much energy
for future radiation to possible planets as could
possibly have been acquired by his own materials in
their original falling together from practically infinite
diffusion as a cloud of stones or dust, or a nebula; so
that it is certain that, if the present physical laws
remain long enough in operation, there will be (at
immense intervals of time) mighty catastrophes due
to the crashing together of defunct suns—the smashing
of the greater part of each into nebulous dust
surrounding the remainder, which will form an intensely
heated nucleus—then, possibly, the formation
of a new and larger set of planets with a proportionately
larger and hotter sun, a solar system on a far
grander scale than the present. And so on, growing
in grandeur but diminishing in number till the exhaustion
of energy is complete, and after that eternal
rest, so far at least as visible motion is concerned.[43]
116. The study of the necessary future has prepared
us for an inquiry into the long remote past.
Just as the present discrete stellar systems must
finally come together, so the materials which now
form them must have originally been widely separate.
Our modern knowledge enables us to look back with
almost certitude to the time when there was nothing
but gravitating matter and its potential energy
throughout the expanse of space—ready, as slight
local differences of distribution predisposed it, to
break up into portions, each converging to one or
more nuclei of its own, and thus forming in time
separate solar or stellar systems. We have thus
reached the beginning as well as the end of the
present visible universe, and have come to the conclusion
that it began in time and will in time come to
an end. Immortality is therefore impossible in such
a universe.
CHAPTER IV. MATTER AND ETHER.
‘Felix qui potuit rerum cognoscere causas,
atque metus omnis et inexorabile fatum
subjecit pedibus, strepitumque Acherontis avari.’
Vergil.
‘Who shall tempt with wandering feet
The dark, unbottomed, infinite abyss,
And through the palpable obscure find out
His uncouth way; or spread his airy flight
Over the vast abrupt, ere he arrive
The happy isle?’—Milton, Paradise Lost.
117. The next portion of the preliminary inquiry
necessary to our concluding argument is that which
relates to the intimate nature of matter; and more
especially of that very wonderful form of matter
which is the vehicle of all the energy we receive from
the sun, as it is that of all the information we obtain
about the position, motion, nature, mass, condition,
and properties of the almost infinitely more distant
bodies, which are scattered through cosmical space.
In other words, we have hitherto spoken only of the
laws of working of the machine called the physical
universe; let us now endeavour to study the structure
of the materials of which it is composed.
118. Various hypotheses have been proposed as to
the ultimate nature of matter. To give even a general
account of all the less absurd of these would
require a large volume, so we content ourselves with
a few of the more reasonable or historically more
important.
(1.) The foremost place must of course be taken
by the old Greek notion of the Atom. The outlines
of the atomic theory were laid down very precisely
by Democritus and Leukippus (circa 400 B.C.), who
taught that the whole universe is made up of empty
space and eternal atoms, differing only in form (as
Α and Ν), order (as ΑΝ and ΝΑ), and posture (as
Ζ and Ν). The atoms are endued with a primitive
motion in virtue of their weight, and, clashing together,
produce vortices from which the world is formed.
The gradual progress of this whirl of atoms brings
similar elements together, as in the sifting of grain, and
so the atoms are sorted into homogeneous groups.
The great weakness of this theory lay in the very
false ideas then held as to the nature of motion by
weight, which was supposed to be necessarily in
parallel lines, and with a velocity greater for heavy
than for light bodies. The difficulty which arose
from this notion led Epicurus to give to the atoms a
perfectly arbitrary and capricious side movement, as
well as the rectilineal motion due to their weight, and
thus, in his school, the theory became really a metaphysical
one, reducing the order of the universe to
pure chance.
It is such a medley of physical speculations, with
metaphysical notions, that we find in the greatest
exponent of the system, the ‘poet philosopher’ Lucretius.
With the help of Munro’s splendid edition of
the text of Lucretius, and his very valuable translation
and notes, it is now a comparatively easy matter
to give a concise summary of the principal points of
this most remarkable early physical speculation. In
attempting to do so we will endeavour, so far as we
can, to bear in mind the awful but too often disregarded
warning given by the poet himself:—
119. As the purpose of the poem of Lucretius is
the establishment of the very opposite of our present
theme, we must consider a good deal more of his
work than the mere properties of atoms. Lucretius
tells us that his object is to dispel the fear of the
gods, which he supposes to arise simply from the fact
that there are so many things which men do not yet
understand, and therefore imagine to be effected by
divine power.
Religion, which crushes human life prostrate upon
earth, is, he says, now put under foot; and the great
victory achieved by his Greek instructor over the immeasurable
universe (in finding what can and what
cannot come into being) brings us level with heaven.
His followers are not to fancy that there is any sin
in this; on the contrary, religion has perpetually been
the cause of sinful deeds. There is, however, danger
of their relapse, for the terror-speaking seers may
once more overcome them. But if men could only
be convinced that the soul is born and perishes with
us, then they would be able to take their ease, and
withstand alike religious scruples and threatenings
of the seers. For this purpose we must find out what
mind and soul consist of, and how everything on
earth proceeds; and if we can do this, we may, of
course, dispense with the gods.
120. First, then, nothing comes from nothing, which
seems to be meant in the sense that there is a physical
cause for everything; at least all the examples which
are adduced in proof of the statement are mere instances
of what might be conceived to happen if
there were no fixed determining physical law or
cause. But the author is obscure on this point, for
he sometimes makes us inclined to think that he is
virtually only asserting the eternal, unchangeable,
existence of the atom,—the ‘first beginning of things.’
As a corollary to this, of course, nature does not
annihilate things, but dissolves them back into their
first bodies. The same negative proof is here attempted.
Nothing is lost, but nature can beget
nothing till she is recruited by the death of something
else. Then, to reconcile the reader to the invisibility
of these first bodies, he is shown how
nature works by invisible things, as wind and moisture;
how marriage-rings and paving-stones, ploughshares
and statues, are worn away without the loss of
any visible particles. Nature, therefore, works by
unseen bodies. Smell, heat, cold, etc., must consist
of a bodily nature, because they affect the senses;
for nothing but body can touch and be touched.
121. But, SECONDLY, there is also void in things,
else they would be jammed together, and unable to
move. It is false to say that things may move in a
plenum: as, when a fish presses on, it leaves room
behind it, into which the water may stream; for on
what side can the scaly creature move forwards unless
the waters have first made room; and on what
side can the waters give place so long as the fish
cannot move? (This of course is metaphysics, and
is altogether absurd. It is the old story of the immovable
body receiving the irresistible blow.) Hence
there cannot be motion unless there be void to allow
of a start. Dripping of water in caves, the passage of
food throughout the whole of the body of an animal,
the fact that buds and fruit of trees are nourished
from the root, voices heard through walls, cold penetrating
the very bones, all are proofs that there is
void as well as body. Also when one thing is as
large as another, but yet lighter, there must be more
void in it.
122. Third.There can be no third thing besides body
and void. For if it be to the smallest extent tangible,
it is body; if not, it is void.
123. Fourth.Bodies are either first beginnings of
things (atoms), or a union of such. Any thing which
can be broken or crushed, or which can transmit
heat or electricity, is partly body and partly void.
Hence body cannot be crushed, and ‘therefore first
beginnings are of solid singleness, and in no other
way can they have been preserved through ages
during infinite time past, in order to reproduce things.’
124. Fifth. If there be no limit to breakage,
nothing could be reproduced; for reproduction is
slower than decay, and therefore the breaking of
infinite past ages would have produced a state of
things incompatible with the reproduction of anything
within finite time. Hence there exists a least in
things. This cannot be soft, else it would consist
partly of void, and be therefore breakable.
First beginnings, then, are strong in solid singleness.
Hence the unreason of those who held fire to
be the matter of things, for what surer test can we
have than the senses whereby to note truth and falsehood!
The doctrine called that of Homœomeria by Anaxagoras
is folly,—his notion, to wit, that everything
is made up of little parts the same as itself—bones
of little bones, flesh of little fleshes, etc. For thus
corn and other food, which go to nourish our blood,
must be in part composed of blood, and must therefore
bleed when crushed by the formidable force of
the millstone!
125. Sixth.Are the atoms infinite in number, and
is the void in which they move unlimited? Both
questions are answered in the affirmative, but the
proof given is metaphysical and altogether ridiculous,
though it contains a fragmentary passage of real
merit, hinting at Le Sage’s explanation (presently to
be given) of the cause of gravity. One illustration of
it must suffice:—‘Nature keeps the sum of things
from setting any limit to itself, since she compels
body to be ended by void, and void in turn by body;’
so that either by the alternation of the two, or by the
infinite extension of one if the other do not bound it,
immeasurable space must be filled. If, for instance,
body were finite, and void infinite, matter would in a
very short time be scattered and borne along in the
mighty void; or, rather, could never have been
brought together.
This agrees with an idea which is propounded in
the second book, as to the velocity which the atoms
have given them (he does not say how or whence),
and which enables them to cohere for a time and then
to break up again, as everything wanes. Those whose
close-tangled shapes hold them fast together form
enduring stone and unyielding iron, others spring far
off and rebound, leaving great spaces between; ‘these
furnish us with thin air and bright sunlight.’ Shortly
afterwards, we are told that the velocity of the first
beginnings when passing through empty void must
be greater than that of sunlight!
We need not trouble ourselves here with Lucretius’s
speculations as to the formation of tangible
bodies from a vertical downpour of atoms, which, unlike
drops of rain, now and then swerve from their
courses so as to clash together, save to mention that
he affirms that, even if he did not know what atoms
are, he could be sure, from its defects, that the world
was not made for us by divine power.
126. Seventh. This, one of the most important
points of the whole theory, is entirely ignored by
some good commentators, and by others who have
more or less closely followed them:—The first beginnings
of things have different shapes, but the number of
shapes is finite.
127. Eighth.The first beginnings which have a
like shape, one with another, are infinite in number.
That is, there is a finite number of kinds of atoms,
but an infinite number of each kind.
128. Ninth.Nothing whose nature is apparent to
sense consists of one kind of first beginnings (only).
129. We need not trouble ourselves with his notion
of the smallness, smoothness, and roundness of the
atoms which make up the mind, qualities which he
arrives at from the rapidity with which the mind
originates and works out a suggestion, contrasting
here the mobility of water with the viscosity of honey.
Nor his proof (by the non-diminution of the weight
and dimensions of the body at death), that the whole
mass of the mind must be exceedingly small. But
we may quote, in two of its many forms, his constant
reiteration of the unreasonableness of the fear of
death, and his philosophic mode of overcoming it:—
‘Some wear themselves to death for the sake of
statues and a name. And often to such a degree,
through dread of death, does hate of life and of the
sight of daylight seize upon mortals, that they consider
self-murder with a sorrowing heart, quite forgetting
that this fear is the source of their cares (this
fear which urges men to every sin), prompts this one
to put all shame to rout, another to burst asunder the
bonds of friendship; and, in fine, to overturn duty
from its very base, since often ere now men have betrayed
country and dear parents in seeking to shun
the Acherusian quarters. For, even as children are
flurried and dread all things in the thick darkness,
thus we in the daylight fear at times things not a whit
more to be dreaded than what children shudder at in
the dark, and fancy sure to be. This terror, therefore,
and darkness of mind must be dispelled, not by
the rays of the sun and glittering shafts of day, but
by the aspect and law of nature.’ Book III. 78.
‘Now no more shall thy house admit thee with
glad welcome, nor a most virtuous wife and sweet
children run to be the first to snatch kisses, and touch
thy heart with silent joy. No more mayest thou be
prosperous in thy doings, a safeguard to thine own.
One disastrous day has taken from thee, luckless
man, in luckless wise, all the many prizes of life.
This do men say; but add not thereto: “And now
no longer does any craving for these things beset
thee withal.” For if they could rightly perceive this
in thought, and follow up the thought in words, they
would release themselves from great distress and
apprehension of mind. Thou, even as now thou art,
sunk in the sleep of death, shalt continue so to be in
all time to come, freed from all distressing pains;
but we, with a sorrow that would not be sated, wept
for thee, when close by thou didst turn to an ashen
hue on thy appalling funeral pile, and no length of
days shall pluck from our hearts our ever-enduring
grief. This question, therefore, should be asked of
this speaker, what there is in it so passing bitter, if
it come in the end to sleep and rest, that any one
should pine in never-ending sorrow.’ Book III. 894.
130. To conclude, there is a great deal in Lucretius
(whether his own or derived from others does
not matter to us) which is of considerable value, even
from a modern scientific point of view, though, of
course, of far greater value from the point of view
of the student of development. But his attempted
proofs are for the most part absurd, based, as they
generally are, upon mere metaphysical speculations
and altogether preposterous analogies.
131. (2.) Boscovich and others endeavoured to dispense
with the atom altogether, substituting in its
place the conception (which mathematicians often find
useful) of a mere geometrical point, which is a centre
of force, as it is called. Here we get rid of the idea of
substance entirely, but we preserve (all but inertia) those
external relations by which alone the atom is capable
of making known its presence. Even so great an
experimental philosopher as Faraday may be quoted
as, to some extent at least, agreeing with this notion.
It seems to us, however, that this is the embodiment
of an over-refinement of speculation, surrounded on
almost all sides by the gravest difficulties. It may
suffice merely to mention again the property of mass,
or inertia, which Faraday himself seemed to look
upon as the one essential characteristic of matter,
and which we can hardly bring ourselves to associate
with the absence of what we understand by substance.
132. (3.) Another speculation leads us to imagine
matter as not ultimately atomic—as, in fact, infinitely
divisible. But, if it be so, it must (in order that
various elementary physical facts may be capable of
explanation) be practically continuous but intensely
heterogeneous. That solid or liquid matter has a
grained structure of not infinitely small dimensions
is proved by many simple and generally known facts;
among others by the separation of white light into
its constituent colours when refracted through a
prism, by the phenomena of capillarity, and by those
of contact electricity. If such heterogeneity were
only pronounced enough, it appears that the law of
gravitation would be capable of accounting for at
least the greater number of effects at present attributed
to the so-called molecular forces and the force
of chemical affinity. Here, however, we are met by
the grand difficulty, that of accounting for gravitation.
And the only attempt at explanation of gravitation-attraction,
which can be called even plausible,
can only, with very great straining, be made compatible
with this idea of the nature of matter.
133. (4.) The fourth and most recent speculation
revives the atom (in the literal sense of the word),
but not ‘strong in solid singleness’ like those contemplated
by Lucretius,—much rather yielding to
the least external force, and thus escaping from the
knife or wriggling round it, so that it cannot be cut,—not,
however, on account of its hardness, but on
account of its mobility, which makes it impossible
for the knife to get at it.
This is the vortex-atom theory of Sir W. Thomson,
dimly foreshadowed in the writings of Hobbes, Malebranche,
and others, but only made distinctly conceivable
in very recent times by the hydrokinetic
researches of Helmholtz. Helmholtz, in 1858, first
successfully attacked the equations of motion of an
incompressible frictionless fluid, without introducing
the great simplification which had been adopted by
his predecessors, and which consisted in supposing
the motion to be non-rotational. He proved, among
other valuable results, that those portions of the fluid
which at any time possess rotation preserve it for
ever, and are thus as it were marked off from the
others; also that these portions must be arranged in
filaments whose direction is at each point the axis
of rotation, and that the filaments are either endless,
i.e. form closed curves (whether knotted or not), or
terminate in the free surface of the fluid.
Hence Sir William Thomson’s idea that what we
call matter may consist of the rotating portions of a
perfect fluid, which continuously fills space. This
definition involves the necessity of a creative act for
the production or destruction of the smallest portion
of matter, because rotation can only be produced or
destroyed by us in a fluid in virtue of its viscosity (or
internal friction), and in a perfect fluid there is
nothing of the kind.
134. Of course it may be objected to this theory
that it merely shifts the difficulty one step further
back,—after all, explaining what we call matter by
certain motions of something which, as it must have
inertia, it would appear we are bound to call matter
also. We have been careful to mention this (latest)
speculation as to the nature of matter for three
reasons: 1st, because we shall have to make considerable
use of it in the course of our argument, for
purposes of illustration; 2d, because it shows one
way of at once thoroughly accounting for the conservation
of tangible matter; 3d, because it shows
the possibility of forming an idea of a true atom
which shall not require, even for perfect elasticity,
the inconceivable quality of perfect hardness necessary
to the atom of Lucretius. In fact, the few
words which we have given above about Helmholtz’s
investigations show that, to cut a vortex-atom, it
would be necessary to give a free surface to the perfect
fluid which on this theory is supposed to fill
space, i.e. virtually to sever space itself! This suggestion
of Thomson’s promises to be very valuable
from one point of view at least, viz., the extension
and improvement of mathematical methods; for in
the treatment of its very elements it requires the
application of the most powerful of hitherto invented
processes, and even with their aid, the mutual action
of two ring-vortices (the simplest possible space-form)
has not yet been investigated except in the special
cases of symmetrical disposition about an axis.
Hence we are at present altogether unable to decide
or even to guess whether this idea will or will not
pass with credit some of the most elementary examinations
to which a theory of the ultimate nature of
matter must of course be subjected.
135. Take them for what they are worth. The
four forms of speculation we have just sketched
represent the most plausible guesses yet propounded
as to the ultimate nature of matter, the second being
probably because the most artificial and the most
arbitrary, the most completely developed. For in it
the representation is self-contained as it were; it
does not base itself upon extraneous postulates, as of
ultimate hard particles (of what?), nor upon vortex
motion (of what? again), nor, finally, upon mere
intense heterogeneity (of what? once more), as do the
other three. But we naturally object to it as refining
away altogether the idea of stuff or substance which
the mind seems to require as something underlying
the notion of anything which is found to be directly
capable of affecting our senses.
136. The reader who has followed us so far, must
now see that our notions of the nature of matter are,
at best, but hazy. We know, it is true, a great many
of its properties very exactly, so much so indeed, as
to be able to deduce from them mathematically an
immense variety of consequences which subsequent
experiment shows to be correct, at least within the
limits of accuracy of our methods of observation and
measurement. But as to what it is we know no
more than Democritus or Lucretius did, though as to
what it may be or may not be we are perhaps considerably
better prepared with an opinion than they
could possibly be.
137. We have seen in the preceding chapter that
energy is never found separate from matter, so that
we might, with perfect propriety, define matter as
the seat or vehicle of energy—that which is essential
to the existence of the known forms of energy, without
which, therefore, there could be no transformations
of energy, and therefore no life such as we now
know it.
138. The transformability of a given amount of
energy, or, at least, the mode of its transformation,
often depends in a very curious manner upon the
relative quantity of matter with which it is associated.
We have already seen this in the case of heat. For,
when a given quantity of heat is associated with a
small quantity of matter, it is at a high temperature,
and has great availability, but its temperature, and
therefore its availability, become lower as the quantity
of matter with which it is associated is increased.
It is possible that radiant heat and light owe their
high availability to the very small density of the
luminiferous ether.
But it is not of heat alone that this statement is
true. The same thing holds with regard to other
forms of energy, even the very simplest forms of
visible kinetic energy for instance. A pillow or bolster
(stuffed with eider-down, let us say) of 30 lbs.
weight, and moving at 10 feet per second—i.e. as if it
had fallen from a height of considerably less than two
feet,—has nearly the same energy as a pellet of No. 1
shot when it leaves the muzzle of a fowling-piece.
How different the quality of these equal quantities
even of energy of the same kind! For, delivered
horizontally, the one would correspond to a staggering
push which few men could resist if it came unexpectedly;
while the other would scarcely affect one’s
equilibrium, though it might easily kill by penetrating
a vital organ. [In the brutal pastimes of the last
generation, as we now in our advanced humanitarianism
call them, this was well known as the difference
between the effects of a slow knock-down blow by a
heavy-weight, and a ‘punishing facer’ from a feather-weight.
Alas for the good old times! for our comparison,
apt as it is, is too probably thrown away on
the degenerate inhabitants of (once) merry England,
erewhile the home of the ‘Miller,’ with his honest
quarterstaff, of jolly and chivalrous wrestlers, boxers,
and bowmen, now the hell of running-kicks, garrotting,
gouging,[45] and stabbing.
Aetas parentum, pejor avis, tulit
nos nequiores, mox daturos
progeniem vitiosiorem.
The dissipation of energy is a great fact in a moral
as well as in a physical sense. In those good old
times men fought with men,—irrepressible energy,
rather than any sordid passion or uncontrolled vice,
constantly pulling the trigger! Now creatures in the
likeness of men vent their despicable passions in
murderous assaults upon women and children. But
science hints at an effectual cure. It is probable that
before many years have passed, electricity, which by
some mysterious means enables our nerves to call
our muscles into play, will be called upon by an
enlightened legislature to solve this desperate social
problem. Imprisonment has been tried in vain, and,
besides, it involves great and needless expense. The
‘cat,’ though thoroughly appropriate, is objected to
as tending to brutalise (!) the patient, and render
murder not unlikely. No such objections can be
urged against the use of electricity in any of its
many forms. For it can easily be applied so as to
produce for the requisite time, and for that only, and
under the direction of skilled physicists and physiologists,
absolutely indescribable torture (unaccompanied
by wound or even bruise), thrilling through
every fibre of the frame of such miscreants.]
139. After inertia, which is not accounted for by
any of the hypotheses as to the ultimate nature of
matter which we have just given, the most general
property of matter which we recognise is that of
universal gravitation, in virtue of which portions of
matter, if situated at a distance from one another,
are possessed of potential energy. We are apt to
hold exaggerated notions of the immense power of
gravity; but a little consideration will show us that
it is in reality one of the most trivial of the forces to
which matter is directly or indirectly subject.
Think for a moment of the fundamental experiments
in electricity and magnetism, known to men
for far more than 2000 years,—the lifting of light
bodies in general by rubbed amber, and of iron filings
by a loadstone. To produce the same effects by gravitation-attraction,—at
least if the attracting body had
the moderate dimensions of a hand-specimen of amber
or loadstone,—we should require it to be of so dense
a material as to weigh at the very least 1,000,000,000
lbs., instead of (as usual) a mere fraction of a pound.
Hence it is at once obvious that the imposing nature
of the force of gravity, as usually compared with
other attractive forces, is due not to its superior
qualitative magnitude, but to the enormous masses
of the bodies which exercise it.
In fact, the excessively delicate Torsion-balance of
Michell was absolutely requisite to demonstrate,
much more to measure, the mutual attraction between
a large and a small leaden sphere. And
(unless the third of the hypotheses as to the nature
of matter above given be correct, in which case the
form of our statement would require modification)
small or even moderately large pieces of matter are
held together entirely by cohesion, gravitation being
absolutely insensible; though in a huge mass like
the earth, the force exerted by one hemisphere on
the other (i.e. the force which would be called into
play to prevent its being split in two) depends
mainly upon gravitation, in comparison with whose
enormous amount even a cohesive force of 500 lbs.
weight per square inch over a circular surface of 4000
miles radius sinks into utter insignificance![46]
140. One only of the many hypotheses which have
been advanced to explain the cause of gravitation has
succeeded in passing the first preliminary tests. Of
course, the assumption of action at a distance may be
made to account for anything; but it is impossible (as
Newton long ago pointed out in his celebrated letters
to Bentley) for any one ‘who has in philosophical
matters a competent faculty of thinking’ for a moment
to admit the possibility of such action.
Hence we have but two ways of accounting for
gravitation:—either it is due to differences of pressure
in a substance continuously filling all space,
except where matter displaces it (?), or it is due to
impacts, in some respects analogous to those of the
particles of a gas which have been found to be capable
of accounting for gaseous pressure.
Now, all attempts as yet made to connect it with
the luminiferous ether, or the medium required to
explain electric and magnetic distance-action, have
completely failed; so that we are apparently driven
to the impact theory as the only tenable one.
141. To this theory Le Sage of Geneva devoted a
singularly acute mind during the whole of his exceptionally
long life; but, for all that, his posthumous
tract on the subject is but little in advance of the
results he had arrived at in his eighteenth year.
He assumes the existence of ultra-mundane corpuscles;
in infinite numbers, even compared with
those of the particles of matter; of dimensions excessively
small, but flying about in all directions with
velocities enormously great. Portions of gross matter
virtually screen one another to a certain extent from
the pressure due to this perpetual rain of corpuscles;
but only on the sides turned towards one another.
Hence a lone body would be equally battered on all
sides; but the introduction of a second mass interferes
with this arrangement, and diminishes the
pressure on the side next it. It is easy to show that
the amount of this diminution, for given small masses,
is inversely as the square of their relative distance.
But when larger masses are taken account of, this
diminution of pressure will not be (as gravity is)
directly as the quantities of matter present, unless the
further assumption is made that matter, whether by
the great distance between its particles, or by the
cage-like form of these particles, is almost perfectly
permeable to the corpuscles; so that, practically, the
corpuscles rain upon each of the interior particles of
a mass as freely as if it had been alone in space.
Some of the postulates of this theory are hard to
grant, and there is additional difficulty as to the mode
in which the supply of energy of the corpuscles is to
be kept up. To enter into details on this subject
is not in accordance with our plan. We therefore
refer the reader to Sir W. Thomson’s account of Le
Sage’s theory (Proc. R.S.E., 1871), and his suggestions
for its improvement, based upon his theory of vortex-atoms.[47]
142. But we must make one remark. If Le Sage’s
theory, or anything of a similar nature, be at all a
representation of the mechanism of gravitation, a
fatal blow is dealt to the notion of the tranquil form
of power we have called potential energy. Not that
there will cease to be a profound difference in kind
between it and ordinary kinetic energy; but that
BOTH must come henceforth to be regarded as kinetic.
What we now call kinetic energy is that of visible
motions, also of motions of the smaller parts of
bodies, and of the luminiferous ether, etc., each of
these being more refined, as it were, than the preceding.
But if Le Sage’s theory be true, potential energy
of gravitation is a kinetic form still further refined
than any of these. And the conservation of energy
may perhaps once more be completely and accurately
expressed as the conservation of vis viva, though the
term will of course have then a meaning incomparably
more extensive than its original one.
143. But, in speculations like these, we have soared
far beyond that which may be called the first refinement
on ordinary gross matter; i.e. the luminiferous,
probably also the electric and magnetic, medium, provisionally
the Ether.
To the consideration of its principal properties we
now turn our attention.
These are, at first sight at least, of an apparently
incongruous character; for, from one point of view,
the ether appears as a fluid, from another as an elastic
solid. Nothing is more certainly established in physical
astronomy than the excessive minuteness of the
resistance offered by the ether to the planetary
motions, if, indeed, there be such a resistance at all
appretiable, even when the velocity is, as in the case
of the earth, somewhere about 100,000 feet per
second! On the other hand, we learn from physical
optics that light, transmitted with a velocity of
188,000 miles per second, depends upon transverse
disturbances of some kind or other; while several
optical phenomena indicate that a disturbance of the
nature of compression (if such be possible) would be
transmitted with velocity almost infinitely great, in
comparison even with this enormous velocity.
144. Stokes, however, has given a very ingenious
illustration which enables us to see that such an extraordinary
combination of apparently irreconcilable
properties is by no means without analogy, even in
common matter. He takes the case of a solution of
glue, or isinglass, or jelly, in different relative amounts
of water. When the quantity of water is small, we
have the elastic solid; when large, a liquid little different
from water. And Stokes shows that it is
excessively improbable that there is any definite
intermediate stage which we could assign as that at
which the transition from the solid to the liquid takes
place. Of course, any such analogy must necessarily
be excessively imperfect; but a great deal is gained
by our being able to trace even a very imperfect
analogy in a case like this.
145. The ether, in fact, must be distorted as well as
displaced by matter passing through it; but any distortion
of the nature of a shear, such as would give
rise in water to vortex-motion accompanied by friction
(the whole energy being thus ultimately frittered
down into heat), would in the ether be handed on at
once, as vibratory motion, with the velocity of light.
Thus vortex-motion of the ether may be conceived to
be impossible, simply in consequence of the minuteness
of its density in comparison with the great
tangential force called into play by a shear; and a body
moving in it with a velocity not so great as that of
light would thus not have eddies in its wake, as in an
ordinary fluid, but, on the contrary, would be a source
of radiation, even although there may have been no
heating either of the body or of the medium it is displacing,
paradoxical as this result may appear. In
this connection it is hardly possible to avoid quoting
Milton—though there may be a suspicion of something
analogous to a pun:—
‘
The grinding sword with discontinuous wound
Passed through him—but the ethereal substance closed
Not long divisible.’
146. Sir William Thomson has endeavoured to obtain
at least an inferior limit to the density of the
ether in planetary space. His method is based upon
the measurements by Pouillet and Herschel of the
whole amount of radiant energy received from the
sun by a given amount of terrestrial surface in a given
time, and upon an assumption that the extreme
amplitude of distortion of the ether in any radiation
is small compared with the length of a wave. In this
way he finds that, as a cubic mile of the ether near the
earth contains about 12,000 foot-pounds of radiant
solar energy, the mass of the ether in that cubic mile
must be at least
11,000,000,000
of a pound.[48] To show
that this is not by any means a surprisingly small
quantity he compares it with the mass of a cubic mile
of air at a distance of only a few radii from the earth’s
surface (supposing that the atmosphere extends so
far; which, by the way, the recent calculations of the
velocities of the particles of a gas render exceedingly
improbable). This, he finds, will be probably represented
by a fraction of a pound having unit for a
numerator and 329 places of figures in the denominator!!!
147. In a very remarkable paper by Struve,[49] an
attempt was made to settle the question, Is the ether
perfectly transparent? or, as we may now put it, Is
any radiant energy absorbed by the ether, whether
to produce other forms of energy, or to be dissipated
by radiation in all directions? Long ago it had been
pointed out by Olbers and others, that if the stars be
infinite in number, and be distributed with anything
roughly approximating to an average density through
infinite space, the sky ought, night and day, to be all
over of a brightness of the same order as that of the
sun. Is the number of stars, then, finite; or does the
ether absorb their light? Now, it need not in the
least surprise us to find that the number of stars is
finite, even though matter be infinite in quantity, and
distributed with something like uniformity through
infinite space. For only a finite portion of it may yet
have fallen together so as to produce incandescent
bodies; or, the other extreme, only a finite portion
of it may be left incandescent. Either of these altogether
different hypotheses is perfectly reasonable
and scientifically justifiable; so that, from this point
of view, we are not at present likely to obtain any
information. Struve’s reasoning, which, by the way,
is not accepted by Sir J. Herschel, introduces another
consideration, viz., the number of stars of each visible
magnitude. To apply this: suppose for a moment
we make the assumption (actually measured values
of annual parallax show it is certainly at best a very
rough one) that the brighter stars are the nearer, and
that a set of stars, on the average one-fourth as bright
as another set, are on the average twice as far off, etc.
A great deal of what we know to be certainly false is
here assumed as true, but it is possible that the general
accuracy of the results of the reasoning from it
may not be thereby much affected. On the supposition
of a sort of rough uniformity of distribution
through space, we can easily calculate approximately
what ought to be the relative numbers of the stars,
classed by astronomers as of the various different
magnitudes, once we have obtained (as it is not difficult
to do) an estimate of the relative brightness of
typical stars of these (arbitrary) magnitudes. From
their brightness we calculate at once their relative
distances, and thence (according to our hypothesis of
approximately uniform distribution) what ought to
be the relative numbers of each magnitude. When this
is done, it appears that there is a great excess of the
calculated over the observed numbers, at least for
telescopic stars, and the greater the smaller the magnitude.
This is the gist of Struve’s method, and he
arrives at the result that the light of stars of the
sixth magnitude (the smallest visible to an ordinary
unaided eye, and whose average distance from us is
supposed to be somewhere about ninefold that of
stars of the first magnitude) loses about eight per
cent. in its passage to the earth. Thus the light of
stars of the first magnitude does not lose so much as
one per cent.; but, on the other hand, stars of the
ninth magnitude are enfeebled to the extent of about
30 per cent. Struve shows that, if his result is to be
accepted, W. Herschel’s idea that his 40-foot telescope
would show him stars seven times farther off than
those visible with the 10-foot, was erroneous. He
would, in fact, have been able to see little more than
twice as far.
It will be obvious now that an enormous increase
of the so-called space-penetrating power of a telescope
gives it in reality but a very feeble additional advantage,
in fact, that, if there be absorption by the ether,
we have already instruments capable of showing us,
at the very least, half of the whole number of stars
which any conceivable improvement of telescopes
would enable us to see.
148. It would be out of place here to speculate on
what becomes of the light thus supposed to be absorbed,
for we have as yet no experimental bases on
which to reason. We have not the least idea, for
instance, what is the effect of change of temperature
in the luminiferous ether. That it is practically incompressible
we know; it is quite probable that it
may not be sensibly compressed (if it be subject to
gravity, of which we have no proof) even by the
attraction of the mass of the whole earth—though, so
great is the intensity of molecular or cohesive attraction,
we may easily conceive that in the interior of
bodies the ether may be considerably compressed.
And it is not improbable that the ether, as a whole,
may have, in virtue of its internal forces, a property
(akin, as it were, to a liquid film) such that the gravitation
action, which appears to be between particles
of matter, may merely be the visible result of a tendency
to a minimum of some affection of the fluid in
which they are immersed.
Regard the ether as we please, there can be no
doubt that its properties are of a much higher order
in the arcana of nature than those of tangible matter.
And as even the high-priests of science still find the
latter far beyond their comprehension, except in
numerous but minute and often isolated particulars,
it would not become us to speculate further. It is
sufficient for our purpose to know from what the
ether certainly does that it is capable of vastly more
than any one has yet ventured to guess.
149. If we review the attempts recorded in this
chapter we see how the scientific mind is led from the
visible and tangible to the invisible and intangible.
In the first place, we know that one body, such as
the sun, can part with its radiant energy to another
body, such as the earth, and observation and experiment
alike lead us to acknowledge a stage in which
the energy has left the one body and has not yet
arrived at the other. But we have already seen that
energy is always found associated with matter, never
by itself. In fact we have spoken of matter as the
‘vehicle of energy.’ Hence it necessarily follows
that there is something between the sun and earth
capable of moving and transmitting energy, and
therefore, from the very conception of energy, possessing
mass—this something we agree to call the
ethereal medium.
Again, we know that different masses of visible
matter attract one another apparently at a distance.
Our first attempt to analyse the nature of this force
leads to the question:—Does it proceed from the
surfaces of the attracting bodies, or does it penetrate
their entire mass? This question was answered by
Newton, who came to the conclusion that every particle
of matter attracts every other particle with a
force proportional to the product of their masses, and
inversely proportional to the square of their distances.
But this drives the mystery of gravitation only
from the mass to the particle, and here the same sort
of questions again occur. A particle as truly as a
mass occupies space, and we wish to know whether
gravitation force proceeds from the surface of the
particle or from its interior.
150. We likewise wish to know how this force is
communicated between one particle and another?
Before we can solve these questions we must have
some definite conception of the nature of a particle
and of the constitution of the surrounding medium.
Sir W. Thomson, as we have seen, has attempted to
advance towards the nature of an atom or particle in
his supposition that atoms are vortex-rings generated
out of a perfect fluid filling all space. While, however,
this conception accounts for some of the properties
of an atom it does not at all directly account
for anything like gravitation, and hence he adopts in
addition the hypothesis of ultra-mundane corpuscles,
which he supposes to be only a finer form of vortices.
151. There is, however, one objection to the precise
form of vortex-ring hypothesis introduced by Thomson
which from our point of view is very strong.
The act by which the atom was produced must
surely on this hypothesis have been an act of creation
in time (Art. 133), that is to say, an act impressed
upon the universe from without, and it must therefore
have denoted a breach of continuity (Art. 85); for
if the antecedent of the visible universe be nothing but
a perfect fluid, can we imagine it capable of originating
such a development in virtue of its own inherent
properties, and without some external act implying a
breach of continuity?—we think most assuredly not.
In the production of the vortex-atom from a perfect
fluid we are driven at once to the unconditioned—to
the Great First Cause; it is, in fine, an act of creation
and not of development. But from our point of view
(Art. 86) creation belongs to eternity and development
to time, and we are therefore induced at least
to modify the hypothesis so as to make it consistent
with this view. We cannot, in fact, if we agree to
hold at the same time the principle of unbroken continuity
and the vortex-ring theory of formation of the
visible universe, regard the material whose rotating
parts are ordinary matter as an absolutely perfect
fluid.
152. This way of regarding this supposed material
is strengthened by the fact that the hypothesis which
seems most likely to account for gravitation presumes
the existence of ultra-mundane corpuscles: and the
observations of Struve upon the extinction of starlight
tend (whatever they are worth) towards the
same conclusion, since the absorption of light is more
compatible with a corpuscular constitution than with
that of a perfect fluid. Finally, the mere fact that
the velocity of light is finite, tends also in the same
direction. But if the visible universe be developed
from a material which is not a perfect fluid, then the
argument deduced by Sir W. Thomson in favour of
the eternity of ordinary matter disappears, since this
eternity depends upon the perfect fluidity of that out
of which it was developed. In fine, if we suppose the
material universe to be composed of a series of vortex-rings
developed from something which is not a perfect
fluid, it will be ephemeral, just as the smoke-ring
which we develop from air, or that which we develop
from water, is ephemeral, the only difference being in
duration, these lasting only for a few seconds, and the
others it may be for billions of years.
153. In our last chapter, we came to the conclusion
that the available energy of the visible universe will
ultimately be appropriated by the ether, and we may
now perhaps imagine, that as a separate existence
itself the visible universe will ultimately disappear, so
that we shall have no huge useless inert mass existing
in far remote ages to remind the passer-by of a
species of matter which will then have become long
since out of date and functionally effete. Why should
not the universe bury its dead out of sight?[50]
CHAPTER V. DEVELOPMENT.
‘Are God and Nature then at strife,
That Nature lends such evil dreams?
So careful of the type she seems,
So careless of the single life;
‘“So careful of the type”? but no,
From scarped cliff and quarried stone
She cries, “A thousand types are gone:
I care for nothing, all shall go.”’—Tennyson.
‘All nature is but art, unknown to thee;
All chance, direction, which thou canst not see,
All discord, harmony not understood;
All partial evil, universal good;
And spite of pride, in erring reason’s spite,
One truth is clear, whatever is, is right.’—Pope.
154. In the two preceding Chapters we have dwelt
upon the laws of energy and the ultimate constitution
of matter; in other words, we have discussed the
laws according to which the machine called the visible
universe works, as well as the probable nature of the
material of which it is composed. We have in this
process (Arts. 86, 151) come to the conclusion that
the visible universe has been developed out of the
invisible. Once developed, it has its own laws of
action which we may discover,—laws which at present
appear to be invariably followed, as far at least as
our strictly scientific experience can inform us.
In fine, the visible universe is that which we are in
a position to observe; gaining an insight into its
present method of working, and trying also to reply
to the very interesting question, Has it always worked
in its present manner, or has there ever been any
apparent break?
Let us therefore consider this visible universe immediately
after its production, and endeavour to
become acquainted with the course of its development.
What did it do? Was it, or was it not,
entirely left to itself, and to what may be termed
the natural laws impressed upon it when it was produced?
Or, if the results of our inquiry seem to
show that it was not entirely left to itself, when, to
what extent, and for what purposes, has there been
and is there interference proceeding from the unseen?
In replying to these questions, let us, for the sake
of convenience, consider development under the three
following heads, viz., (α) Chemical or Stuff Development,
(β) Globe Development, (γ) Life Development.
155. Beginning with chemical or stuff development,
we come at once to a very interesting and important
question. Assuming that the atoms of the
present universe were developed from the invisible,
were different kinds of atoms thus developed, or were
they all of one kind?
To this question the chemist of last century would
have replied, that undoubtedly there were many kinds
of primeval atoms, and then would follow a formidable
list of all these various substances which he was unable
to decompose.
The chemist of thirty or forty years later would
still have replied to the question in the same way,
but he would probably have furnished a different
list of primeval elements less formidable in number.
If the chemist of forty years ago had been asked,
he would have furnished a list of perhaps fifty simple
substances; but then, probably, the minimum would
have been reached; for ask the chemist of to-day,
and he will furnish a list of sixty-four so-called
elements.
156. But while the number of as yet undecomposed
bodies is slowly increasing by fresh discoveries, chemists
are beginning to speculate as to the possibility
that these so-called elements may be in reality nothing
more than combinations differing in numbers
and in tactical arrangement, of some one kind of
primordial atoms.
This idea was first entertained by Dr. Prout, the well-known
physician and chemist. He pointed out that
the atomic weights of the various so-called elements
are very nearly all multiples of the half of that of
hydrogen, so that the various elements may possibly
be looked upon as formed by a grouping together of
certain atoms of half the mass of the hydrogen atom.
M. Stas, the distinguished Belgian chemist, instituted
a laborious series of experiments with the view
of testing this doctrine. He came to the conclusion
that the atomic weights of the various elements were
not precisely multiples of the half of that of hydrogen,
there being greater differences than could possibly
be accounted for by errors of experiment. His
researches, however, seemed to show that in many
cases there was a very near approach to Prout’s imagined
law. But in no case does the discrepance
appear to us greatly to exceed what may easily be
attributed to unavoidable impurities in the substances
operated on; say only those due to the condensation
of gases in the pores of solids, which (in
certain cases at least) is known to amount to a very
considerable quantity.
157. From another point of view there appears to
be evidence in favour of the so-called elementary
bodies being built up, as more or less complex
arrangements of one, or at most a few, simpler kinds
of matter.
There are certain groups or families amongst these
elements of such a nature that the various members
of one family appear to be related to each other, in
the same way as the corresponding members of another
family.
This clearly points to some sort of community of
origin, and thus favours the idea that the elements
are in reality composite structures. But the great
difficulty felt by those who have favoured this idea
has been the apparent impossibility of decomposing
such family groups. Thus fluorine, chlorine, bromine,
and iodine, while they appear to be related to
one another in some peculiar manner, have yet apparently
resisted all attempts at decomposition, and
there are other similar instances which might easily
be named.
158. It has, however, at the same time, come to be
recognised, that heat of high temperature is a very
powerful decomposing agent, and that its office is by
no means limited to causing the separation from one
another of the molecules of a substance, as, for instance,
when it separates the molecules of water-substance
or H2O from one another, as in forming
water from ice, or steam from water. It is now
understood that high-temperature heat has also the
power of separating the atomic constituents of a
single molecule from each other, so that at an extremely
high temperature not only would water be
driven into steam, but steam driven into oxygen and
hydrogen. We are already familiar with many instances
of this power possessed by high-temperature
heat; thus we see carbonate of lime decomposed by
the heat of the kiln into lime and carbonic-acid gas.
We see also that at the high temperatures which
accompany the electric spark almost all compounds
are momentarily decomposed, if we may judge by
the spectrum of the light which is given out. Carrying
on this line of thought, we are led to imagine
that, could we obtain higher temperatures than those
now at our disposal, we might decompose some of
those substances which at present seem to be elements.
159. Lockyer, in his astronomical researches, has
recently started this question. He argues that in the
sun and stars, and more especially in the whiter stars,
there are temperatures very much higher than any
which have been here produced. He assumes too
that simplicity of constitution accompanies a simple
spectrum, an hypothesis which is consistent with the
fact that compounds as a rule give spectra much
more complicated than those of simple substances.
Now it is a curious circumstance that the atmospheres
of some of the whiter stars, such as Sirius,
do not appear to contain anything but hydrogen; at
least we have no indication that they do; other stars,
again, of less whiteness, in addition to hydrogen, have
such substances as iron, sodium, etc., while yellow,
orange, and blood-red stars and variable stars, appear
to contain in their atmospheres substances which are
compounds. If then it be true that as a rule the
atmospheres of the whiter stars contain the fewer
elements and those of smallest atomic weight, and
that as stars diminish in whiteness their atmospheres
rise in complexity of structure, in fine, if we have
reason to associate together whiteness and simplicity,
this undoubtedly tells in favour of the power of high-temperature
heat to split up the so-called elements.
We conclude the whiter stars to be the hotter stars,
from the fact that their spectra contain a greater proportion
of the more refrangible rays than do those of
yellow or red stars.
In fine, a speculation of this nature is not to be
summarily dismissed, but ought to be retained as a
working hypothesis which may in time throw great
light on the ultimate constitution of the chemical elements.
Is it fanciful to suppose that the passage
prefixed to Chapter III. may refer to this, since
(literally translated) it stands—‘... the elements,
intensely heated, shall be broken up....’?
160. Let us now turn to globe development. We
have alluded to this already while discussing the
energy of the universe. In doing so we came to the
conclusion that the original state of the visible universe
was a diffused or chaotic state, in which the
various particles were widely separated from one
another, but exerting on one another gravitating
force, and therefore possessed of potential energy.
As these particles came together, impinged on one
another, or gathered into groups, this potential energy
was gradually transformed into the energy of heat
and into that of visible motion. We may thus imagine
the cooling and (except under very strict conditions
of original distribution) necessarily revolving
matter in course of time to have thrown off certain
parts of itself which would thereafter form satellites
or planetary attendants, while the central mass would
form the sun. We have here, in fact, the development
hypothesis of Kant and Laplace, and it is
greatly in favour of the truth of this hypothesis that
all the planetary motions of the solar system are
nearly in one plane, and also that, looking down on
the system from above that plane, all these motions
are seen to be in one and the same direction.
161. Assuming, therefore, that the solar system
and, pari passu, the other sidereal systems have been
formed in this way, it is very easy to see why the
central mass should be so much hotter than its
attendants. Two causes would conduce to this. In
the first place, assuming that the heat of a mass is
due to the rushing together of its particles under the
force of gravitation, the velocities would be much
greater for the central mass, and hence the amount
of heat (per unit of mass, i.e. the temperature) developed
would be greater also. In the next place,
the body being a large one would cool less rapidly
than its attendant planets. These two causes thus
combine to render the largest bodies of the universe
ever since their aggregation (and still more now) the
hottest, so that the same body which forms the gravitating
centre of the system becomes, when required,
also the dispenser of light and heat.
162. Now, without speculating about the nature or
extent of the ethereal medium, we may be sure of
two things. In the first place, all but an exceedingly
small fraction of the light and heat of the sun and
stars goes out into space and does not return to them
again, or in other words, the sun and stars are slowly
cooling. To restore to the sun every instant its losses
by radiation, the whole celestial vault would have to
radiate as powerfully as the sun does—in which case
the earth and planets would very soon acquire (at
their surfaces) the sun’s temperature. In the next
place, the visible motion of the large bodies of the
universe is gradually being stopped by something
which may be denominated ethereal friction. It
follows from this that our own sun will gradually
lose his brilliancy, and that our earth will gradually
lose its orbital energy and approach the sun in a
path of slowly contracting spiral convolutions. At last
it will become entangled with the sun, and the result
will be the conversion of the remaining orbital energy
into heat, after which the two bodies will remain one.
Thus the tendency is that the sun shall ultimately
absorb the various planets of the system, his heat and
energy being recruited by the process. Now, let us
imagine that the same processes are simultaneously
going on in one of the nearer fixed stars, say for instance
in Sirius.
After unimaginable ages these two stars, the Sun
and Sirius, having each long since swallowed up his
attendants, but being nevertheless exhausted in heat-energy
on account of radiation into space, may be
imagined to be travelling towards one another, slowly
at first, but afterwards with an accelerated motion.
They will at last approach each other with a great
velocity, and finally form one system. Ultimately the
two will rush together and form one mass, the orbital
energy of each (or rather that portion of this energy
which remains after ethereal friction) being converted
into heat, and the matter being, in consequence,
probably partly smashed into mere dust, and partly
evaporated and transformed into a gaseous, nebulous
condition. Ages pass away, and the large double mass
ultimately shares the same fate that long since overtook
the single masses which composed it; that is to
say, it shrinks and throws off planets, but gives out the
greater part of its light and heat into space and gradually
becomes cold and dark, until at length it comes
to form one of the constituents of a still more stupendous
collision, and has its temperature raised once
again by the conversion of visible energy into heat.
163. Our readers will remark how, by a process of
this kind, the primordial potential energy of the
visible universe is gradually converted into light and
heat, and how this light and heat are ultimately dissipated
into space. They will also remark that, as
the process goes on, the masses of the universe
become larger and larger. In fine, the dissipation of
the energy of the visible universe proceeds, pari passu,
with the aggregation of mass.
The very fact, therefore, that the large masses of
the visible universe are of finite size, is sufficient to
assure us that the process cannot have been going on
for ever; or, in other words, that the visible universe
must have had its origin in time, and we may conclude
that if the visible universe be finite in mass the
process will ultimately come to an end. All this is
what would take place, provided we allow the indestructibility
of ordinary matter; but we may perhaps
suppose (Art. 153) that the very material of the visible
universe will ultimately vanish into the invisible.
164. There is one peculiarity of the process of development
just described, which we beg our readers to
note. We have supposed the visible universe, after its
production, to have been left to its own laws; that is to
say, to certain so-called inorganic agencies, which for
want of better knowledge we for the present call forces,
in virtue of which its development took place.[51] At
the very first there may have been only one kind of
primordial atom, or, to use another expression, absolute
simplicity of material. As, however, the various
atoms approached each other, in virtue of the forces
with which they were endowed, other and more complicated
structures took the place of the perfectly
simple primordial stuff. Various kinds of molecules
were produced at various temperatures, and these
ultimately came together to produce globes or worlds,
some of them comparatively small, others very large.
Thus the progress is from the regular to the irregular.
And we find a similar progress when we consider the
inorganic development of our own world. The action
of water rounds pebbles, but it rounds them irregularly;
it produces soil, but the soil is irregular in the size of
its grains, and variable in constitution. Wherever
what may be termed the brute forces of nature are
left to themselves, this is always the result: not so,
however, when organisms are concerned in the development.
Two living things of the same family are
more like each other than two grains of sand or than
two particles of soil. The eggs of birds of the same
family, the corresponding feathers of similar birds,
the ants from the same ant-hill, all form groups whose
members have a very strong likeness to each other.
We find this likeness still more marked when we
regard certain products of human industry. Let us
take, for instance, coins from the same die, or bullets
from the same mould, or impressions from the same
engraved plate, and we at once perceive the striking
difference between products developed through inorganic
means and those developed through an intelligent
agent designing uniformity.
165. Let us now proceed to consider life development.
Let us imagine that the primeval atoms have
long since come together, various chemical substances
being the result. And let us further imagine that
these various substances have long since gathered
themselves into worlds, of various sizes at first; but
that these worlds have gradually cooled down, until
one of them, the Earth, let us say, has at length
reached conditions under which life (such as we know
it) becomes possible. Accordingly life makes its
appearance; not the life that now is, but something
much ruder and simpler. But in process of time we
find quite a different order of organised beings; a
higher and more complete type has appeared, and
the type continues to rise until it culminates in the
production of man, a being endowed with intelligence,
and capable of reasoning upon the phenomena around
him. Now, if man reviews these organised forms
which exist on the earth side by side with himself, he
perceives at once that a number of individuals possess
certain characteristics in common, and he gives
expression to this experience by saying that these
individuals are all of one species. ‘When we call a
group of animals or of plants a species,’ says Professor
Huxley,[52] ‘we may imply thereby, either that all these
animals or plants have some common peculiarity of
form or structure; or we may mean that they possess
some common functional character. That part of
biological science which deals with form and structure
is called Morphology; that which concerns itself with
function, Physiology. So that we may conveniently
speak of these two senses, or aspects, of “species”—the
one as morphological, the other as physiological....
Thus horses form a species, because the group of
animals to which that name is applied is distinguished
from all others in the world by the following constantly
associated characters:—They have, 1. a vertebral
column; 2. mammae; 3. a placental embryo;
4. four legs; 5. a single well-developed toe in each
foot, provided with a hoof; 6. a bushy tail; and 7.
callosities on the inner sides of both the fore and the
hind legs. The asses, again, form a distinct species, because,
with the same characters, as far as the fifth in
the above list, all asses have tufted tails, and have
callosities only on the inner side of the fore legs.’
But very often the morphological peculiarities of a
species are more easily recognised than expressed.
No one, for instance, would fail to rank the horse as
one species and the ass as another, even while ignorant
of some of those specific peculiarities which the naturalist
selects as conveying the best scientific account
of their difference.
166. Let us now regard the question of species
from its physiological point of view. Suppose that
two individuals, A and B, of different sexes, breed
freely together, producing offspring, and that two individuals,
C and D, do the like.
Now, if the offspring of A and B is capable of
breeding freely with that of C and D, producing
offspring, generation after generation, then A, B, C,
and D may be said to belong to the same physiological
species.
To take an illustration borrowed from Professor
Huxley: let us imagine that A is an Arab, and B a
dray-horse; also that C is a dray-horse, and D an
Arab. Now the progeny of these two pairs will all be
mongrels, holding a position intermediate between
that of the Arab and the dray-horse; but they will
be perfectly fertile amongst themselves when matched
together. We therefore conclude that the dray-horse
and the Arab are not distinct physiological species,
but only varieties of the same species. Again, let A
be a horse and B an ass, also let C be an ass and D a
horse. The pairs will still have offspring, and these
will be mules, having a character intermediate between
that of the horse and that of the ass; but, on
the other hand, these mules will not be able to breed
together amongst themselves so as to produce offspring.
We are therefore justified in asserting that
a horse and an ass are of different physiological
species.
If we should ever attempt to pair together animals
much more unlike each other than the horse and the
ass, we should simply fail. They will not come together,
and we cannot tell whether, if they did, they
would be capable of producing progeny. We may
therefore conclude that, as matter of fact, there are
certain well-marked physiological species that will
not breed with each other at all, while there are other
species also physiologically distinct, but not so markedly
separated from each other, that may be brought
to breed together, their offspring being infertile.
167. The most apparent conclusion to be deduced
from these facts would be that of the invariability of
species, and of the impossibility of its transmutation—the
infertility of hybrids being the law which prevents
any such transmutation from taking place. And
as the physiological species cannot be made different
the apparent conclusion is that in times past they
have been always the same as they are now. If this
be allowed, it follows that inasmuch as they took their
origin in time, they must have originally been produced
very much as they are at the present moment,—a
separate act of production being required for each
species, or rather two separate acts for each species.
This position has always been regarded as a stronghold
by a certain class of theological thinkers, and
they have resented the attempts of men of science
to obtain any other explanation of the origin of
species.
Men of science have, on the other hand, asserted
their right to discuss this question with the same freedom
as any other. Our point of view is somewhat
different from that of either of these two parties. We
think it is not so much the right or privilege as the
bounden duty of the man of science to put back the
direct interference of the Great First Cause—the unconditioned—as
far as he possibly can in time. This
is the intellectual or rather theoretical work which he
is called upon to do—the post that has been assigned
to him in the economy of the universe.
If, then, two possible theories of the production of
any phenomenon are presented to the man of science,
one of these implying the immediate operation of the
unconditioned, and the other the operation of some
cause existing in the universe, we conceive that he is
called upon by the most profound obligations of his
nature and work to choose the second in preference
to the first. But we have already sufficiently discussed
this question in a previous part of this book
(Art. 85).
168. When we examine closely into the phenomena
of life we find that side by side with the general law,
that like produces like, there is a tendency to minor
variations.
Thus we have already agreed to consider dray-horses
and Arabs as varieties of the species horse;
and in like manner pouters, carriers, fan-tails, and
tumblers are all varieties of the species rock-pigeon.
We are therefore led to ask how such varieties were
originally produced, and how they become perpetuated
after their production.
Now it is well known that there occurs occasionally
an accountable variation, so marked in its nature as
to be worthy of historical record. Two very interesting
and instructive instances of this are given by Professor
Huxley, and we take the liberty of quoting
these in the Professor’s own words:—
‘The first of them is that of the “Ancon,” or “Otter” sheep,
of which a careful account is given by Colonel David Humphreys,
F.R.S., in a letter to Sir Joseph Banks, published in
the Philosophical Transactions for 1813. It appears that one
Seth Wright, the proprietor of a farm on the banks of the
Charles River in Massachusetts, possessed a flock of fifteen
ewes and a ram of the ordinary kind. In the year 1791, one
of the ewes presented her owner with a male lamb differing,
for no assignable reason, from its parents by a proportionally
long body and short bandy legs, whence it was unable to
emulate its relatives in those sportive leaps over the neighbours’
fences, in which they were in the habit of indulging, much to
the good farmer’s vexation.
‘With the ’cuteness characteristic of their nation, the neighbours
of the Massachusetts farmer imagined it would be an
excellent thing if all his sheep were imbued with the stay-at-home
tendencies enforced by nature upon the newly arrived
ram, and they advised Wright to kill the old patriarch of his
fold, and install the Ancon ram in his place. The result justified
their sagacious anticipations.... The young lambs were
almost always either pure Ancons or pure ordinary sheep.
But when sufficient Ancon sheep were obtained to interbreed
with one another it was found that the offspring was always
pure Ancon.’
‘The second case is that detailed by a no less unexceptionable
authority than Réaumur, in his Art de faire éclore les
Poulets. A Maltese couple named Kelleia, whose hands and
feet were constructed upon the ordinary human model, had
born to them a son, Gratio, who possessed six perfectly moveable
fingers on each hand, and six toes, not quite so well formed,
on each foot. No cause could be assigned for the appearance
of this unusual variety of the human species. But however
they may have arisen, what especially interests us is to remark
that, once in existence, varieties obey the fundamental law of
reproduction, that like tends to produce like, and their offspring
exemplify it by tending to exhibit the same deviation from the
parental stock as themselves. Indeed, there seems to be in
many instances a prepotent influence about a newly arisen
variety which gives it what we may call an unfair advantage
over the normal descendants from the same stock. This is
strikingly exemplified by the case of Gratio Kelleia, who
married a woman with the ordinary pentadactyle extremities
and had by her four children, Salvator, George, André, and
Marie. Of these children Salvator, the eldest boy, had six
fingers and six toes, like his father; the second and third, also
boys, had five fingers and five toes, like their mother, though
the hands and feet of George were slightly deformed; the last,
a girl, had five fingers and five toes, but the thumbs were
slightly deformed. The variety thus reproduced itself purely in
the eldest, while the normal type reproduced itself purely in
the third, and almost purely in the second and last; so that it
would seem, at first, as if the normal type were more powerful
than the variety. But all these children grew up and intermarried
with normal wives and husbands, and then note what took
place—Salvator had four children, three of whom exhibited the
hexadactyle members of their grandfather and father, while the
youngest had the pentadactyle limbs of the mother and grandmother;
so that here, notwithstanding a double pentadactyle
dilution of the blood the hexadactyle variety had the best of it.
The same prepotency of the variety was still more markedly
exemplified in the progeny of two of the other children, Marie
and George. Marie (whose thumbs only were deformed) gave
birth to a boy with six toes, and three other normally formed
children; but George, who was not quite so pure a pentadactyle,
begot, first, two girls, each of whom had six fingers and toes;
then a girl with six fingers on each hand, and six toes on the
right foot, but only five toes on the left; and lastly, a boy with
only five fingers and toes. In these instances, therefore, the
variety, as it were, leaped over one generation to reproduce
itself in full force in the next. Finally, the purely pentadactyle
André was the father of many children, not one of whom departed
from the normal parental type.’
169. The instances now quoted illustrate two
things. Both tell us how varieties arise, we may say
spontaneously, or in other words we cannot tell how;
and the former instance, that of the Ancon breed, shows
us moreover that such varieties when they do occur
may be rendered permanent by means of artificial
selection. If the six-fingered descendants of Gratio
Kelleia had been forced to intermarry amongst themselves
it is highly probable that we should have had
a permanent hexadactyle variety of the human race.
It has likewise been shown by Charles Darwin that
the pouter, the fan-tail, the carrier, and the tumbler
are all varieties of the common rock-pigeon.
170. It thus appears that permanent varieties may
be produced by artificial selection. Now Darwin
and Wallace have brought before us the very great
fact that similar changes can also be produced by
natural selection.
To illustrate this, let us imagine a slight variety
to arise spontaneously, we do not know how. Having
arisen there is a ‘prepotent influence’ about
it which enables it to secure a considerable proportion
of offspring having its own characteristics.
Now, suppose that the characteristics are such as to
adapt the individuals possessing them more perfectly
to the conditions of nature which surround them.
When, by breeding amongst themselves, the new
variety is rendered permanent, the members of this
variety will, therefore, have an advantage over their
elder brethren so far as certain conditions of nature
are concerned, will in fact succeed better in the
struggle for existence, and will ultimately displace
the elder branches. Thus the struggle for existence
bears to natural selection the same relation as man
bears to artificial selection.
171. We now come to the real point of difficulty,
or at least the unproved point, in the Darwinian
hypothesis. We may cross one race with another,
but we do not obtain, so far as we know, those
phenomena of infertility which are exhibited when
we cross distinct species with each other. The
Ancon sheep were perfectly fertile when matched
with their elder brethren, and the dray-horse and the
Arab, or the pouter and the tumbler, breed together
as easily as if they were of the same race. But if we
cannot produce infertility, how can we apply the
results of artificial selection to account for the origin
of species?
This difficulty is met by Darwin and his followers
in this way:—‘It is not as yet proved,’ says Professor
Huxley, ‘that a race ever exhibits, when crossed
with another race of the same species, those phenomena
of hybridisation which are exhibited by many
species when crossed with other species. On the
other hand, not only is it not proved that all species
give rise to hybrids infertile inter se, but there is
much reason to believe that, in crossing, species
exhibit every gradation from perfect sterility to perfect
fertility.’ This appears to carry weight; the
old theory went with a leap from perfect fertility to
perfect sterility, and did not contemplate the possibility
of a continuous gradation from the one extreme
to the other; at least its argument was founded
upon the neglect of such a gradation. But if there
be a gradation of this kind, it follows that infertility
will merely represent the results of crossing two
species whose functional characteristics are very
different from each other; and, on the other hand,
the reason why artificially produced varieties are not
infertile when crossed with one another may only be
that the experiment has not been continued long
enough.
Time, in fact, is the essential requisite in all such
attempts to imitate nature.
172. In connection with this subject, Mr. Darwin
has remarked that certain plants are more fertile
with the pollen of another species than with their
own; and Professor Huxley tells us that there are
certain fuci whose male element will fertilise the
ovule of a plant of distinct species, while the males
of the latter species are ineffective with the females
of the first. So obscure in some of its branches is
the working of the reproductive system.
Again, the following remark by Mr. Darwin is very
suggestive:—
‘First crosses between forms known to be varieties,
or sufficiently alike to be considered as varieties, and
their mongrel offspring, are very generally, but not
quite universally, fertile. Nor is this nearly general
and perfect fertility surprising, when we remember
how liable we are to argue in a circle with respect to
varieties in a state of nature; and when we remember
that the greater number of varieties have been produced
under domestication, by the selection of mere
external differences, and not of differences in the
reproductive system. In all other respects, excluding
fertility, there is a close general resemblance between
hybrids and mongrels.’
173. The result of all these speculations is to render
it probable that there may be in nature, give it time
enough, a process which leads to the transmutation
of species.
The accumulation of successive differences, each
representing some element of success in the struggle
for life, may easily be imagined to be capable of producing,
in the course of ages, a very great change.
Reasoning out this hypothesis, the more advanced
followers of Mr. Darwin do not hesitate to describe
all the varieties of living things, including man, as
the results of development from some primordial
germ taking place throughout the course of immeasurable
ages. And Mr. Darwin himself, in his
work on the Descent of Man, lays great stress on the
occurrence of homologous structures in man and the
lower animals, as well as on the development in man
of rudimentary structures, which are either absolutely
useless to their possessor, or of very slight service
indeed, but which appear to serve as an index of the
various stages through which the human species has
passed in its progress upwards from lower forms of
life.
174. Mr. Wallace, however, sees in the production
of man the intervention of an external will.
He remarks that the lowest types of savages are in
possession of a brain, and of capacities far beyond any
use to which they could apply them in their present
condition, and that therefore they could not have
been evolved from the mere necessities of their environments.
175. Finally, Professor Huxley imagines the possibility
of the Darwinian hypothesis requiring modification.
Alluding to the assumed circularity of the
planetary orbits which followed the establishment of
the Copernican hypothesis (Art. 69), he remarks:—
‘But the planetary orbits turned out to be not
quite circular after all, and, grand as was the service
Copernicus rendered to science, Kepler and Newton
had to come after him. What if the orbit of Darwinism
should be a little too circular? What if
species should offer residual phenomena, here and
there, not explicable by natural selection? Twenty
years hence naturalists may be in a position to say
whether this is, or is not, the case; but in either event
they will owe the author of “The Origin of Species”
an immense debt of gratitude.’
176. We will defer to our last chapter some further
remarks on Mr. Darwin’s hypothesis. Meanwhile,
before concluding, let us briefly allude to the original
production of living things on our globe. It may,
perhaps, eventually be possible by means of a hypothesis
of evolution, to account for the great variety
of living forms on the supposition of a single primordial
germ to begin with; but the difficulty still
remains how to account for this germ.
It is against all true scientific experience that life
can appear without the intervention of a living antecedent.
How then are we to explain the production
of the primordial germ?
The difficulty of doing so from our point of view
would appear to be unusually great, for we have come
to the conclusion that, as a matter of scientific principle,
we cannot admit any such breach of continuity
as a pure act of creation in time would imply.
If, then, a pure act of creation in time be an
inadmissible hypothesis, and if the hypothesis of
Abiogenesis be equally inadmissible, our readers may
well ask how are we to surmount the difficulty. For
our reply to this question, we must once more beg to
refer them to our concluding chapter.
CHAPTER VI. SPECULATIONS AS TO THE POSSIBILITY OF SUPERIOR INTELLIGENCES TN THE VISIBLE UNIVERSE.
‘The earth hath bubbles, as the water has,
And these are of them.’—Shakespeare, Macbeth.
177. Our readers are now aware from what we have
said in Chapter II. that the two great requisites for
organised existence are, in the first place, an organ
of memory, giving the individual a hold upon the
past, and secondly, the possibility of varied action in
the present, and that unless these two things are
fulfilled life is simply inconceivable.
Again, in Chapters III., IV., and V. we have sufficiently
discussed the visible universe and its potentialities.
We have seen that although at present it
contains the essential requisites for organised existence,
yet, in the remote future, a time will necessarily
arrive when, through a degradation of the Energy of
this universe, or at least of one part of it, that variety
of motion which is essential to life will be unattainable.
Immortality is, therefore, impossible or hardly
possible in such a universe; but even allowing all
this to be the case, it is at least conceivable that
man may be at death drafted off into some superior
rank of being connected with the present universe,
and thence ultimately removed into a new order of
things when the present universe shall have become
effete.
Let us now, therefore, very briefly discuss the
question as to the possibility of intelligences superior
to man existing in the present visible universe.
And, in order to commence this inquiry, let us
analyse with some minuteness the physical source of
that peculiarity which the present universe possesses,
in virtue of which it affords living beings the means
of a varied existence. Whence is all this power
derived? How comes it about that a living being
possesses that abruptness and spontaneity of action
which peculiarly characterise it? In fine, let us consider
the exact position of life in the present physical
universe.
178. Now, in the first place, it is well known that
equilibrium may be of two kinds, stable and unstable,
and if we take an egg balanced on its end at the edge
of a table as an example of mechanical instability,
we shall see that it ‘depends upon some external
impulse so infinitesimally small as to elude our
observation whether the egg shall fall upon the floor
and give rise to a comparatively large transmutation
of energy, or whether it shall fall upon the table and
give rise to a transmutation comparatively small.’[53]
But, just as there are other forces besides gravity,
so there are other varieties of instability besides that
which we treat of in mechanics.
We may, for instance, have molecular instability,
such as characterises water cooled below the freezing
point, or a supersaturated solution of Glauber’s salt,
where the advent of the smallest possible crystal of
ice or of Glauber’s salt is sufficient to bring about a
marked molecular change in the liquid, which immediately
becomes thick with deposited crystals; or
again, we may have chemical instability in which
the slightest impulse of any kind may determine a
chemical change, just as in mechanical instability
the slightest possible impulse may determine a mechanical
change. Thus fulminating silver or nitroglycerine
are familiar examples of chemical instability
in which the slightest blow or the smallest
spark may be sufficient to bring about an instantaneous
and violent generation of heated gas.
179. Again, all machines—that is to say, all material
systems—must necessarily be of two kinds, one
of which makes use of the stable forces of nature and
the other of the unstable. The following quotation
from a work on Energy, by one of the authors of this
book, will sufficiently explain what is meant:[54]—
‘When we speak of a structure, or a machine, or a system,
we simply mean a number of individual particles associated
together in producing some definite result. Thus, the solar
system, a timepiece, a rifle, are examples of inanimate machines;
while an animal, a human being, an army, are examples of animated
structures or machines. Now, such machines or structures
are of two kinds, which differ from one another not only in
the object sought, but also in the means of attaining that object.
‘In the first place, we have structures or machines in which
systematic action is the object aimed at, and in which all the
arrangements are of a conservative nature, the element of instability
being avoided as much as possible. The solar system, a
timepiece, a steam-engine at work, are examples of such machines,
and the characteristic of all such is their calculability.
Thus the skilled astronomer can tell, with the utmost precision,
in what place the moon or the planet Venus will be found this
time next year. Or again, the excellence of a timepiece consists
in its various hands pointing accurately in a certain direction
after a certain interval of time. In like manner we may
safely count upon a steamship making so many knots an hour,
at least while the outward conditions remain the same. In all
these cases we make our calculations, and we are not deceived—the
end sought is regularity of action, and the means employed
is a stable arrangement of the forces of nature.
‘Now, the characteristics of the other class of machines are
precisely the reverse.
‘Here the object aimed at is not a regular, but a sudden and
violent, transmutation of energy, while the means employed are
unstable arrangements of natural forces. A rifle at full-cock,
with a delicate hair-trigger, is a very good instance of such a
machine, where the slightest touch from without may bring
about the explosion of the gunpowder, and the propulsion of the
ball with a very great velocity. Now, such machines are eminently
characterised by their incalculability.
‘It is thus apparent that, as regards energy, structures are
of two kinds. In one of these, the object sought is regularity
of action, and the means employed, a stable arrangement of
natural forces; while in the other, the end sought is freedom
of action, and a sudden transmutation of energy, the means
employed being an unstable arrangement of natural forces.
‘The one set of machines are characterised by their calculability—the
other by their incalculability. The one set, when at
work, are not easily put wrong, while the other set are characterised
by great delicacy of construction.’
180. Having thus defined the two kinds of machines,
let us now see to what extent a living being
may be regarded as a machine, and also to which of
these two categories he belongs.
What our machines enable us to do is merely
to transform energy. Our readers are well aware,
by what we have already said (Art. 102), that it is
just as impossible to create energy as it is to create
matter.
Thus a clock has to be wound up before it will
go; an engine has to be stoked with coal; a rifle or
cannon has to be charged with powder; and in short,
all machines, whether delicately constructed or not,
whether calculable or incalculable, are merely transmuters
of energy and not creators of it.
To this law the living being is no exception. The
creatures of this world (and it is of such we are now
speaking) are certainly not creators of energy; but
in respect of the great law of the conservation of
energy, such beings must be regarded in the very
same light as any other machines.
But there is yet another analogy between living
beings and inanimate machines. When we study
the working of any machine, we find that each transformation
of energy brought about has a material
antecedent; the effect produced has a cause from
which it springs, and this cause is one which we are
probably able to recognise from our knowledge of
the laws of matter. To take an example: in a steam-engine
the amount of work produced depends upon
the amount of heat carried from the boiler to the
condenser; and this amount depends in its turn upon
the amount of coal which is burned in the furnace of
the engine. In like manner, the velocity of the bullet
which issues from a rifle depends upon the transformation
of the energy of the powder; this in its turn
depends upon the explosion of the percussion cap;
this again upon the fall of the trigger; and lastly this
upon the finger of the man who fires the rifle.
Now, without attempting to define what life is,
and leaving all speculations regarding it to our last
chapter, we yet think it may safely be said that a
living being is analogous to a machine in this particular
also.
Let us take the man who fires the rifle. We can
trace back the motion of his forefinger to the contraction
of a muscle; and we can go even further back and
connect this contraction with a stimulus sent along
the nerves from the brain, so that a material effect
is here seen to be brought about by a material antecedent,
just as truly as in an inanimate machine.
Indeed, we may generalise, and say that, so far as we
can physically investigate a living being, we may take
it for granted that a material effect is due to a strictly
material antecedent in his case also.
181. We have thus discussed two respects in which
a living being is analogous to a machine, and the next
point is to determine which of the two classes of
machines most resembles the living being. Is he
analogous to the solar system, a steam-engine, or a
clock? or is he rather analogous to some delicately
constructed machine, such, for instance, as a rifle?
There can, we think, be no doubt that a living being
most resembles a delicately constructed machine.
For what is the characteristic of such a machine?
It is that in it a comparatively great transformation
of energy may be brought about by a comparatively
small physical antecedent. Thus a slight breath of
air may determine the fall of the egg off the table, or
a slight tap the explosion of a large quantity of fulminating
silver. So in the human being, a very small
and obscure transmutation of energy in the mysterious
brain-chamber may determine some very violent
motion. ‘Life is not a bully who swaggers out into
the open universe, upsetting the laws of energy in all
directions, but rather a consummate strategist, who,
sitting in his secret chamber over his wires, directs
the movements of a great army.’[55]
182. Granting then that a living being is a delicately
constructed machine, the next point is to
determine what process of delicacy, what peculiar
arrangement of unstable forces, is employed in his
construction? Now it is very easy to perceive that
the delicacy in this case is brought about by an unstable
arrangement of chemical forces. It is plain
that the body of an animal is a chemically unstable
product, and if, as one consequence of this, great
freedom of action and delicacy are possessed during
life, it is another consequence that the extinction of
life is very speedily followed by decay.
The body then owes its delicacy to its chemically
unstable nature; to a peculiar collocation of particles
which certainly would not, in virtue of their own
merely physical forces, have united themselves together
as we find them in the body.
183. To what, then, is due this peculiar grouping
of particles in the living body?
We reply that it is, in one sense at least, derived
from the food which is eaten. If animal food is
eaten, it is of course derived from the body of the
animal which is consumed. That animal may possibly
have derived it from another animal, but more probably
it has been derived in this case direct from the
vegetable world. Ultimately, therefore, it is to this
world that we must look as the source of that delicately
constructed substance which plays such a wonderful
and important part in the animal economy. If we go
one link further back in the chain of causation, we
shall be carried from the vegetable world to the sun
as the great and ultimate physical source of that high-class
energy and delicacy of construction which
characterise vegetable products. It is, in truth,
owing to the actinic rays of our luminary that vegetable
tissue is manufactured in the leaves of plants,
the carbonic acid of the air being decomposed, and
oxygen given out, while the carbon, united with other
substances, and modified thereby, is retained by the
plant to form part of its substance, or perchance to
become the food of animals.
184. We have therefore now arrived at the conclusion
that the delicacy of construction which our
frames require is ultimately derived from the sun, so
far at least as the visible universe is concerned. If
then we would reply to the question of this chapter,
whether or not there may be beings superior to man
connected with this present universe, let us look
abroad and endeavour to ascertain whether there be
in this universe any other obvious process of delicacy
besides that which characterises the bodies of animals
like ourselves.
Now, it has been pointed out that, in the atmospheric
changes of this world, and more particularly of
the sun, we have processes of great delicacy. It is
believed that the positions of the planets Mercury
and Venus affect the behaviour of sun-spots, and thus
determine the conditions of atmospheric changes on
the surface of our luminary that are absolutely overwhelming
in their magnitude. We have only to reflect
that a large sun-spot might swallow up fifty planets
like our earth, and that some of the currents connected
with it move at the rate of 100 miles per
second, in order to realise the enormous scale of these
solar outbreaks. Again, it is believed that the state
of the solar surface with regard to spots determines
the storms of our earth, so that hurricanes are most
numerous in the Indian Ocean as well as on the
coast of America during years of maximum sun-spots.[56]
But if such results are brought about by the relative
positions of the planets of our system, it is evident
that the cause is more analogous to the pulling of the
trigger of a cannon ready to go off than to a downright
blow. In fact, a vast transformation of energy
in the sun is brought about by some obscure and ill-understood
but comparatively trivial cause connected
with the position of the nearer planets of our system.
We have here a case where the magnitude of the
effect is out of all proportion to that of the antecedent;
now this is, in other words, the definition of
delicacy already given (Art. 179).
But, again, if delicacy of construction characterise
the meteorological changes in the various members of
our system, it is entirely absent from the orbital
motions of these bodies. These want that great
characteristic of delicacy, incalculability; for they are
not only pre-eminently calculable, but are now calculated
years beforehand as part of the regular business
of the world. On the other hand, the meteorological
changes of our earth and of the sun come upon us
with all the abruptness characteristic of delicacy, and
are eminently incalculable. The hurricane and the
lightning-flash are processes of Nature which man
has in every age been prone to associate with personal
intelligences. He has instinctively recognised the
similarity between these abrupt and startling phenomena
and the actions of an angry and powerful
being.
185. It may no doubt be long since there has been
anything like an extensive worship of the powers of
nature amongst the civilised nations of the earth, but
there may yet be found, even at the present day,
especially amongst imaginative races, and in wild and
mountainous regions, a lingering belief that personal
agents are concerned in the more startling natural
phenomena.
Such a belief was extensively prevalent during the
middle ages, and whole volumes might easily be filled
with an account of mediæval superstitions and legends
relating to this subject, sometimes dark and terrible,
and at other times possessing a peculiar and pathetic
beauty which does not belong to anything else. The
air, the earth, and the water have all been peopled
with spirits; some of them friendly to man, some of
them his deadly enemies. They are powerful, and
conscious of their power, but at the same time profoundly
and mournfully aware that they are without
a soul. Their life depends, it may be, upon the continuance
of some natural object, and hence for them
there is no immortality. Sometimes, however, an
elemental spirit procures a soul by means of a loving
union with one of the human race, and the beautiful
romance of Undine is built upon this fancy.
At other times the reverse happens, and the soul
of the mortal is lost who, leaving the haunts of men,
associates with these soulless but often amiable and
affectionate beings. ‘The Forsaken Merman,’ by
Matthew Arnold, expresses this fancy in a very beautiful
and touching manner:—
‘Children dear, was it yesterday
(Call once more) that she went away?
Once she sate with you and me
On a red gold throne in the heart of the sea,
And the youngest sate on her knee.
She comb’d its bright hair, and she tended it well,
When down swung the sound of the far-off bell.
She sigh’d, she look’d up through the clear green sea;
She said, “I must go, for my kinsfolk pray
In the little grey church on the shore to-day.
’Twill be Easter time in the world—ah me!
And I lose my poor soul, Merman, here with thee.”
I said, “Go up, dear heart, through the waves;
Say thy prayers and come back to the kind sea-caves.”
She smiled, she went up through the surf in the bay.
Children dear, was it yesterday?’
186. A conception, in some respects analogous to
that now mentioned, but in other respects very different
from it, is that which attributes a soul to the universe;
and it has even been imagined that the whole
visible universe forms, as it were, one gigantic brain.
Others again appear inclined to believe that there
may be many cosmical intelligences, each embracing
the whole universe, and therefore interpenetrating
one another, and at the same time taking part in its
government by means of such processes of delicacy
as those we have mentioned.
187. Now, before proceeding further in the discussion
of these speculations, let us here state more
definitely than we have yet done what is the real
point in question.
It is not so much the possibility of the delicate
processes of nature being directed by an intelligent
agency; this is in reality a different question, and
one which will be discussed in our concluding chapter.
But the question now before us is, whether any
such agency may be said to belong to the present
visible universe?
To make our meaning clear: we know that we
ourselves belong to the present visible universe.
Again, there are many of us who believe that angelic
intelligences are the ministers of God’s providence.
Now, whether this doctrine be true or not (and we
are not now concerned about its truth), it is evident
that such intelligences cannot be said to belong to
the present physical universe. The organisation which
they possess, and without which (Art. 61) we cannot
imagine a finite intelligence to exist, is most assuredly
nothing that can be perceived by our bodily senses, nor
can we imagine that their existence is at all dependent
on the fate of the visible universe; in fine, they
do not belong to it.
Our present question, therefore, is whether we can
associate the delicate cosmical processes of the visible
universe with the operations of intelligences residing
in this universe and belonging to it, and to this question
we must assuredly give a negative reply.
188. We entertain no doubt that man and beings
at least analogous to man represent the highest order
of living things connected with the present visible
universe.
For, in the first place, although there is abundant
evidence of delicacy of construction in the cosmical
processes of this universe, there is no evidence of an
organisation such as that which observation leads us
to associate with the presence of life.
In the next place, whatever view we may entertain
of the Darwinian hypothesis and the relation of man
to the lower animals, there can be no doubt that they
are all of a similar physical construction. What
physiologists term the matter of life is very much
the same in all, so that the body of any one animal
may in general afford food for any other. Now, is it
likely that there are two living systems, absolutely
distinct and as different from one another as we
can well imagine, both connected with the visible
universe?
We think this view would imply such a want of
unity in the plan of development as to be absolutely
fatal to its reception, even as a working hypothesis.
On these accounts, therefore, we do not hesitate to
dismiss the conception of a superior order of beings
connected with the present physical universe as one
which is altogether untenable.
189. If we now turn from the verdict of science to
the sacred writings of the Jews, we find that one
grand idea which pervades the whole of the Old
Testament is man’s absolute superiority and practical
sovereignty over all created beings whom he can perceive
otherwise than with the mind’s eye.
He is supreme, or it is part of his work on earth to
become supreme, over all that can be perceived by
his senses, i.e. all the visible and tangible world.
Thus we read in Gen. i. 28: ‘And God blessed them:
and God said unto them, Be fruitful, and multiply,
and replenish the earth, and subdue it; and have
dominion over the fish of the sea, and over the fowl
of the air, and over every living thing that moveth
upon the earth.’
Again, we read (Psalm viii. 5, 6): ‘For thou hast
made him a little lower than the angels, and hast
crowned him with glory and honour. Thou madest
him to have dominion over the works of thy hands;
thou hast put all things under his feet.’ [It appears
that the correct reading of the first part of this is,
‘Thou hast made him little less than divine,’ etc.]
190. It is worthy of note that the same idea is still
more fully developed in the New Testament, where it
is confessed that, in one very important respect, this
superiority of man is seen to fail.
He has greatly enlarged his powers over nature,
and has by these means much ameliorated the condition
of his race; yet death overtakes him just as
remorselessly and as ruthlessly as if he were a savage
of no account. He may meet death fearlessly, conscious
that he has at least done something for the
good of his fellows. But what does it all amount to?
Death will ultimately overtake the race just as remorselessly
as the individual. Now it is this fearful
enemy, this terrible exception to the domination of
man, which Christ, as the Son and type of man, is
commissioned to destroy. Thus we read (1 Cor. xv.
25): ‘For he must reign, till he hath put all enemies
under his feet. The last enemy that shall be destroyed
is death. For he hath put all things under his feet.’
And presently (verse 54) the apostle breaks forth into
the following triumphant and beautiful language:—‘So
when this corruptible shall have put on incorruption,
and this mortal shall have put on immortality,
then shall be brought to pass the saying that is
written, Death is swallowed up in victory.’ Again we
read (Heb. ii. 8): ‘For in that he put all in subjection
under him, he left nothing that is not put under him.
But now we see not yet all things put under him:
but we see Jesus, who was made a little lower than
the angels for the suffering of death, crowned with
glory and honour; that he by the grace of God
should taste death for every man. For it became
him, for whom are all things, and by whom are all
things, in bringing many sons unto glory, to make
the Captain of their salvation perfect through sufferings.’
[Here again it appears that instead of the
phrase ‘made a little lower than the angels,’ we
should read, ‘made for a little time lower than the
angels’—i.e. an idea identical in meaning with the
phrase ‘made under the law,’ the Old Testament law
being viewed as administered by angels. From this
dispensation, in which cosmical powers come between
man and God, Christ frees us, by himself for a little
time entering into it, and even under it meeting
death.]
191. From all this we may conclude that both
science and religion tell us the same tale. They
inform us that man, and beings similar to man, are
at the head of the visible universe. No doubt religion
informs us, in addition to this, that there are other
beings above man, but these do not live in the visible
universe, but in that which is unseen and eternal.
CHAPTER VII. THE UNSEEN UNIVERSE. — FOOTNOTES:
‘For I reckon, that the sufferings of this present time are not worthy
to be compared with the glory which shall be revealed in us. For the
earnest expectation of the creature waiteth for the manifestation of the
sons of God.’—St. Paul (Rom. viii. 18, 19).
‘Rabbi Jacob said, “This world is as it were the anteroom of the
world to come. Prepare thyself in the anteroom so that thou mayest
be fit to enter the banquet-room.”’—Mishna, Pirke Aboth, chap. iv.
par. 16.
‘Eternal process moving on
From state to state the spirit walks,
And these are but the shatter’d stalks,
Or ruin’d chrysalis of one.’—Tennyson.
192. In the preceding chapters we have examined
by the light of our present knowledge the possibilities
contained in the visible universe. What is it good for
in the way of possible immortality? is the question we
have tried to answer. It will have been seen that the
reply is eminently unfavourable. If we take the
individual man to begin with, we find that he lives
his short tale of years, and that then the visible
machinery which connects him with the past, as well
as that which enables him to act in the present, falls
into ruin and is brought to an end. If any germ or
potentiality remains, it is certainly not connected
with the visible order of things.
If we next consider the human race we find that
the state of advancement to which they have attained
is in many respects greatly due to their physical surroundings.
Coal and iron have been as instrumental
in promoting knowledge as Galileo and Newton, but
our whole stock of these materials will come to an
end. By economy it may be possible to lengthen
out the period during which they can be supplied, but
is it not manifest that we are year by year exhausting
them as sources of available energy?
Are we not inevitably led to conclude that our
present state cannot last even for a lengthened period,
but will be brought to an end long before the inevitable
dissipation of energy shall have rendered our
earth unfit for habitation?
193. But even supposing that man, in some form, is
permitted to remain on the earth for a long series of
years, we merely lengthen out the period, but we cannot
escape the final catastrophe. The earth will
gradually lose its energy of rotation, as well as that
of revolution round the sun. The sun himself will
wax dim and become useless as a source of energy,
until at last the favourable conditions of the present
solar system will have quite disappeared.
But what happens to our system will happen likewise
to the whole visible universe (Art. 116), which
will, if finite, become in time a lifeless mass, if indeed
it be not doomed to utter dissolution. In fine, it will
become old and effete, no less truly than the individual—it
is a glorious garment this visible universe,
but not an immortal one—we must look elsewhere if
we are to be clothed with immortality as with a
garment.
194. Now, if we regard the dissipation of energy
which is constantly going on, we are at first sight
forcibly struck with the apparently wasteful character
of the arrangements of the visible universe. All but
a very small portion of the sun’s heat goes day by
day into what we call empty space, and it is only this
very small remainder which can be made use of by
the various planets for purposes of their own. Could
anything be more perplexing than this seemingly
prodigal expenditure of the very life and essence of
our system? That all but a petty fraction of this
vast store of high-class energy should be doing
nothing but travelling outwards in space at the rate
of 188,000 miles per second is hardly conceivable,
especially when the result of it is the inevitable
destruction of the visible universe, unless we imagine
this to be infinite, and so capable of endless degradation.
195. If, however, we continue to dwell upon this
astounding phenomenon, we begin to perceive that
we are not entitled to assert that this luminous
energy does nothing but continue to travel outwards.
It is perhaps too much to say that Struve’s speculations
prove an ethereal absorption, but they must be
taken in connection with other considerations. We
have already maintained (Art. 151), that we cannot
regard the ether as a perfect fluid. Now it is not easy
to suppose that in such a substance all vibratory
motion should pass outwards without in the smallest
degree becoming absorbed or changing its type.
We are prepared doubtless to expect a great difference
between the ether and visible matter in this
respect, but can hardly imagine that it is absolutely
free from the capacity of altering the type of the
energy which passes through it. Such a hypothesis
appears to us to violate the principle of continuity.
196. But we may go even further than luminiferous
vibrations which take their rise chiefly at the surfaces
of bodies, and extend our speculations into the interior
of substances, since the law of gravitation assures us
that any displacement which takes place in the very
heart of the earth will be felt throughout the universe,
and we may even imagine that the same thing will
hold true of those molecular motions (Art. 56) which
accompany thought. For every thought we think is
accompanied by a displacement and motion of the
particles of the brain, and we may imagine that somehow
these motions are propagated throughout the
universe. Views of this nature were long ago entertained
by Babbage, and they have since commended
themselves to several men of science, and amongst
others to Jevons. ‘Mr. Babbage,’ says this author,[57]
‘has pointed out[58] that if we had power to follow and
detect the minutest effects of any disturbance, each
particle of existing matter must be a register of all
that has happened.’
197. But again, we are compelled to imagine (Art.
215) that what we see has originated in the unseen,
and in using this term, we desire to go back even
further than the ether, which, according to one hypothesis
(Art. 152), has given rise to the visible order
of things. And again, we must resort to the unseen
not only for the origin of the molecules of the visible
universe, but also for an explanation of the forces
which animate these molecules (Art. 150), and not
only so, but we are always carried back from one
order of the unseen to another (Art. 220). Now if
this be the case—if the Universe be constructed
with successive orders of this description connected
with one another—it is manifest that no event whatever,
whether we regard its antecedent or its consequent,
can possibly be confined to one order only,
but must spread throughout the entire Universe.
198. To conclude: we are thus led to believe that
there exists now an invisible order of things intimately
connected with the present, and capable of acting
energetically upon it—for, in truth, the energy of the
present system is to be looked upon as originally
derived from the invisible universe, while the forces
which give rise to transmutations of energy probably
take their origin in the same region.
And it appears to us to be more natural to imagine
that a universe of this nature, which we have reason
to think exists, and is connected by bonds of energy
with the visible universe, is also capable of receiving
energy from it, and of transforming the energy so
received. In fine, it appears to us less likely that by
far the larger portion of the high-class energy of the
present universe is travelling outwards into space with
an immense velocity, than that it is being gradually
transferred into an invisible order of things. This
last conclusion is, however, more of the nature of a
speculation, and is by no means essential to our
argument.
199. If we now turn to thought, we find, (Art. 59)
that, inasmuch as it affects the substance of the
present visible universe, it produces a material organ
of memory. But the motions which accompany
thought must originate in and also affect the invisible
order of things, because in the first place the forces
which cause those motions are derived from the unseen,
and because, secondly, the motions themselves
must act upon the unseen, and thus it follows, that
‘Thought conceived to affect the matter of another
universe simultaneously with this may explain a future
state’ (see Anagram, Nature, October 15, 1874).
200. This idea, however, requires further development
and explanation. Let us therefore begin by
supposing that we possess a frame, or the rudiments
of a frame, connecting us with the invisible universe,
which we may call the soul.
Now each thought we think is accompanied by
certain molecular motions and displacements in the
brain, and parts of these, let us allow, are in some
way stored up in that organ, so as to produce what
may be termed our material or physical memory.
Other parts of these motions are, however, communicated
to the invisible body, and are there stored up,
forming a memory which may be made use of when
that body is free to exercise its functions.
201. Again, one of the arguments (Art. 84) which
proves the existence of the invisible universe, demands
that it shall be full of energy when the present universe
is defunct. We can therefore very well imagine
that after death, when the soul is free to exercise its
functions, it may be replete with energy, and have
eminently the power of action in the present, retaining
also, as we have shown above, a hold upon the past,
inasmuch as the memory of past events has been stored
up in it, and thus preserving the two essential requisites
(Art. 61) of a continuous intelligent existence.
202. The conception of an unseen universe is not a
new one, even among men of science. The deservedly
famous Dr. Thomas Young has the following passage
in his lectures on Natural Philosophy:—‘Besides
this porosity, there is still room for the supposition,
that even the ultimate particles of matter may be
permeable to the causes of attractions of various
kinds, especially if those causes are immaterial: nor
is there anything in the unprejudiced study of physical
philosophy that can induce us to doubt the
existence of immaterial substances; on the contrary,
we see analogies that lead us almost directly to such
an opinion. The electrical fluid is supposed to be
essentially different from common matter; the general
medium of light and heat, according to some, or the
principle of caloric, according to others, is equally
distinct from it. We see forms of matter, differing in
subtility and mobility, under the names of solids,
liquids, and gases; above these are the semi-material
existences, which produce the phenomena of electricity
and magnetism, and either caloric or a universal
ether. Higher still, perhaps, are the causes of gravitation,
and the immediate agents in attractions of all
kinds, which exhibit some phenomena apparently
still more remote from all that is compatible with
material bodies. And of these different orders of
beings, the more refined and immaterial appear to pervade
freely the grosser. It seems therefore natural
to believe that the analogy may be continued still
further, until it rises into existences absolutely immaterial
and spiritual. We know not but that thousands
of spiritual worlds may exist unseen for ever by
human eyes; nor have we any reason to suppose that
even the presence of matter, in a given spot, necessarily
excludes these existences from it. Those who
maintain that nature always teems with life, wherever
living beings can be placed, may therefore speculate
with freedom on the possibility of independent worlds;
some existing in different parts of space, others pervading
each other unseen and unknown, in the same
space, and others again to which space may not be a
necessary mode of existence.’
203. It may now be desirable to reply by anticipation
to certain objections which are likely to be
made to the theory we have proposed. Let us divide
these into three categories—religious, theological, and
scientific.
Objection First (Religious).—It may be said to us,
‘Who are you who are wise beyond what is written?
Are ye of them to whom it was said of old, “Eritis
sicut Deus scientes bonum et malum”? Beware of
the words of the great Apostle of the Gentiles:—Φάσκοντες
εἶναι σοφοὶ ἐμωράνθησαν.’
Reply.—As we have already said (Art. 50), we do
not write for those who are so assured of the truth of
their religion that they are unable to entertain the
smallest objection to it. We write for honest inquirers—for
honest doubters, it may be;—who desire
to know what science, when allowed perfect liberty
of thought, and loyally followed, has to say upon
those points which so much concern us all. We are
content in this work to view the universe from the
physical standpoint; you may therefore perchance
esteem us of the earth earthy; nevertheless we think
that our strength lies in keeping up a communication
with those verities which we all acknowledge.
204. Objection Second (Theological).—Your idea of
the spiritual universe is analogous to that of Swedenborg,
and we must therefore dismiss it as untrue, inasmuch
as we cannot recognise the assumption of the
spiritual body until after the resurrection.
Reply.—All that we have done is to remove the
scientific objection to a future state, supposed to be
furnished by the principle of Continuity. We know
nothing about the laws of this state, and conceive it
to be quite possible, if otherwise likely, that the soul
may remain veiled or in abeyance until the resurrection.
We maintain only that we are logically constrained
to admit the existence of some frame or
organ which is not of this earth, and which survives
dissolution—if we regard the principle of Continuity
and the doctrine of a future state as both true.
Besides, the analogy of Paul, in which the body of the
believer at death is compared to a seed put into the
ground, not only implies some sort of continuity, but
also expresses his belief in a present spiritual body.
There is, says the apostle (observe, not there shall be),
a spiritual body. Again the same apostle tells us
(2 Corinthians v. 1), ‘That if our earthly house of this
tabernacle were dissolved, we have a building of
God, a house not made with hands, eternal in the
heavens.’
205. Objection Third (Theological).—Your argument
will apply to the brute creation as well as to man;
now we cannot recognise the immortality of the
brutes.
Reply.—As before stated, we know nothing about
the laws of the invisible universe, except that it is
related by bonds of some kind, possibly of energy, to
the present. All we have attempted has been to
remove an objection to the doctrine of immortality
which has been wrongly put forth as scientific, or at
least as consistent with scientific knowledge.
206. Objection Fourth (Theological).—The reasoning
you adopt being founded on the law of continuity,
seems to imply the development of man’s frame from
those of the inferior animals, and therefore by implication
contradicts the scriptural account of the creation
and fall of man.
Reply.—We cannot perceive that our reasoning is
in the least degree inconsistent with the account of
man’s origin given in Scripture. This account implies
no doubt a peculiar operation of the invisible universe,
but our reasoning compels us to look in this direction
for the origin of certain occurrences. Whether the
production of man has been the occasion for a peculiar
interposition of the unseen it is not within our province
to discuss. We can only say that we see no reason
from our principles to question the view which asserts
that man was made by a peculiar operation out of a
pre-existent universe.
207. Objection Fifth (Theological).—The resurrection
consistent with your theory could not be a resurrection
of the same particles as were laid in the grave,
and in this respect it would be dissimilar to that of
Christ.
Reply.—A dissimilarity between the two exists
under any theory, for the body of Christ did not experience
corruption, while the bodies of believers in
Christ are manifestly dissolved by death.
[We make the following suggestion with much
hesitation.
What we have to say is founded upon an exceedingly
able work by Edward White, entitled Life in
Christ, which has recently been published, and from
which we extract the following passage (page 263):—
‘But the Saviour was Divine. As man, identified with human
nature, He died, and His death became a sin-offering; as God
He could not die. As man He was made “under the law;” as
God He was above the law laid on creatures.... He arose,
therefore, as the Divine Conqueror of death, “God over all,
blessed for evermore,” and was thus “declared to be the Son of
God with power, according to the Spirit of holiness, by His
resurrection from the dead.”—Rom. i. 4. He rose, not “in the
likeness of sinful flesh;” not “under the law,” but
in the character of the “Lord from heaven,” “our Lord and our God:”—not
in the image of the “son of Adam,” but as the “Son of the
Highest,” having delivered us from wrath by the death of His
humanity, to endow us with immortality through the life of His
Divinity. He was no longer “the man of sorrows,” but The
First and The Last and The Living One; no longer crowned
with thorns, and clothed in a peasant’s robe, but wearing the
diadem of the Lord of the Universe, and shining with the supereminent
splendours of the Godhead.’
If then Christ died as man, and was reanimated in
virtue of His divinity, the analogy between Christ,
who is the head, and believers, who are His body, will
be complete if we suppose that each believer dies as
a man, but is raised up by virtue of the divinity of
Christ, and inasmuch as the Head is not present here
in His glorified bodily form, so it cannot be supposed
that His members should at present assume that
form.
But when Christ appears again upon earth we are
told that His members being raised in what is termed
the first resurrection will then accompany Him.
And judging from S. Matthew (chap. xxvii. verse
52), something of this kind, but of a partial nature,
took place when Christ locally appeared, after His
resurrection, in Jerusalem.
In fine, the true analogy between Christ and the
believer should prevent us from supposing that while
Christ is absent in His glorified body believers should
nevertheless assume theirs.
Now this delay implies the corruption of the believer’s
body, and renders us unable to believe that
the very same particles will be raised again as in the
case of Christ. But surely no one can suppose, that
if moral and spiritual identity is secured, the mere
material particles can be of any consequence.]
208. Objection Sixth (Scientific).—If the general
principles on which all material organisms are constructed
are the same throughout the world, is not
this an argument by analogy that all such organisms
have a similar relation to the universe? On what
principle then can immortality be assumed to be
possible for men while it is denied to brutes?
Reply.—When we speak of the general principles
on which all organisms are constructed being the
same, we mean that certain chemical and physical
laws apply both to man and the brute creation.
Gravitation and chemical affinity are the same for
both. There must also be a similarity in tangible
substance, inasmuch as both co-exist in the same
visible world. In fine, there must be many points in
which man is very similar in construction to the lower
animals. Thus each possesses nerves—each has what
may be termed delicacy of construction—the frame of
each possesses materials which will burn in the fire.
In fine, not only do strong similarities exist between
all animals, but there are also strong similarities between
animals and vegetables. But what are the points
of dissimilarity between man and the lower animals?
Is it not that the latter are utterly incapable of thinking
thoughts such as those which form the present
subject of discussion? In fine, the greatest difference
between man and the lower animals is not so much
in bodily structure as in style of thought. But each
thought has no doubt (Art. 59) a concomitant in the
brain. Inasmuch therefore as the style of thought is
very different in man and in the lower animals, the
physical concomitants of thought must be very different
in the two cases. But this is the very region
into which science has been as yet utterly unable to
penetrate. We have, however, strong reason for supposing
that in such a region the concomitants of
thought would prove to be very different in man and
in the brutes. Thus the argument tells quite the
other way; and we are entitled to say, that inasmuch
as there are enormous practical differences in thought
and the higher kinds of power between man and the
lower animals, so the scientifically perceivable concomitants
of these differences would (if we were able
to examine them) be found extremely different in the
two cases.
209. Objection Seventh (Scientific).—If there be, as
you say, this duality in the present human frame,
how can the spiritual part remain latent so long as it
does? Even if trammelled by the grosser substance,
we might expect that at least on rare occasions it
should somehow manifest itself.
Reply.—As a matter of fact we know that ordinary
consciousness can remain latent or inactive for hours,
if not for days, and then return to us again. There
would be force in this objection if it were not true
that consciousness is capable of entering into the
dormant or quiescent state.
Again, it is possible that there have been and that
there are occasional manifestations of this spiritual
nature.
For, in the Christian records visible manifestations
of the spiritual element, even in this life, are asserted
to have taken place on rare occasions. But if you
have dismissed these manifestations as inconceivable,
you cannot now bring their absence forward as
an objection.
210. Objection Eighth, (Scientific).—Your doctrine
of immortality does violence to that great principle,
the conservation of energy. For it is manifest that if
energy is transferred from the visible into the invisible
universe, its constancy in the present universe can no
longer be maintained.
Reply.—In reply to this objection we may state
that when we assert the conservation of energy it
is as a principle applicable under special limitations.
For instance, it is only by assuming the continual
passage through ether of a large portion of
the energy of the visible universe that the doctrine
as at present held can be maintained. Now the
only addition that our theory suggests is the gradual
carriage into the invisible universe of some part
at least of the energy of gross matter which is associated
with thought. But is even this necessary?
for this supposes thought to originate through the
matter of the visible universe, and then to affect the
invisible.
But the reverse order of occurrences is quite as
tenable, especially if we suppose with Le Sage that
the forces which set in motion the molecules of visible
matter are derived from the unseen universe. It may
safely be said that our hypothesis is not upset, and
never can be upset, by any experimental conclusion
with regard to energy.
211. Objection Ninth (Scientific).—We cannot
understand how individuality is to be preserved in
the spiritual world.
Reply.—This is no new difficulty. We are as much
puzzled by what takes place in our present body as
we can be with respect to the spiritual. Thus, let us
allow that impressions are stored up in our brains,
which thus form an order connecting us with the
past of the visible universe. Now thousands, perhaps
even millions, of such impressions pass into the same
organ, and yet, by the operation of our will, we can
concentrate our recollection upon a certain event, and
rummage out its details, along with all its collateral
circumstances, to the exclusion of everything else.
But if the brain or something else plays such a
wonderful part in the present economy, is it impossible
to imagine that the universe of the future
may have even greater individualising powers? Is
it not very hazardous to assert this or that mode
of existence to be impossible in such a wonderful
whole as we feel sure the universe must be?
212. Objection Tenth (Scientific).—Even if it be
allowed that the invisible universe receives energy
from the present, so that the conservation of energy
holds true as a principle, yet the dissipation of energy
must hold true also, and although the process of
decay may be delayed by the storing up of energy
in the invisible universe, it cannot be permanently
arrested. Ultimately we must believe that every
part of the whole universe will be equally supplied
with energy, and in consequence all abrupt living
motion will come to an end.
Reply.—Perhaps the best reply to this objection is
to say that the laws of energy are rather generalisations
derived from our experience than scientific
principles, like that which we call the Principle of
Continuity. There would be no permanent confusion
of thought introduced if these laws should be
found not to hold, or to hold in a different way, in
the unseen universe. Nor can we regard the law of
the Dissipation as equally fundamental with that of
the Conservation of Energy. What is to prove it in
the unseen? We have shown (Art. 112) how Clerk-Maxwell’s
demons (though essentially finite intelligences)
could be made to restore energy even in the
present universe without spending work. Much more
may of course be expected in a universe free from
gross matter.
213. Objection Eleventh (Quasi-Scientific.)—You speak
of energy being transferred to the unseen, so as to store
up for each individual a record of his every thought.
You have not shown, as you were bound to do, how
such transferred energy could be definitely localised
in the unseen.
Reply.—The obligation is entirely the other way. It
is you who are bound to show that such localisation
is impossible. You quasi-scientific men assert that
science disproves all such things. We have shown
that Continuity demands an infinite series of developments.
These may be either living or dead. But
scientific analogy shows that they bear all the marks
of intelligent developments. How can there be any
doubt or difficulty about our choice under these
circumstances? Obviously we cannot accept dead
and yet intelligent developments. And although our
evidence from analogy may not amount to proof, it
is very strong. Yet you objectors virtually assert
that you can show its impossibility. Do so, if you
can. Give us any proof of the impossibility of an
organ connecting us with the unseen universe, or any
analogy even apparently against it, and we shall be
glad to receive and consider it. We have no doubt
that you will thus help us to strengthen our case.
You forget that it is you who are the dogmatists—you
who assert that these things are incompatible
with scientific knowledge, but who, strangely, do not
bring forward any proofs of the truth of your assertions.
But in the present case, it so happens that, even
with ordinary matter, an infinitely extended medium
could be constructed (as Clerk-Maxwell has shown),
such that all rays diverging from any point of it
whatever shall be brought accurately to a focus at
another definite point; every point of space having
thus its definite conjugate.
214. Having replied to these objections, let us
now endeavour to realise our present position. It is
briefly as follows:—What we have done is to show
that a future state is possible, and to demolish any
so-called scientific objection that might be raised
against it. The evidence in favour of the doctrine is
not derived from us. It comes to us from two
sources: in the first place, from the statements made
concerning Christ; and, in the second place, from
that intense longing for immortality which civilised
man has invariably possessed. The case stands thus:
certain evidence from these two sources in favour of
our doctrine has been adduced, but scientific objections
have been raised against the possibility of the
doctrine itself, and these we have attempted to overcome.
But while we may suppose the scientific objections
to the doctrine itself surmounted, there yet
remains an equally strong scientific objection to that
portion of the evidence in favour of the doctrine
which is derived from the Christian records. ‘Granting,’
it may be said to us, ‘that immortality is possible,
what reason have we, beyond certain vague
yearnings, for believing it likely? No doubt, if
Christ rose from the dead, the probability in favour
of it would be very strong; but we have an objection
to the assumed fact of the resurrection of Christ no
less formidable than that which you have overcome
with regard to the doctrine of immortality itself.’
215. We must now proceed to examine the validity
of this objection, and in so doing we find it convenient
to approach the problem of the universe not from the
side of the future but from that of the past.
We have already (Art. 85) defined the principle of
Continuity, in virtue of which we believe ourselves
entitled to discuss every event which occurs in the
universe, without one single exception, and to deduce
from it, if we can, the condition of things that preceded
the event—this being also in the universe. We
have likewise given reasons for believing that the
visible universe must have had a beginning in time,
and it may be desirable to recapitulate these here.
In the first place, it is generally allowed by men of
science that atoms form the stuff or substance out of
which the visible universe is built. Why, then, it is
asked by the materialists, cannot we suppose these
atoms to be infinite in number, in which case, as far
as energy is concerned, we may very well suppose
this universe to last from eternity to eternity; and if
in addition we may conceive these eternally existing
atoms to be in some sense alive, have we not here a
hypothesis which will explain the continuous life of
the universe as well as
its continuous energy?
Let us in the meantime reply to the first statement
in the hypothesis, reserving that part of it which concerns
life for a future occasion (Art. 240).
Our objection to regarding the visible universe as
having endured from eternity is threefold. In the
first place, this hypothesis, to be tenable, assumes the
infinity of the visible universe. This, however, is a
pure assumption. We may not be able to prove the
contrary, but we perceive no reason why the visible
universe should be regarded as infinite. No doubt,
if scientific principle imperatively demanded the
eternity of the present visible universe, we should be
compelled to acknowledge its infinity as a consequence;
but we shall see presently that scientific
principle leads quite in the opposite direction. So
that the weakness of the hypothesis in question is,
that while it is contrary to scientific principle it likewise
assumes the infinity of the visible universe, which
is a pure assumption.
Our second objection is that, in virtue of the principle
of Continuity, we are compelled to believe in
the infinite depth of nature, and hold that, just as we
must imagine space and duration to be infinite, so
must we imagine the structural complexity of the
universe to be infinite also. To our minds it appears
no less false to pronounce eternal that aggregation we
call the atom, than it would be to pronounce eternal
(Art. 85) that aggregation we call the sun. All this
follows from the principle of Continuity, in virtue of
which we make scientific progress in the knowledge
of things, and which leads us, whatever state of
things we contemplate, to look for its antecedent in
some previous state of things also in the Universe.
Our third objection is that which we have stated in
Art. 163. It arises from the belief that the dissipation
of the energy of the visible universe proceeds
pari passu with the aggregation of mass, and therefore
that since the large masses of the visible universe
are of finite size, we are sure that the process cannot
have been going on for ever, or, in other words, the
visible universe must have had its origin in time.
216. Let us therefore apply to that stupendous
event, the production of the visible universe, not
irreverently, but in hopeful trust, the principle of
Continuity, and ask ourselves the question, What
state of things also in the universe, what conceivable
antecedent can have given rise to this unparalleled
phenomenon—an antecedent, we need hardly say,
which must have operated from the invisible universe?
It is a great and awful phenomenon, but we
must not shrink before size; we must not be terrified
by the magnitude of the event out of reliance upon
our principles of discussion.
Now, if we regard the appearance of the visible
universe, and approach it as we would any other
phenomenon, we have only two alternatives before
us. Creation is not one of these, inasmuch as we are
carried by such an act out of the universe altogether.
We are, therefore, driven to look to some kind of
development as the cause of the appearance of the
visible universe. This development may either have
been through the living or through the dead; either
it was the result of a natural operation of the invisible
universe, or it was brought about by means
of intelligence residing in that universe and working
through its laws. To determine which of these two
alternatives is the more admissible, we must bear in
mind the nature of the production, and argue about
it just as we should argue about anything else.
217. Now, this production was, as far as we can
judge, a sporadic or abrupt act, and the substance
produced, that is to say the atoms which form the
material substratum of the present universe, bear (as
Herschel and Clerk-Maxwell have well said) from
their uniformity of constitution all the marks of being
manufactured articles.
Whether we regard the various elementary atoms
as separate productions, or (according to Prout and
Lockyer) view them as produced by the coming together
of some smaller kind of primordial atom—in
either case, and even specially so in the latter case,
we think that they look like manufactured articles.
Indeed, we have already shown (Art. 164) that development
without life, that is to say dead development,
does not tend to produce uniformity of structure
in the products which it gives rise to.
218. Thus the argument is in favour of the production
of the visible universe by means of an intelligent
agency residing in the invisible universe.
But again let us realise the position in which we
are placed by the principle of Continuity—we are led
by it not only to regard the invisible universe as
having existed before the present one, but the same
principle drives us to acknowledge its existence in
some form as a universe from all eternity. Now we
can readily conceive a universe containing conditioned
intelligent beings to have existed before the
present; nay, to have existed for a time greater
than any assignable time, which is the only way in
which our thoughts can approach the eternal. But
is it equally easy to conceive a dead universe to have
existed in the same way during immeasurable ages?
Is a dead universe a fully conditioned universe?
For, regarding the laws of the universe as those laws
according to which the intelligences of the universe
are conditioned by the Governor thereof, can we conceive
a dead universe to exist permanently without
some being to be conditioned? Is not this something
without meaning, an unreality—a make-believe?
And if it be said that under these circumstances the
conception in any form of immeasurable ages of time
is unreal, we may reply by granting it, and asserting
that in such a case we are driven not merely from the
fully conditioned to the partially conditioned, but
even to the unconditioned; in other words, the hypothesis
of a permanently dead universe would hardly
appear to satisfy the principle of Continuity, which
prefers to proceed from one form of the fully conditioned
to another. Nor is the difficulty removed by
the hypothesis that the matter of the unseen universe
was always in some simple sense alive, and that
the motions of its various elements were always
accompanied with a very simple species of consciousness,
much more simple and rudimentary than any
life that we know of here. For to this it may be replied,
how is it possible to conceive that life has
remained in this rudimentary form through a past
eternity, and only developed into intelligence since
the production of the visible universe?
219. For the benefit of our readers we shall now
endeavour to review as clearly as we can the point
at which we have arrived, and the steps which have
brought us to it.
It will be remembered that in our definition (Art.
54) we agreed to look upon the Creator—the Absolute
One, as conditioning the universe, confining the
term universe to that which is conditioned. Thus we
conceive a stone to be in the universe, we conceive a
man to be in the universe, and to work in it, but we
conceive Absolute Deity to be above the universe
rather than to work in it in any way analogous to
that in which a man works in it. Would there not
be a confusion of thought if we regarded the same
Person as conditioning and yet conditioned? Now,
what the principle of Continuity demands is an endless
development of the conditioned. We claim it as
the heritage of intelligence that there shall be an
endless vista, reaching from eternity to eternity, in
each link of which we shall be led only from one
form of the conditioned to another, never from the
conditioned to the unconditioned or absolute, which
would be to us no better than an impenetrable intellectual
barrier. It has also been seen that in this
endless chain of conditioned existence we cannot be
satisfied with a make-believe universe, or one consisting
only of dead matter, but prefer a living intelligent
universe, in other words, one fully conditioned.
Finally, our argument has led us to regard the production
of the visible universe as brought about by
an intelligent agency residing in the unseen.
220. We have arrived at this result from general
principles, and without any definite theory as to the
modus operandi of the intelligent developing agency
which resides in the unseen universe. When we keep
to well-ascertained principles we are on solid ground,
but when we speculate on the method by which the
development is accomplished we enter a very different
region, where the chances are greatly against our
particular hypothesis representing the truth. Nevertheless,
for the sake of bringing our ideas in a concrete
form before the reader, and for this purpose only, we
will now adopt a definite hypothesis.[59] Let us begin
by supposing an intelligent agent in the present
visible universe,—that is to say a man—to be developing
vortex-rings—smoke-rings, let us imagine.
Now, these smoke-rings are found to act upon one
another, just as if they were things or existences;
nevertheless their existence is ephemeral, they last
only a few seconds. But let us imagine them to constitute
the grossest possible form of material existence.
Now, each smoke-ring has in it a multitude
of smaller particles of air and smoke, each of these
particles being the molecules of which the present
visible universe is composed. These molecules are
of a vastly more refined and delicate organisation
than the large smoke-ring; they have lasted many
millions of years, and will perhaps last many millions
more. Nevertheless, let us imagine that they had a
beginning, and that they will also come to an end
similar to that of the smoke-ring. In fact, just as
the smoke-ring was developed out of ordinary molecules,
so let us imagine ordinary molecules to be
developed as vortex-rings out of something much
finer and more subtle than themselves, which we
have agreed to call the invisible universe. But we
may pursue the same train of thought still further
back, and imagine the entities which constitute the
invisible universe immediately preceding ours to be
in themselves ephemeral, although not nearly to the
same extent as the atoms of our universe, and to have
been formed in their turn as vortex-rings out of some
still subtler and more enduring substance. In fine,
there is no end to such a process, but we are led on
from rank to rank of the order imagined by Dr.
Thomas Young, or by Professor Jevons, when he
says that ‘the smallest particle of solid substance
may consist of a vast number of systems united in
regular order, each bounded by the other, communicating
with it in some manner yet wholly incomprehensible.’
Our meaning will be made clear by the
following diagram.
Here (0) denotes the evanescent smoke-ring, (1)
the visible universe, (2) the invisible universe immediately
anterior to the present, (3) that of the next
order, and so on.
Again, (0) is developed out of (1); (1) is developed
out of (2); (2) out of (3); (3) out of (4), and so on.
Further, (1) both precedes and follows (0) in point of
duration, while (2) bears a similar relation to (1), (3)
to (2), and so on.
Again, the material substance of (0) is a phenomenon
of that of (1), that of (1) a phenomenon of
that of (2), and so on. Go back as far as we choose,
we are only led from one phenomenon to another;
so that, as far as their essential nature is concerned,
all are equally phenomenal, and the mind cannot
repose in any order as its ultimate haven of thought,
but is driven inexorably forward to look for something
different.
We see too, that, as far as energy is concerned,
that of (1) is greater than that of (0), inasmuch as (1)
develops (0), that of (2) greater than that of (1), inasmuch
as (2) develops (1), and so on. Therefore, if
we go infinitely far back, we shall be led to a
universe possessing infinite energy, and of which
the intelligent developing agency possesses infinite
energy.
It will also be seen that, inasmuch as all these
various orders exist together at the present moment,
the energy of their sum must be infinite, and this
energy will never come to an end. In other words,
the Great Whole is infinite in energy, and will last
from eternity to eternity.
[If merely to prevent, in future, the possibility of
a mistake which has already been made by some of
our critics, including even Professor Clifford, it may
be well to sketch here very briefly another and quite
different concrete illustration of our idea.
Just as points are the terminations of lines, lines
the boundaries of surfaces, and surfaces the boundaries
of portions of space of three dimensions:—so we may
suppose our (essentially three-dimensional) matter to
be the mere skin or boundary of an Unseen whose
matter has four dimensions. And, just as there is a
peculiar molecular difference between the surface-film
and the rest of a mass of liquid—wherever such
a surface-film exists, even in the smallest air-bubble—so
the matter of our present universe may be regarded
as produced by mere rents or cracks in that
of the Unseen. But this may itself consist of four-dimension
boundaries of the five-dimensional matter
of a higher Unseen, and so on. We might even try
to explain by this how it is that so very little of the
nature of definite description of the Unseen is given,
even by a learned man like Paul—for the notion of
four dimensions would have been totally unintelligible
to any one eighteen hundred years ago. And just as
he says he heard in the third heaven ‘unspeakable
words which it is not possible for a man to utter,’ so
he may have seen things which language was incompetent
to describe. But on this hypothesis, as on the
former, reflection leads us to the ultimate conception
of an infinite series of Universes, each depending on
another, and possessing of course among them an
infinite store of energy.]
Before concluding this article we would desire to
reply to two objections which have been made to our
book. It has been alleged by some that we advocate
the doctrine of the past eternity of stuff or material.
We therefore take this opportunity of stating that the
Principle of Continuity as upheld by us has reference
solely to the intellectual faculties. We are led, for
instance, by this principle to assert that the process
of production of the visible universe must have been
of such a nature as to be comprehensible more or less
to the higher intelligences of the universe.
But we are not led to assert the eternity of stuff or
matter, for that would denote an unauthorised application
to the invisible universe of the experimental
law of the conservation of matter, which belongs
entirely to the present system of things. Again, it
has been objected that we advocate an ethereal future
state. To this we reply that our principles do not
lead us to assert that the ether must play some important
part in our future bodies, for our knowledge
of things is vastly too limited to enable us to come
to any such conclusion.
221. Let us here pause for a moment and consider
the position into which science has brought us. We
are led by scientific logic to an unseen, and by scientific
analogy to the spirituality of this unseen. In
fine, our conclusion is, that the visible universe has
been developed by an intelligence resident in the
Unseen.
Of the nature of this intelligent agency we are profoundly
ignorant as far as Science is concerned. So
far as Science can inform us, it may consist of a multitude
of beings, as the Gnostics have supposed, or of
one Supreme Intelligence, as is generally believed by
the followers of Christ. As scientific men we are
absolutely ignorant of the subject. Nor can we easily
conceive information to be attainable except by
means of some trustworthy communication between
the beings resident in the Unseen and ourselves. It
is absolutely and utterly hopeless to expect any light
on this point from mere scientific reasoning. Can
scientific reasoning tell us what kind of life we shall
find in the interior of Africa, or in New Guinea, or
at the North Pole, before explorers have been there,
and if this be so, is it not utterly absurd to imagine
that we can know anything regarding the spiritual
inhabitants of the unseen, unless we either go to them
or they come to us?
It is therefore of supreme importance for us to
know whether there has been any such communication.
It would be affectation in us not to say that if
there be any such trustworthy communication, we
believe it will be found in the Christian records.
It has been said to us by our critics, ‘What have
you to do with these records?’ To this we reply,
Not perhaps so much as a professed theologian, but
still something.
There is a well-known record, which claims to give
us the history of a communication with the spiritual
intelligences of the unseen. If true, it must of course
teach us many things which science is utterly incompetent
to reveal. Nevertheless it is the object of this
book to prove that science alone gives us by logic
and analogy combined a certain insight into this most
interesting and mysterious region. Working our way
upwards, we have reached by the principle of Continuity
certain regions. Working their way downwards,
the Christian records have reached these same
regions of thought. Now if our scientific logic be
correct, and if the Christian records be trustworthy,
we should expect the two accounts of this common
region to be consistent with one another.
Let us here therefore inquire what the Christian
records say regarding this mysterious, infinitely energetic,
intelligent developing agency residing in the
universe, and therefore in some sense conditioned, to
which we have been led by scientific analogy.
222. These records, as they are interpreted by the
majority of the disciples of Christ, are believed to
lead to a conception of the Godhead, in which there
is a plurality of persons but a unity of substance. It
ought, however, to be remembered that here the word
person does not mean the same thing as it does when
applied to ourselves, but only denotes some distinction
which may be regarded as best expressed by this
word. Our idea of person or individual is derived
solely from our experience in the position which we
occupy in the universe.
The first Person in this Trinity, God the Father, is
represented as the unapproachable Creator—the Being
in virtue of whom all things exist.
Thus it is said (John i. 18), ‘No man hath seen
God at any time; the only begotten Son which is in
the bosom of the Father, he hath declared him.’
Again, Paul tells us (Rom. xi. 36), ‘For of him and
through him and to him are all things.’ Also (1 Cor.
viii. 6), ‘But to us there is but one God, the Father,
of whom are all things, and we to him (εἰς αὐτόν);
and one Lord Jesus Christ, by whom are all things,
and we by him.’
Also (Eph. iv. 6), ‘One God and Father of all, who
is above all, and through all, and in all.’ Also (1
Timothy vi. 16), ‘Who only hath immortality, dwelling
in the light which no man can approach unto;
whom no man hath seen, nor can see.’
223. Again, of the second Person of the Trinity we
are told, in addition to what we gather from the
expressions just quoted (John i. 1), ‘In the beginning
was the Word, and the Word was with God, and
the Word was God. The same was in the beginning
with God. All things were made by him, and
without him was not any thing made that was
made.’
Again (2 Cor. v. 10): ‘For we must all appear
before the judgment seat of Christ.’
Again (Col. i. 15): ‘Who is the image of the invisible
God, the first-born of every creature: for in
him were all things created that are in heaven,
and that are in earth, visible and invisible, whether
they be thrones, or dominions, or principalities, or
powers.’
Again (Heb. i. 1): ‘God, who at sundry times, and
in divers manners, spoke in time past unto the fathers
by the prophets, hath in these last days spoken unto
us by his Son, whom he hath appointed heir of all
things, by whom also he made the worlds.’
224. It is, we believe, a prevalent idea among
theologians that these passages indicate, in the first
place, the existence of an unapproachable Creator—the
unconditioned One who is spoken of as God the
Father; and that they also indicate the existence of
another Being of the same substance as the Father,
but different in person, who has agreed to develop
the will of the Father, and thus in some mysterious
sense to submit to conditions and to enter into the
universe.[60] The relation of this Being to the Father is
expressed in Hebrews[61] in the words of the Psalmist,
‘Then said I, Lo, I come: in the volume of the book
it is written of me, I delight to do thy will, O my
God: yea, thy law is within my heart.’ In fine, such a
Being would represent that conditioned, yet infinitely
powerful developing agent, to which the universe,
objectively considered, appears to lead up. His work
is twofold, for, in the first place, he develops the
various universes or orders of being; and secondly,
in some mysterious way He becomes Himself the
type and pattern of each order, the representative of
Deity, so far as the beings of that order can comprehend,
especially manifesting such divine qualities as
could not otherwise be intelligibly presented to their
minds.
Such a being is therefore, in virtue of His office,
the King of angels and ruler of the invisible universe,
and to him the term Lord in the poem of Job is supposed
to apply (Job i. 6): ‘Now there was a day
when the Sons of God came to present themselves
before the Lord, and Satan came also among them.’
225. It would thus appear that what may be termed
the Christian theory of development has a twofold
aspect, a descent and an ascent; the descent of the
Son of God through the various grades of existence,
and the consequent ascent of the intelligences of each
led up by him to a higher level,—a stooping on the
part of the developing Being, in order that there may
be a mounting up on the part of the developed. Thus
it is said (
John iii. 13), ‘And no man hath ascended
up to heaven, but he that came down from heaven,
even the Son of man which is in heaven.’ Again
(Eph. iv. 9): ‘Now that he ascended, what is it but
that he also descended first into the lower parts of the
earth? He that descended is the same also that
ascended up far above all heavens, that he might fill
all things.’
226. It is naturally in accordance with these views
that the Angelic Host should be represented as taking
an intelligent interest, even if they did not, as the
Gnostics thought, take an active part, in the creation
of the visible universe. Thus the Lord is represented
as asking Job (Job xxxviii. 4), ‘Where wast thou
when I laid the foundations of the earth? declare, if
thou hast understanding. Who hath laid the measures
thereof, if thou knowest? or who hath stretched the
line upon it? Whereupon are the foundations thereof
fastened? or who laid the corner-stone thereof, when
the morning-stars sang together, and all the sons of
God shouted for joy?’
227. It is also in accordance with these views that
the same hierarchy should take an intelligent interest
in the life of Christ. Thus we read (Luke ii. 13),
‘And suddenly there was with the angel a multitude
of the heavenly host praising God, and saying, Glory
to God in the highest, and on earth peace, good-will
toward men.’ And again (1 Timothy iii. 16): ‘And
without controversy great is the mystery of godliness:
God was manifest in the flesh, justified in the Spirit,
seen of angels, preached unto the Gentiles, believed
on in the world, received up into glory.’
228. It will be remarked that the views which we
have now put before our readers have been developed
more especially from the objective point of view, and
that our reasoning has been founded on the principle
of Continuity as applied to the outward universe. In
truth we seem to get a much firmer and more tangible
hold on the objective element of the universe, that is
to say, on energy (Art. 103), than we can on intelligence
and life. For if we approach our individual
consciousness it is very manifest that we have no well-founded
principle wherewith to guide our speculations
similar to the principle of Continuity; for this, if we
had it, would at once inform us whether the doctrine
of immortality is true or false.
We know very well that the universe will remain
after we are laid in the grave, but some of us are not
equally certain whether we ourselves shall then continue
to exist.
Thus there appears to be a difficulty which we see
at present no means of surmounting in dealing with
individual consciousness. But while the continuance
of individual life is enveloped in mystery, it is believed
that we have obtained hold of a general principle
regarding the distribution of life not greatly inferior
in breadth and generality to the law of Continuity.
We mean the principle that life proceeds from life, or,
to speak more accurately, that a conditioned living
thing proceeds only from a conditioned living thing.
That dead matter cannot produce a living organism
is the universal experience of the most eminent
physiologists.[62] In fact, the law of Biogenesis is justly
regarded by Professor Huxley and others as the great
principle underlying all the phenomena of organised
existence.
Professor Roscoe, again, approaching the subject
from the chemical point of view, says, speaking of
red blood corpuscles, ‘We have not been able, and
the evidence at present rather goes to show that there
is not much hope of our being able, to construct these
granules artificially; and the question is in this position,
that so far as science has progressed at present
we have not been able to obtain any organism without
the intervention of some sort of previously
existing germ.’
229. If we assume the truth of this principle it
appears to lead us directly to infer that life is not
merely a species of energy, or a phenomenon of
matter. For we have seen (Art. 103) that the great
characteristic of all energy is its transmutability—its
Protean power of passing from one form to another.
We may no doubt produce large quantities of electricity
by means of an electrified nucleus, but we can do
the same without any such nucleus—we can make
unlimited steel magnets by the help of one piece of
loadstone, but we can do this even more effectually
by means of a galvanic battery—we may produce
fire from a spark, but we can obtain it without a
spark.
Life, however, can be produced from life only, and
this law would seem to give an indication that the
solution of the mystery is not to be found by considering
life as merely a species of energy. It is
some time since we gave up the idea that life could
generate energy; it now seems that we must give up
the idea that energy can generate life.
230. In preceding chapters we have given our
readers a sketch of the methods according to which
men of science imagine that evolution has been
carried out in the universe of energy and in that of
life. In both worlds the principle of Continuity
requires that in endeavouring to account for the
origin of phenomena we shall not resort to the hypothesis
of separate creations, that we shall not pass
over from the conditioned to the unconditioned; and
Darwin, Wallace, and their followers have, as we have
shown, endeavoured to prove that processes still pursued
by nature are sufficient in a great measure, if
not entirely, to account for the present development
of organised existence without the necessity of resorting
to separate creations. Darwin especially imagines
that all the present organisms, including man, may
have been derived by the process of natural selection
from a single primordial germ. When, however, the
backward process has reached this germ, an insuperable
difficulty presents itself. How was this germ
produced? All really scientific experience tells us
that life can be produced from a living antecedent
only; what then was the antecedent of this germ?
Hypotheses have no doubt been started, but we cannot
regard them in any other light than as an
acknowledgment of a difficulty which cannot be overcome.
We appear to have reached an impenetrable
barrier similar to that which stood in our way when
we contemplated the production of the visible universe.
And precisely as we felt compelled by the
logic of scientific process to deal with this first
barrier, so we must likewise assert for ourselves with
becoming reverence a similar freedom of action in
dealing with the second. Therefore, if life be one of
the things of the universe, if the assumption of a
creation of life in time be inadmissible, and if it be
contrary to all experience to allow the possibility of
the production of life from antecedents not possessing
life, we are entitled, even in such a case as the present,
to make use of this conclusion derived from experience,
and are thus forced to contemplate an antecedent
possessing life and giving life to this primordial
germ,—an antecedent in the universe, not out of it,—conditioned,
not unconditioned. Now, what is the
meaning of this conclusion? In the first place, it
does not mean that the antecedent to the primordial
germ must be a like germ, for we know from experience
that while life is always produced from life, like
is by no means always produced from like. In this
case more especially the living antecedent must be in
the invisible universe, and therefore altogether different
from the germ.
231. If we now turn once more to the Christian
system, we find that it recognises such an antecedent
as an agent in the universe. He is styled the Lord,
and Giver of Life. The third Person of the Trinity
is regarded in this system as working in the universe,
and therefore in some sense as conditioned. One of
His functions consists in distributing and developing
this principle of life, which we are forced to regard as
one of the things of the universe; just as the second
Person of the Trinity is regarded as developing the
objective phenomena of the universe. Thus one
has entered from everlasting into the universe, in
order to develop it objectively, while the other has
also entered from everlasting into the universe, in
order to develop its subjective elements, life and intelligence.
Thus we read (Gen. i. 2), ‘And the earth was
without form, and void; and darkness was upon
the face of the deep: and the Spirit of God moved
upon the face of the waters;’ implying, we may
imagine, a peculiar operation of this Spirit preceding
the advent of life into the world. Again, when in the
fulness of time, Christ, the developing agent, made
His appearance here, and submitted to the trammels
of a human nature, this appearance was preceded by
an operation of the same Spirit.
232. It may here be desirable to discuss somewhat
fully the position of life in the universe, as we are
constrained to view it in virtue of the scientifically
established principles of biogenesis.
If then the matter of this present visible universe
be not capable of itself, that is to say, in virtue of
the forces and qualities with which it has been
endowed, of generating life; but if we must look to
the unseen universe for the origin of life, this would
appear to show that the peculiar collocation of matter
which accompanies the operations of life is not a
mere grouping of particles of the visible universe, but
implies likewise some peculiarity in the connection of
these with the unseen universe. May it not denote
in fact some peculiarity of structure extending to the
unseen?
In fine, to go a step further, may not life denote a
peculiarity of structure which is handed over not
merely from one stage to another—from the invisible
to the visible—but which rises upwards from the very
lowest structural depths of the material of the universe,
this material being regarded as possessed of an
infinitely complex structure such as we have pictured
to our readers in a previous part of this chapter
(Art. 220).
If we suppose any such peculiarity to accompany
life we cannot fail at once to see the impossibility of
its originating in the visible universe alone.
233. Again, it is well known to many of our readers
that discussions have frequently arisen regarding the
peculiar place and function of life in the universe.
What is its relation to energy? it certainly does not
create energy—what then does it do?
One way of replying to this question is indicated
in the following passage, which we quote at length
from an article on ‘The Atomic Theory of Lucretius,’
in the North British Review for March 1868:—
‘It is a principle of mechanics that a force acting at right
angles to the direction in which a body is moving does no work,
although it may continually and continuously alter the direction
in which the body moves. No power, no energy, is required to
deflect a bullet from its path, provided the deflecting force acts
always at right angles to that path....
‘If you believe in free-will and in atoms, you have two courses
open to you. The first alternative may be put as follows: Something
which is not atoms must be allowed an existence, and
must be supposed capable of acting on the atoms. The atoms
may, as Democritus believed, build up a huge mechanical structure,
each wheel of which drives its neighbour in one long
inevitable sequence of causation; but you may assume that beyond
this ever-grinding wheelwork there exists a power not
subject to but partly master of the machine; you may believe
that man possesses such a power, and if so, no better conception
of the manner of its action could be devised than the idea
of its deflecting the atoms in their onward path to the right or
left of that line in which they would naturally move. The will,
if it so acted, would add nothing sensible to nor take anything
sensible from the energy of the universe. The modern believer
in free-will will probably adopt this view, which is certainly consistent
with observation, although not proved by it. Such a
power of moulding circumstances, of turning the torrent to the
right, where it shall fertilise, or to the left, where it shall overwhelm,
but in nowise of arresting the torrent, adding nothing
to it, taking nothing from it,—such is precisely the apparent
action of man’s will; and though we must allow that possibly
the deflecting action does but result from some smaller subtler
stream of circumstance, yet if we may trust to our direct perception
of free-will, the above theory, involving a power in man
beyond that of atoms, would probably be our choice....
‘We cannot hope that natural science will ever lend the least
assistance towards answering the Free-will and Necessity question.
The doctrines of the indestructibility of matter and of
the conservation of energy seem at first sight to help the
Necessitarians, for they might argue that if free-will acts it must
add something to or take something from the physical universe,
and if experiment shows that nothing of the kind occurs, away
goes free-will; but this argument is worthless, for if mind or
will simply deflects matter as it moves, it may produce all the
consequences claimed by the Wilful school, and yet it will
neither add energy nor matter to the universe.’
234. Now there appears to us to be a very serious
objection to this mode of regarding the position of
life, unless it be somewhat modified. Let us take
one of the visible masses of this present universe,
such as a planet. Suppose for a moment that instead
of being attracted to a fixed and visible centre of force
such as the sun, it is bound to an invisible and
vagrant centre, the only condition imposed upon
whose irregularities is that it shall always move in
such a manner that there shall be neither creation
nor destruction of energy.
We have only to imagine for a moment such a
universe in order to realise the inextricable confusion
into which its intelligent inhabitants would be plunged
by the operation of a viewless and unaccountable
agency of this nature. No doubt the hypothesis
regarding life, which we have quoted above, limits
this mode of action to the molecular motions of
matter, but if our line of argument has been followed
throughout, the reader will probably acknowledge
that the superior intelligences of the universe may
have the same appretiation of molecular motions
that we have of those of large masses. Now they
would in turn be put to inextricable confusion by the
advent of an unperceivable, and, from the nature of
the case, irresponsible force entitled will operating
towards the deflection of these molecular motions,
even although the energy of the universe should
remain the same. We think that Professor Huxley
and some others who have opposed this mode of
regarding the position of life have been somewhat
unjustly blamed. They have driven the operation of
the mystery called life or will out of the objective
universe, out of that portion of things which is capable
of being scientifically studied by intelligence, and in
so doing they have most assuredly done right. The
mistake made (whether by this party or by their
adversaries) lies in imagining that by such a process
they completely get rid of a thing so driven before
them, and that it thus disappears from the universe
altogether. It does no such thing. It merely disappears
from that small circle of light which we may
call the universe of scientific perception.
But the greater the circle of light (to adopt the
words of Dr. Chalmers), the greater the circumference
of darkness, and the mystery which has been driven
before us looms in the darkness that surrounds this
circle, growing more mysterious and more tremendous
as the circumference is increased. In fine, we have
already remarked that the position of the scientific
man is to clear a space before him from which all
mystery shall be driven away, and in which there shall
be nothing but matter and energy subject to certain
definite laws which he can comprehend. There are
however three great mysteries (a trinity of mysteries)
which elude, and will for ever elude, his grasp, and
these will persistently hover around the border of this
cleared and illuminated circle,—they are the mystery
of the soul’s domicile, in other words, of the universe
objectively viewed; the mystery of life and intelligence;
and the mystery of God,—and these three are one.
235. But in this latter statement we have transgressed
the limits of our inquiry, and are content to
be driven back. Suffice it to say that these three
gigantic mysteries will persistently hover around the
illuminated circle, or, to speak more properly, the
illuminated sphere of scientific thought, of which
duration, extension, and structural complexity may
be regarded as the three independent co-ordinates in
terms of each of which the process of development
goes on simultaneously as the boundary of the sphere
is enlarged.
Within this sphere we have only that which can be
grasped by Physical Science, but we are not therefore
to infer that matter and the laws of matter have a
reality and a permanence denied to intelligence.
It is rather because they are at the bottom of the
list—are in fact the simplest and lowest of the three—that
they are capable of being most readily grasped
by the finite intelligences of the universe. The following
words of Professor Stokes, in his presidential
address to the British Association at Exeter, occur to
us as very clearly embodying this thought:—
‘Admitting to the full as highly probable, though not completely
demonstrated, the applicability to living beings of the
laws which have been ascertained with reference to dead matter,
I feel constrained at the same time to admit the existence of a
mysterious something lying beyond, a something sui generis,
which I regard, not as balancing and suspending the ordinary
physical laws, but as working with them and through them to
the attainment of a designed end. What this something which
we call life may be is a profound mystery.... When from the
phenomena of life we pass on to those of mind, we enter a
region still more profoundly mysterious. We can readily
imagine that we may here be dealing with phenomena altogether
transcending those of mere life, in some such way as
those of life transcend, as I have endeavoured to infer, those of
chemistry and molecular attractions, or as the laws of chemical
affinity in their turn transcend those of mere mechanics.
Science can be expected to do but little to aid us here, since
the instrument of research is itself the object of investigation.
It can but enlighten us as to the depths of our ignorance, and
lead us to look to a higher aid for that which most nearly concerns
our well-being.’
236. In fine, the physical properties of matter form
the alphabet which is put into our hands by God, the
study of which will, if properly conducted, enable us
more perfectly to read that Great Book which we call
the Universe.
We have begun to recognise some of the chief
letters of this alphabet, and even to put them two
and two together; and, like an intelligent but somewhat
conceited child, we are very proud of our
achievement. Like such a child we have not yet,
however, completely grasped the fact that these
letters are only symbols, but look upon them with
intense awe as the great thing in the world, meaning
of course our world. We look with a sort of adoration
towards those pages in which there are words of
two syllables, and are ready to fall down at the feet
of that older and wiser child who has penetrated into
the depths of such profound mysteries. Our belief is
that all knowledge is made for the alphabet just as
the little musician believes that all music is made for
the piano.
237. Life, then, whatever be its nature, may be
supposed to penetrate into the structural depths of
the universe. Its seat is in a region inaccessible to
human inquiry, and equally inaccessible, we may well
suppose, to the inquiries of the higher created intelligences.
Intimations of its presence are no doubt
constantly emerging from this region of thick darkness
into the objective universe, but when they have
reached it they obey the ordinary laws of phenomena,
according to which a material effect implies a material
antecedent.
Notwithstanding all this, life exists just as surely
as the Deity exists. For we have subjected both
these mysteries to the same process, and have found
it as difficult to rid ourselves of the one as of the
other.
We have driven the creative operation of the Great
First Cause into the durational depths of the universe,—into
the eternity of the past,—but for all that we
have not got rid of God. In like manner we have
driven the mystery of life into the structural depths
of the universe,—that region of thick darkness which
no created eye is able to pierce,—but we have not
got rid of life, nor are we likely to do so. Before
concluding this digression upon the place of life,
let us briefly review the attempts made to account
for the origin of life by those who have yet fallen
short of the scientific conception of an Unseen Universe.
238. Sir W. Thomson has gone further than any
one else in such inquiries. We have already alluded
to his attempt to explain the origin of the material
universe by the vortex-ring hypothesis, and also to
his other attempt to explain gravitation by the modification
of the hypothesis of ultra-mundane corpuscles.
If we add to these his attempt to explain the origin
of life as consistently as possible with the principle
of Continuity, we think it must be acknowledged that
he is a true pioneer in such inquiries as those of this
volume as well as in the more ordinary branches of
Physical Science.
The explanation of the origin of life proposed by
Sir W. Thomson had also occurred independently to
Professor Helmholtz. This latter physicist, in an article
on the use and abuse of the deductive method in
Physical Science,[63] tells us very clearly what led himself,
and no doubt Sir W. Thomson likewise, to suggest the
meteoric hypothesis as a possible way of accounting
for the origin of terrestrial life:—‘If failure attends
all our efforts to obtain a generation of organisms
from lifeless matter, it seems to me (says Professor
Helmholtz) a thoroughly correct procedure to inquire
whether there has ever been an origination of life, or
whether it is not as old as matter, and whether its
germs, borne from one world to another, have not
been developed wherever they have found a favourable
soil.’
239. We have already sufficiently pointed out that
the man of science objects to separate creations, and
that, in consequence, he tries to explain the present
terrestrial life by means of a single primordial germ.
But the difficulty still remains regarding the original
appearance of this germ.
Now, according to the meteoric hypothesis, this
germ may have been wafted to us from some other
world, or its fragments, and thus one act of creation of
life might possibly serve for many worlds. If therefore
this hypothesis were otherwise tenable it would
diminish the difficulty implied by separate creations,
but would it entirely remove it? We doubt this very
much.
For, in the first place, as far as we can judge (Art.
163) the visible universe—the universe of worlds—is
not eternal, while however the invisible universe, or
that which we may for illustration at least associate
with the ethereal medium, is necessarily eternal. The
visible universe must have had its origin in time (Art.
116), no doubt from a nebulous condition. But in
this condition it can hardly have been fit for the reception
of life. Life must therefore have been created
afterwards. We have thus at least two separate creations,
both taking place in time—the one of matter
and the other of life. And even if it were possible,
which it is not, to get over one of the difficulties
attending this hypothesis, that of creation in time, by
regarding the visible universe as eternal; yet even
then we must regard matter and life as implying two
separate creative acts if we assume the nebulous
hypothesis to be true. For if x denote the date of
the advent of life, and x + a that of the advent of
matter, a being a constant quantity, the two operations
cannot be made simultaneous by merely increasing
the value of x without limit. Now this is what
we mean by eternity, and therefore we cannot help
thinking that this want of simultaneity implies a
defect in this mode of viewing the origin of things.
240. Yet another hypothesis has been produced,
which starts with the assumption that all matter is in
some simple sense alive. Looking upon the atom as
the essential thing in the universe, the various motions
of the atom are by this school supposed to be accompanied
by a species of consciousness inconceivably
simple. Under certain circumstances this eternal and
immortal consciousness is supposed to be consistent
with that which we call the life of the individual,
while under other circumstances these two lives are
not consistent with one another. The individual then
dies, but nevertheless the simple immortal lives of
the atoms which compose his body remain attached
to them as truly as before.
There is no disappearance of anything from the
universe, only the mode in which the simple immortal
life becomes manifested has undergone a change of
expression, just as energy may be supposed to undergo
a change without disappearing. It is thought by the
members of this school that such a hypothesis satisfies
the Principle of Continuity more fully than any
other. For, looking at things from the old point of
view, we see that certain atoms are concerned in the
manifestation of consciousness, as for instance the
particles of our brains, while certain other atoms are
not so concerned, as for instance the inorganic matter
we see around us.
Here then, it is argued, we have a breach of the
Principle of Continuity, inasmuch as certain things of
the universe (brain-particles) have a function assigned
to them in their association with consciousness, which
other things (gold, silver, etc.) do not possess in any
measure, if the distinction between organic and inorganic
be an essential one. To avert this breach, it is
essential that all matter should be considered as in
some sense alive. It is furthermore argued, that by
this hypothesis there is no difficulty in accounting for
the introduction of life, inasmuch as life always accompanies
matter, the mode of manifestation of the one
being regulated by the mode of collocation of the
other.
241. Now it appears to us that this
school of thought is justified in declining to accept a hypothesis
which attributes to certain substances of the
universe a power which is entirely wanting in others,
or that gives to the same substance at one time
a fundamental power or property that is entirely
wanting at another. It is not so much the premiss
as the conclusion of this school to which we object.
For let us consider for a moment what is implied in
the astounding inference that the atom is the true
abode of immortal life in the universe, and that its
life is of an extremely simple kind.
It implies, in the first place, that the atom is eternal,
and to this we object. It implies, in the next place,
that the atom is extremely simple in its constitution,
and to this we object. It implies, thirdly, that for the
antecedents of the motions of the atom it is unnecessary
to resort to anything beyond the atom itself, and
to this we object.
242. We have in other places sufficiently set forth
our objection to regarding the atom either as eternal
or as extremely simple in constitution, let us now state
our objection to regarding the motions of the atom
(in this generalisation) apart from the surrounding
universe.
Our objection is, that in order to conceive the
nature of the forces by which atoms act upon each
other, we are driven at once, if not to the very hypothesis
of Le Sage, at least to something which implies
the existence and agency of the Unseen Universe.
But when once we have taken this step, we are not
permitted to rest, for another journey is before us,
and after that another, and so on. In fine, there is
no end to the process, and no halting-place for the
mind, except in the belief that the universe as a
whole participates in every motion which takes place
even in the smallest of atoms.[64]
Undoubtedly as regards certain practical scientific
results, it is allowable to regard the atom as a thing
by itself, and to sum up the apparent actions of the
various atoms as if each were independent of everything
else. But when we come to a generalisation
so fundamental as this hypothesis regarding life, we
are forced to ask whether the apparent and visible
action of atoms on one another is really everything
which takes place, and then we find, as we have just
shown, that we are driven at once into the Unseen
Universe, and thence into an endless complexity of
antecedent.
In fine, we conclude that inasmuch as the universe
in its various orders participates in every conceivable
motion, the consciousness which accompanies this
motion cannot logically be confined to the apparently
moving body or atom, but must in some sense extend
to the Unseen Universe in its various orders. But
this is only another way of expressing the conclusions
at which we have already arrived, for (of course) if
we imagine a Divine Agency to be resident in the
universe, we cannot but suppose that every motion of
any kind is accompanied with a consciousness of this
Divine Agency.
In fine, we maintain that what we are driven to is
not an under-life resident in the atom, but rather, to
adopt the words of a recent writer, a Divine over-life
in which we live and move and have our being.
243. Here it is desirable to consider what we gain
by this hypothesis. Our gain is simply in the way in
which we regard the functions of matter, and a little
reflection will convince us that neither form of this
hypothesis, whether we hold by an under- or an over-life,
will enable us to explain the introduction of life
into the visible universe by natural laws alone, and
without resorting to some peculiar action of the
unseen. As a matter of fact we are led by science
to receive the law of Biogenesis as expressing the
present order of the world. But the introduction of
life into the world does not become more consistent
with this law by virtue of an hypothesis which associates
a consciousness of some sort with every motion
of the universe.
It still remains a fact as much as ever, that there
is a marked distinction between the living and the
dead—the organic and the inorganic. And it still
remains true that, as a matter of universal scientific
experience, a living thing can only be produced
from a living thing, and that the inorganic forces
of the visible universe can by no means generate
life.
In fine, our hypothesis, in which the material as
well as the life of the visible universe are regarded as
having been developed from the Unseen, in which
they had existed from Eternity, appears to us to present
the only available method of avoiding a break
of continuity, if at the same time we are to accept
loyally the indications given by observation and
experiment. It may be said (just as anything else
may be said) that the visible universe is eternal, and
that it has the power of originating life; but both
statements are surely opposed to the results of observation
and experiment. Now we must be content in
such matters as these to be guided by probabilities,
and it certainly appears most probable that the visible
universe is not eternal, and that it has not the power
of originating life. In fine, life as well as matter
comes to us from the Unseen Universe.
244. Let us here again pause for a moment and
review the position which we have reached. By
taking the universe as we find it, and regarding each
occurrence in it, without exception, as something
upon which it was meant that we should exercise our
intellects, we are led at once to the principle of Continuity,
which asserts that we shall never be carried
from the conditioned to the unconditioned, but only
from one order of the fully conditioned to another.
Two great laws come before us: the one of which
is the Conservation of Mass and of Energy; that
is to say, conservation of the objective element of
the universe; while the other is the law of Biogenesis,
in virtue of which the appearance of a living
Being in the universe denotes the existence of an
antecedent possessing life. We are led from these
two great laws, as well as from the principle of
Continuity, to regard, as at least the most probable
solution, that there is an intelligent Agent operating
in the universe, one of whose functions it is
to develop the universe objectively considered; and
also that there is an intelligent Agent, one of whose
functions it is to develop intelligence and life. Perhaps
we ought rather to say that, if we are not driven to
this very conclusion, it appears at least to be that
which most simply and naturally satisfies the principle
of Continuity.
But this conclusion hardly differs from the Christian
doctrine; or, to speak properly, the conclusion, so far as
it goes, appears to agree with the Christian doctrine.
In fine, we are led to regard it as one of the great
merits of the Christian system, that its doctrine is
pre-eminently one of intellectual liberty, and that
while theologians on the one hand, and men of science
on the other, have each erected their barriers to inquiry,
the early Christian records acknowledge no
such barrier, but on the contrary assert the most perfect
freedom for all the powers of man.
245. We have now reached a stage from which we
can very easily dispose of any scientific difficulty
regarding miracles. For if the invisible was able to
produce the present visible universe with all its
energy, it could of course, a fortiori, very easily produce
such transmutations of energy from the one
universe into the other as would account for the
events which took place in Judea. Those events are
therefore no longer to be regarded as absolute breaks
of continuity, a thing which we have agreed to consider
impossible, but only as the result of a peculiar
action of the invisible upon the visible universe.
When we dig up an ant-hill, we perform an operation
which, to the inhabitants of the hill, is mysteriously
perplexing, far transcending their experience, but we
know very well that the whole affair happens without
any breach of continuity of the laws of the universe.
In like manner, the scientific difficulty with regard to
miracles will, we think, entirely disappear, if our view
of the invisible universe be accepted, or indeed if any
view be accepted which implies the presence in it of
living beings much more powerful than ourselves. It
is of course assumed that the visible and invisible
are and have been constantly in a state of intimate
mutual relation.
246. We have as yet only replied to the scientific
objection, but there are other objections which might
be raised. Thus, for instance, it might be said, What
occasion was there for the interference implied in
miracles? And again, Is the historical testimony in
favour of their occurrence conclusive? We must
leave the last objection to be replied to by the historian;
but with respect to the former, it appears to
us as almost self-evident that Christ, if He came to us
from the invisible world, could hardly (with reverence
be it spoken) have done so without some peculiar sort
of communication being established between the two
worlds. No doubt we may well imagine that the
acts of interference in virtue of this communication
were strictly limited; and in proof of this conclusion
we may cite the fact that what did occur was sufficiently
startling to have secured the ear of humanity
ever since, but not sufficiently overwhelming to preclude
the exercise of individual faith. The very fact
of there being sincere sceptics proves, we think, the
limited extent of these interferences.[65] And we must
remember, on the other hand, that it is quite possible
to accept fully the truth of a statement without
the slightest influence resulting as regards modification
of our course of action. Perhaps the most
terrible portion of the New Testament is the passage
(James ii. 19), ‘the demons also believe, and
tremble.’
247. We have now considered miracles, or those
apparent breaks of continuity which have been furnished
by history, but our readers are already well
aware that equally formidable breaks are brought
before us by science. There is, to begin with, that
formidable phenomenon, the production in time of
the visible universe. Secondly, there is a break
hardly less formidable, the original production of life;
and there is, thirdly, that break recognised by Wallace
and his school of natural history, which seems to have
occurred at the first production of man. Greatly as
we are indebted to Darwin, Huxley, and those who
have prominently advocated the possibility of the
present system of things’ having been developed by
forces and operations such as we see before us, it
must be regarded by us, and we think it is regarded
by them, as a defect in their system, that these breaks
remain unaccounted for. Our readers will now, however,
if we mistake not, perceive what is the real
source of the perplexity felt by the school of evolutionists.
It is that they have been unable to regard
an interference of the invisible universe in any other
light than as an absolute break of continuity; and
holding with justice to the principle of continuity,
they have been unable to do more than acknowledge
these difficulties and allow them to remain.
But from our point of view these difficulties are by
no means impenetrable barriers, barring for ever the
progress of research. On the contrary, we assert that,
if approached with sufficient boldness, and examined
with sufficient care, they will be found to contain
avenues leading up to the invisible universe, and
directing our inquiries thitherwards. There may be
possibly other apparent breaks or barriers, but these
appear to be the best established; and, with these
exceptions, we may suppose that the visible universe,
in so far as we are capable of investigating it, has
been left to develop itself in accordance with those
laws of energy which we see in operation at the present
day.
In fine, the visible universe was plainly intended to
be something which we are capable of investigating,
and the few apparent breaks are in reality so many
partially concealed avenues leading up to the unseen.
248. Our readers must not however infer from what
we have now said, that we do not recognise any present
points of contact between us and the invisible.
There may possibly be (but even of this we are not
quite sure) no points of apparent interference between
the two, so that the man of science cannot say,—Here
is a break;—but nevertheless there may be a close
and vital union between the two universes, in those
regions into which investigation cannot penetrate,
and who shall say that the laws of these regions do
not admit of the objective efficacy of prayer? There
may be an action of the invisible world upon the
individual mind, and there is no reason why there
should not also be an action upon the visible universe,
by means of those processes of delicacy which, as we
have already seen, obtain in that quarter (Art. 184).
Neither the one action nor the other would be detected
by science, unless we except certain providential
occurrences, which are generally, however, better
recognised by the individuals to whom they refer
than by the world at large. And just as reversibility
(Art. 113) is the stamp of perfection in the inanimate
engine, so a similar reversibility may be the stamp of
perfection in the living man. He ought to live for
the unseen—to carry into it something which may
not be wholly unacceptable. But, in order to enable
him to do this, the unseen must also work upon him,
and its influences must pervade his spiritual nature.
Thus a life for the unseen through the unseen is to be
regarded as the only perfect life.
249. In fine, the unseen may have a very wide field
of influence, but from its very nature its working is
not discernible, or at least easily discernible, by the
eye of sense, and we are therefore led to consult the
Christian records for otherwise unattainable information
regarding the reality of a present influence
exercised by the invisible universe upon ours.
In the first place, we have the following words of
Christ himself (Matt. xiii. 41): ‘The Son of man
shall send forth his angels, and they shall gather out
of his kingdom all things that offend, and them which
do iniquity, and shall cast them into a furnace of fire:
there shall be wailing and gnashing of teeth.’ Again
(Matt. xxv. 31): ‘When the Son of man shall come
in his glory, and all the holy angels with him, then
shall he sit upon the throne of his glory: and before
him shall be gathered all nations; and he shall
separate them one from another, as a shepherd
divideth his sheep from the goats.’ Again (Matt.
xxvi. 53), speaking to Peter: ‘Thinkest thou that I
cannot now pray to my Father, and he shall presently
give me more than twelve legions of angels?’ Furthermore,
we read (Heb. i. 14): ‘Are they not all ministering
spirits, sent forth to minister for them who
shall be heirs of salvation?’
These passages (and many more might be quoted)
would appear to show that, according to the Scriptures,
the angels take a very prominent part in the
administration of the universe under the direction of
the Son of God. They are his ministers, his messengers,
who execute his decrees and perform his
errands, whether of mercy or of justice. Therefore it
is said of Christ, ‘Thou art the King of angels;’ and
of himself in his glorified state, speaking to his disciples,
Christ says (Matt. xxviii. 18): ‘All power is
given unto me in heaven and in earth. Go ye therefore,
and teach all nations, baptising them in the
name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy
Ghost, teaching them to observe all things whatsoever
I have commanded you; and, lo, I am with you
alway, even unto the end of the world.’
Let us close these quotations by one from the Old
Testament—2 Kings vi. 15-17: ‘And when the servant
of the man of God was risen early, and gone
forth, behold, an host encompassed the city both with
horses and chariots: and his servant said unto him,
Alas, my master! how shall we do? And he answered,
Fear not; for they that be with us are more than
they that be with them. And Elisha prayed, and
said, Lord, I pray thee, open his eyes, that he may
see. And the Lord opened the eyes of the young
man: and he saw: and, behold, the mountain was
full of horses and chariots of fire round about Elisha.’
Finally, it is the belief of a large portion of the
Christian Church that the Spirit of God dwells in and
acts upon the souls of believers. This action represents
the influence which reaches the soul of man
from the unseen, enabling him to live for the unseen.
250. We have in our opening chapter quoted a
very remarkable passage from Swedenborg upon the
particular nature of God’s providence. Let us now
hear what the Scriptures say upon the same subject.
Christ tells us (Luke xii. 6): ‘Are not five sparrows
sold for two farthings, and not one of them is forgotten
before God? But even the very hairs of your head
are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of
more value than many sparrows.’ Again, St. Paul
tells us (Rom. viii. 28): ‘And we know that all things
work together for good to them that love God, to
them who are called according to his purpose.’ Also
(Rom. viii. 38): ‘For I am persuaded, that neither
death, nor life, nor angels, nor principalities, nor
powers, nor things present, nor things to come, nor
height, nor depth, nor any other creature, shall be
able to separate us from the love of God, which is in
Christ Jesus our Lord.’
251. We think it may be concluded from all these
passages that the doctrine of a particular providence
is taught in the Scriptures. Nevertheless it is one of
the hardest things to understand how this doctrine
can be made consistent with the working out of
general laws which, so far as we can study them,
appear to have no reference whatever to individuals.
This was a difficulty intensely felt by the late John
Stuart Mill. He says, in a work published after his
death:—
‘For how stands the fact? That, next to the greatness of
these cosmic forces, the quality which most forcibly strikes every
one who does not avert his eyes from it is their perfect and
absolute recklessness. They go straight to their end without
regarding what or whom they crush on the road. Optimists, in
their attempts to prove that “whatever is, is right,” are obliged
to maintain, not that Nature ever turns one step from her path
to avoid trampling us into destruction, but that it would be very
unreasonable in us to expect that she should. Pope’s “Shall
gravitation cease when you go by?” may be a just rebuke to
any one who should be so silly as to expect common human
morality from Nature. But if the question were between two
men, instead of between a man and a natural phenomenon, that
triumphant apostrophe would be thought a rare piece of impudence.
A man who should persist in hurling stones or firing
cannon when another man “goes by,” and, having killed him,
should urge a similar plea in exculpation, would very deservedly
be found guilty of murder. In sober truth, nearly all the things
which men are hanged or imprisoned for doing to one another
are Nature’s every-day performances.’
This objection to belief in the reality of the government
of God has been clothed in very eloquent
language in a sermon by the Rev. James Martineau:—‘The
battle of existence’ (he tells us, putting himself
for the moment into the position of Mill and his
school) ‘rages through all time and in every field;
and its rule is to give no quarter—to despatch the
maimed, to overtake the halt, to trip up the blind, and
drive the fugitive host over the precipice into the sea.’
In very beautiful language the poet Tennyson,
after proposing the same riddle, replies to it thus:—
‘Are God and Nature then at strife
That Nature lends such evil dreams?
So careful of the type she seems,
So careless of the single life;
“So careful of the type”? but no.
From scarped cliff and quarried stone
She cries, A thousand types are gone:
I care for nothing: all shall go.
O life as futile, then, as frail!
O for thy voice to soothe and bless!
What hope of answer or redress?
Behind the veil, behind the veil.’
In another passage of equal beauty the same poet
expresses his conviction
‘That nothing walks with aimless feet:
That not one life shall be destroy’d
Or cast as rubbish to the void,
When God hath made the pile complete.
That not a worm is cloven in vain;
That not a moth with vain desire
Is shrivel’d in a fruitless fire,
Or but subserves another’s gain.’
Professor Jevons, again, in his Principles of Science
(vol. ii. p. 468) alludes in the following terms to this
difficulty:—‘The hypothesis, that there is a Creator,
at once all-powerful and all-benevolent, is surrounded,
as it must seem to every candid investigator, with
difficulties verging closely upon logical contradiction.
The existence of the smallest amount of pain and evil
would seem to show that He is either not perfectly
benevolent, or not all-powerful. No one can have
lived long without experiencing sorrowful events of
which the significance is inexplicable. But if we
cannot succeed in avoiding contradiction in our
notions of elementary geometry, can we expect that
the ultimate purposes of existence shall present themselves
to us with perfect clearness? I can see nothing
to forbid the notion that in a higher state of intelligence
much that is now obscure may become clear.
We perpetually find ourselves in the position of finite
minds attempting infinite problems, and can we be
sure that where we see contradiction an infinite intelligence
might not discover perfect logical harmony?’
252. Before we leave this subject there is one consideration
which ought not to be forgotten. It is
evident that the development of the visible universe
is of such a nature that we can understand it, and to
a great extent explain it by means of laws and processes
with which we are familiar: nay, the order of
the universe is something which it is our very duty to
investigate. But the result of our inquiry is, and
can only be, the appretiation of general laws of action.
The working out of these laws can have, from this
point of view, no possible reference to individual interests.
If gravity acted sometimes, and at other
times refrained from acting, we could derive no certain
information from our experience; we could not
advance in art or science, and should infallibly be
plunged into speedy confusion. Nevertheless, it is
not impossible that the occurrences which take place
through the action of gravity may, after all, be so
arranged as to have reference to the real welfare of
individuals, although this reference may not be apparent
because we are not in a position to recognise it,
and it is not intended that we should do so, at least
in this life. The ability to do so would be a very
dangerous gift, and would go far to upset the present
economy. We know very little about the bearings of
events on our own best interests, and nothing at all
about their bearings on those of our neighbour. We
may, however, believe with Jevons, that in a future
state the adaptation between the two may become
apparent to us, even if we do not ourselves become
instruments in bringing this adaptation about.
253. The outcome of all these speculations would
thus lead us to regard the Christian system as
affording a full scope for development in all respects,
whether of the universe or of the individual. Its law
is pre-eminently that of liberty, and it has conducted
us to the conclusion that the doctrine of the Trinity,
or something analogous to it, forms, as it were, the
avenue through which the universe itself leads us up
to the conception of the infinite and eternal One.
Nevertheless, not a few of our readers may be disinclined
to entertain any precise conception of the
Divine nature. Neither atheists nor theists, they
simply dismiss the Deity as being quite above their
comprehension, and all doctrines founded upon definite
conceptions of the Deity, as superstructures
without foundation.
Now, the results regarding a future state at which
we have arrived are, as we think, and as we have said
in our introduction, capable of being very nearly, if
not altogether, detached from all conceptions regarding
the Divine essence.
We have merely to take the universe as it is, and,
adopting the principle of Continuity, insist upon an
endless chain of events, all fully conditioned, however
far we go either backwards or forwards. This process
leads us at once to the conception of an invisible
universe, and to see that immortality is possible without
a break of continuity.
We have, however, no physical proof in favour of
it, unless we allow that Christ rose from the dead.
But it will be admitted that, if Christ rose from the
dead, a future state becomes more than possible; it
becomes probable; and we do not see that this conclusion
is, in itself, greatly modified by differences in
our mode of regarding the exact nature of Christ.
Again, the production of the visible universe in
time leads us, by the principle of Continuity, to the
conception of a fully conditioned intelligent universe,
existing prior to the production of the visible. And
furthermore, we are induced by our argument (Art.
218) to regard the production of the visible universe
as the work of an intelligent agency residing in the
invisible. If, then, such an agency could produce
the visible universe, it could certainly accomplish the
resurrection of Christ, without any break of continuity,
so far as the whole universe is concerned.
254. The joys of the Christian Heaven are celebrated
in Hymns which are frequently very beautiful,
even if they do not mount to the sublimity of the
ancient Hebrew ode. One of the finest of these is
the free translation by Pope of the Latin (not originally
Christian) ode standing at the commencement
of this volume. It runs thus:—
‘Vital spark of heavenly flame!
Quit, oh, quit this mortal frame!
Trembling, hoping, ling’ring, flying!
Oh, the pain, the bliss of dying!
Cease, fond Nature, cease thy strife,
And let me languish into life!
Hark! they whisper—angels say,
“Sister spirit, come away!”
What is this absorbs me quite;
Steals my senses, shuts my sight;
Drowns my spirits, draws my breath?
Tell me, my soul, can this be—death?
The world recedes! it disappears!
Heaven opens to my eyes!—my ears
With sounds seraphic ring:
Lend, lend your wings! I mount! I fly!
O Grave! where is thy victory?
O Death! where is thy sting?’
Many specimens might be given if our object were
to collect together the Christian Hymns relating to
Heaven. Sometimes, too, we have beautiful descriptions
not in verse, and Bunyan’s account of the reception
of Christian and Hopeful at the Celestial
City will at once occur to the reader as not inferior
in the claims of true poetry to anything that we have
in verse.
255. Now, if we analyse such hymns of joy, we find
in them two prominent chords, one or other of which
is always struck. The first expresses the Christian’s
sense of relief from sorrow and death, and the second
his joy in the anticipated presence of Christ—his
intense desire to behold the King in his beauty.
These chords are struck together by St. John, when
he says (Rev. xxi. 3, 4), ‘And I heard a great voice
out of heaven saying, Behold, the tabernacle of God
is with men, and he will dwell with them, and they
shall be his people, and God himself shall be with
them, and be their God. And God shall wipe away
all tears from their eyes; and there shall be no more
death, neither sorrow, nor crying, neither shall there
be any more pain: for the former things are passed
away.’ In other respects the descriptions of the
Christian heaven are no doubt figurative. They are
intended for Christians of all ages of the world, and
have hardly any reference to the material conditions
of life in a future state. These could not be apprehended
by believers 1800 years ago, inasmuch as we
can hardly be said to grasp them now. Nevertheless
there is one direction in which we do think we
are able to obtain a glimpse into the conditions of
this future life.
256. One of the most prominent characteristics of
even the well-directed human mind is its insatiable
curiosity. How intensely anxious we all are to
realise the conditions of the life of our forefathers in
the ruder and earlier times; how interested in every
scrap of intelligence which reaches us from the dead
old world! How interested too in any light thrown
upon the civilisation which preceded these old times!
What would not any man give for half an hour with
Socrates or Plato? what would he not give, be he
Christian or unbeliever, to have pictured out vividly
and truly before him some episode in the life of
Christ? In a tedious, toilsome, tantalising, roundabout
way we do indeed get some passing glimpses
into these ancient historical ages.
The earth is not unlike the human brain, in that it
contains in itself certain memories of the past: and,
just as we rummage out and hunt up in our brains
old memories, so do the historian and the antiquary
search about in the earth for that memory which it
retains of those distant but glorious ages. But the
universe, no less than the individual, has another
memory besides the material one, and we have
endeavoured (Art. 196) to convince our readers that
nothing is really lost, the past being always present
in the universe. If this be the case, it may readily
be conceived that this universal memory may by
some process of exaltation and intensification, or as
it were by some relay battery of the universe, be
occasionally quickened into such a life that the
individual in the future and glorified state may be
enabled (through the power of the Lord) to realise
scenes that happened in the far distant past. For if
so much can be accomplished with a thing so little
plastic as the material memory of the earth, what
may not be done with that infinitely more plastic
form of existence which we term the world to come?
257. Again, if in this present world we have great
difficulty in realising our own past, we have even
greater difficulty in realising what is at this very
moment taking place in remote parts of the present
visible universe. Astronomers and Physicists agree
that life is possible in the planet Mars, and it is quite
likely that intelligent beings analogous to ourselves
exist at the present moment on the surface of that
planet, but we shall never in this life know for certain
anything about them. There is an insurmountable
barrier to physical inquiry as great as if Mars belonged
to the unseen universe, instead of being, what
he is in reality, our next-door neighbour in the present.
Now, may not this barrier be removed in the future
state? This has been a favourite topic with scientific
theologians, and we believe that all who have
speculated on the conditions of a future life have
unanimously agreed that we shall have much greater
freedom of motion in the world to come. There can
be no doubt that our relations to time and space will
then be greatly altered and enlarged. Men shall run
to and fro in the universe, and knowledge shall be
increased.
258. But yet the picture is not altogether one of
intellectual brightness and beauty. It wears also
a moral aspect, and upon this almost exclusively the
Christian records dwell. We are told in these records
that nothing is forgotten. Christ tells us (St. Luke
viii. 17), ‘Nothing is secret, that shall not be made
manifest; neither anything hid, that shall not be
known and come abroad.’ And again St. John tells
us (Rev. xx. 12), ‘I saw the dead, small and great,
stand before God: and the books were opened; and
another book was opened, which is the book of life:
and the dead were judged out of those things which
were written in the books, according to their works.’
This thought has been developed by the Rev. Alexander
Macleod, D.D., in a work entitled Our own Lives
the Books of Judgment. This author points out that
in many cases it may not be even necessary to appeal
to the universe for the record which is therein written,
for this is sufficiently stamped upon the body itself,
and he then draws a vivid and lurid picture of the
sensual man in whom the mortal body is like a parchment
written within and without—a truly mournful
and terrible record of the deeds done in the body.
But if all this is possible with an organism possessing
so little plasticity as the natural body, and where the
wish of the individual is to preserve a respectable
exterior, what must be the case in the soul[66] of such a
man?—‘If they do these things in a green tree, what
shall be done in the dry?’ What a hideous and horrible
likeness must not that foul thing have that issues
forth from the ‘grave and gate of Death’ into the
presence of the Unseen and Eternal?
259. It is extremely striking to read in this connection
the following extract from Plato’s Gorgias.
We quote from Jowett’s translation. Socrates is the
speaker:—
‘This is a tale, Callicles, which I have heard and believe,
and from which I draw the following inferences: Death, if I am
right, is in the first place the separation from one another of
two things, soul and body;—this, and nothing else. And after
they are separated they retain their several characteristics,
which are much the same as in life; the body has the same
nature and ways and affections, all clearly discernible; for
example, he who by nature or training, or both, was a tall man
while he was alive, will remain as he was after he is dead; and
the fat man will remain fat; and so on: and the dead man,
who in life had a fancy to have flowing hair, will have flowing
hair. And if he was marked with the whip and had the prints
of the scourge, or of wounds in him while he was alive, you
might see the same in the dead body; and if his limbs were
broken or misshapen while he was alive, the same appearance
would be visible in the dead. And, in a word, whatever was
the habit of the body during life would be distinguishable after
death, either perfectly or in a great measure and for a time.
And I should infer that this is equally true of the soul, Callicles;
when the man is stripped of the body all the natural or acquired
affections of the soul are laid open to view. And when they
come to the judge, as those from Asia came to Rhadamanthus,
he places them near him and inspects them quite impartially,
not knowing whose the soul is: perhaps he may lay hands on
the soul of the great king, or of some other king or potentate,
who has no soundness in him, but his soul is marked with the
whip, and is full of the prints and scars of perjuries, and of
wrongs which have been plastered into him by each action, and
he is all crooked with falsehood and imposture, because he has
lived without truth. Him Rhadamanthus beholds, full of all
deformity and disproportion, which is caused by licence and
luxury and insolence and incontinence, and despatches him
ignominiously to his prison, and there he undergoes the punishment
which he deserves.’
260. As, in Eastern monarchies, a veil was sometimes
cast over the face of the guilty;[67] so in the
New Testament the veil of darkness is drawn over
the fate of the lost soul who falls into the hands of
the living God. ‘And when the king came in to
see the guests, he saw there a man which had not on
a wedding-garment: and he saith unto him, Friend,
how camest thou in hither, not having a wedding-garment?
And he was speechless. Then said the
king to the servants, Bind him hand and foot, and
take him away, and cast him into outer darkness;
there shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth.’[68]
We greatly question whether any school of theologians
have succeeded in throwing a single ray of real
light into this mysterious region.[69] Our readers are
well aware that there are three such schools. One of
these contemplates the eternity of punishment physical,
mental, or both; another the final salvation of all men;
while a third expects the annihilation of the wicked in
Gehenna. Now while it is entirely without our province
to enter into these discussions, we may yet be
permitted to point out that, as it appears to us, the
principle of Continuity demands not merely one state,
but rather an eternal and infinite succession of states,
in order to constitute true immortality.
The precise conditions of such an immortality it is
not for us to discuss. Under any school of theological
thought a glorious immortality implies the ultimate
union, morally and spiritually, of the individual with
the Divine over-life, while the fate of the impenitent
must surely be something so awful that language fails
to bring it fully before the mind.
261. But this graphic and powerful picture of the
fate of the lost fared as badly as other New Testament
conceptions when it fell into the hands of the materialists
of the middle ages. Its meaning was entirely
altered, and the Christian Hell, instead of being the
Gehenna of the Universe, where all its garbage and
filth is consumed, was changed into a region shut
in by adamantine walls and full of impossible physical
fires—the Devil being the chief stoker.
The one idea is awful, while the other is simply
grotesque. An antient Jew who had occasion to
pass by the valley of Hinnom, and whose senses
were invaded by the sights and smells of that
doleful region, must have entertained a conception
of the Hell described by Christ as different as
possible from that which has reached us from the
middle ages, and to which some even of the readers
of this book may have been accustomed in their
earlier years. The reader who desires to know something
of the more than fiendish malignity with which
human beings (mainly Christian ministers) have improved
upon the solemn but markedly reserved
language of Scripture on such points has only to
refer to the Inferno. Perhaps the hideous realism of
Doré’s illustrations will of itself be enough for him.
If not, a very few lines of the original cannot fail to
suffice.
Since the time of Dante many attempts have been
made, unsuccessfully, by men without his genius, to
import additional horror.
To some extent no doubt Christ’s description of
the Universal Gehenna must be regarded as figurative,
but yet we do not think that the sayings of Christ
with regard to the unseen world ought to be looked
upon as nothing more than pure figures of speech.
We feel assured that the principle of Continuity cries
out against such an interpretation—may they not
rather be descriptions of what takes place in the
unseen universe brought home to our minds by means
of perfectly true comparisons with the processes and
things of this present universe which they most
resemble? And just as, in the visible universe, there
is apparently an enormous and inexplicable waste of
germs, seeds, and eggs of all kinds, which die simply
because they are useless—analogy would lead us to
conclude that something similar, and to at least as enormous
an extent, happens in the Unseen with the germs
of spiritual frames. The caterpillar which has not
chosen a secure place of refuge in which to assume
the chrysalis form does not live to become a perfect
insect. The seeds that fell by the wayside, though
scattered by an intelligent sower, were devoured by
the birds of the air. ‘Let every one of them pass
away, like the untimely birth of a woman, that they
may not see the sun.’ ‘For many are called, but
few chosen.’[71]
262. Thus the Christian Gehenna bears to the
Unseen Universe precisely the same relation as the
Gehenna of the Jews did to the city of Jerusalem;
and just as the fire was always kept up and the worm
ever active in the one, so are we forced to contemplate
an enduring process in the other.
For we cannot easily agree with those who would
limit the existence of evil to the present world. We
know now that the matter of the whole of the visible
universe is of a piece with that which we recognise
here, and the beings of other worlds must apparently
be subject to accidental occurrences from their relation
with the outer universe in the same way as we
are. But if there be accident, must there not be pain
and death? Now these are naturally associated in
our minds with the presence of moral evil.
We are thus drawn, if not forced, to surmise that
the dark thread known as evil is one which is very
deeply woven into that garment of God which is called
the Universe.
In fine, just as the arguments of this chapter lead
us to regard the whole Universe[72] as eternal, so in like
manner are we led to surmise that evil is eternal, and
therefore we cannot easily imagine the Universe without
its Gehenna, where the worm dieth not, and the fire
is not quenched. The process at all events would seem
to us to be most probably an enduring one. [Many
passages of the New Testament, however, seem to
point to a continuity of moral development in the unseen
universe, a development whose climax is to be
reached when the last enemy, death, is destroyed in
Gehenna.]
263. But it is fruitless to expect that Science should
throw any light upon that greatest of all mysteries—the
origin of evil. We have now come to a region
where we must suffer ourselves to be led solely by the
light which is given us in the Christian Records. And
while here we would quote from a very remarkable
work on the Lord’s Prayer[73] by the Rev. Charles
Parsons Reichel, B.D., which exhibits in a singularly
clear light the testimony given by Scripture, as well
as the fruitlessness of all attempts to obtain information
from any other quarter. Our first extract relates
to the personality of ‘The Evil One:’—
‘In refutation’ (says the writer) ‘of the objections that have
been urged against the personal existence of the Adversary, this
one observation is quite enough: that of the world of spirits we
cannot possibly know anything save by direct revelation. It is
beyond the domain of the senses; it is beyond the cognisance
of reason. A man born blind might therefore as rationally
attempt to disprove by a process of reasoning the existence of a
sense of which he can know nothing except by testimony, as we
attempt by a process of reasoning to disprove the existence of a
spirit of whose existence we can know nothing save by testimony.
The only point to be ascertained in either case is whether the
testimony be sufficient. If the testimony of Scripture be deemed
sufficient, then I cannot see that it is possible to deny the Personal
existence of Satan any more than that of God. How
Satan exists, or where at the present time, or how his power
avails, as we are told it does, to contrive and suggest temptations
to the mind of man; and to what extent he is aware of
what is passing in men’s minds, so as to adapt his suggestions
to their weakness, we are not told, and do not therefore know.
But our not being told the manner in which his power is exercised
and brought to bear, is no proof of the unreality of that
fearful Being who is everywhere in the New Testament exhibited
as the adversary of God and goodness, whether in the individual,
or in the development of the human race.’
The next passage is one which all of us may study
with much advantage. It refers to temptation:—
‘Every risk incurred unnecessarily for the sake of exhibiting
our trust in God, every unusual or unnecessary act done merely
or chiefly for the purpose of displaying our privileges or our
conviction, or of attracting attention and admiration, every
stepping out of the plain, unadorned, and unadmired path of
simple duty, is a phase of it.’
‘Why God should permit any of his creatures to be tempted
is a question we can no more answer than we can that question
of which indeed it is but a case, why God should permit evil
to exist at all. But we know that evil does exist; and we know
too that temptation does exist. That evil was first introduced
into the world by a Being who goes under the name of Satan or
the Adversary (2 Cor. xi. 3) we are told: that this Being endeavoured
first to seduce, and afterwards to menace our Saviour
into evil; and that he is constantly engaged in tempting us as
he tempted Christ, we are also told.’
‘And the true rendering of the last clause in Christ’s own
prayer would seem to intimate that the same Being is also busy
in suggesting temptations to every follower of Christ—“Lead us
not into temptation, but deliver us from the Evil One.”’
264. But we must now draw to a close; first of all,
however, let us briefly sum up the results of our discussion.
The great scientific principle which we have made
use of has been the Law of Continuity. This simply
means that the whole universe is of a piece; that it is
something which an intelligent being is capable of
understanding, not completely nor all at once, but
better and better the more he studies it.
In this great whole which we call the Universe
there is no impenetrable barrier to the intellectual
development of the individual. Death is not such
a barrier, whether we contemplate it in others,
or whether we experience it ourselves. And the
same continuity which has been insisted on with
reference to our intellectual conceptions of the universe
applies, we have little doubt, to the other faculties
of man, and to other regions of thought.
When we regard the universe from this point of
view we are led to a scientific conception of it which
is, we have seen, strikingly analogous to the system
which is presented to us in the Christian religion.
For not only are the nebulous beginning and fiery
termination of the present visible universe indicated
in the Christian records, but a constitution and power
are therein assigned to the Unseen Universe strikingly
analogous to those at which we arrive by a
legitimate scientific process.
265. Our readers are now in a position to perceive
the result of questioning science in this manner, and
of abandoning ourselves without mistrust or hesitation
to the guidance of legitimate principles. It is
that science so developed, instead of appearing antagonistic
to the claims of Christianity, is in reality its
most efficient supporter; and that the burden of
showing how the early Christians got hold of a constitution
of the unseen universe, altogether different
from any other cosmogony, but similar to that which
modern science proclaims, is transferred to the
shoulders of the opponents of Christianity.
266. For the present we would only add that the
principle, of the aid of which we have availed ourselves,
is not a mere theological weapon, but will, we
believe, ultimately prove a most powerful scientific
auxiliary. Already we have used it in our endeavour
to modify the most probable hypothesis which has
been formed concerning the ultimate constitution of
matter.
The truth is, that science and religion neither are
nor can be two fields of knowledge with no possible
communication between them. Such a hypothesis is
simply absurd.
There is undoubtedly an avenue leading from the
one to the other, but this avenue is through the
unseen universe, and unfortunately it has been walled
up and ticketed with ‘No road this way,’ professedly
alike in the name of science at the one end, and in
the name of religion at the other.
We are in hopes that when this region of thought
comes to be further examined it may lead to some
common ground on which followers of science on the
one hand, and of revealed religion on the other, may
meet together and recognise each other’s claims
without any sacrifice of the spirit of independence,
or any diminution of self-respect. Entertaining these
views we shall welcome with sincere pleasure any
remarks or criticism on these speculations of ours,
whether by the leaders of scientific thought or by
those of religious inquiry.
It must never be forgotten that, whether we take
the scientific or the religious point of view, one great
object of our life in the visible universe is obviously
to learn; and that (as human beings are constituted)
advance in learning necessarily implies a high purpose
kept steadily before us, and a continuous and
arduous pursuit. For, as we are told in the First
Epistle of John, ‘This is the victory which overcometh
the world, even our faith.’
THOMAS AND ARCHIBALD CONSTABLE, PRINTERS TO HER MAJESTY
[1] It will be seen from our last chapter that we have used by preference
the word Soul to represent that which survives death both in the
righteous and the wicked.
[26] Life and Writings of Swedenborg by William White.
[27] We are aware that a certain class of thinkers regard all matter and
combinations of matter as in some unexplained sense alive. We will
discuss this doctrine in another place; meanwhile it must be understood
that we do not here allude to this peculiar life, which from its
very conception must exist as truly in a dead body as in a living one;
what we are discussing at present is individual consciousness of the
ordinary recognised type.
[28] As will be seen in Chap. III., the more important half of the
realities of the physical world are forms of Energy, which cannot exist
except when associated with Matter. We mention this merely in a
footnote now, as we do not wish to diverge too far from our present
line of argument.
[29] A very striking analogy to this will be found in Chapter III.,
where it is shown that energy of visible motion often disappears by
transformation into the dormant or latent energy of position.
[30] See Essay on this subject by the Hon. Sir W. R. Grove, in his
book on The Correlation of Physical Forces.
[31] See Contributions to Solar Physics, by De la Rue, Stewart, and
Loewy.
[32] In Chap. IV. the reader will see that the only attempt to explain
the mechanism of gravitation, which can be called even hopeful, does
not give rigorously the law of the inverse square of the distance.
[33] ‘I hope all will be well. And, as for the gate you talk of, all the
world knows that it is a great way off our country. I cannot think
that any man in all our parts doth so much as know the way to it;
nor need they matter whether they do or no, since we have, as you
see, a fine, pleasant, green lane, that comes down from our country,
the next way into the way.’
[38] For a more complete statement of Carnot’s work see Tait, Recent
Advances in Physical Science, 1876.
[39] They virtually showed that in a perfect steam-engine with pressure
equal to ‘one atmosphere’ in its boiler, and with its condenser at the
temperature of melting ice, the ratio of the heat taken in to the heat
given out is 1·365 to 1. Hence if the difference between the numbers
is to be 100, these must be 374, 274.—Phil. Trans., 1854.
[40] See Tait, Phil. Mag., 1872, I. 338, 516; II. 240.
[41] Thomson and Tait’s Natural Philosophy, § 300; or Tait and Steele’s
Dynamics of a Particle, 3d ed. § 299.
[42] Stewart and Tait on the Heating of a Disk by Rotation in vacuo
(Proceedings of the Royal Society). See also Stewart’s Elementary
Treatise on Heat, 3d edition, Art. 387 (Clarendon Press Series).
[43] If the visible universe be imagined to be infinite, we should have (following
out our line of thought) infinitely large masses separated from
each other by infinite distances, appearing for infinite ages in the liquid
and solid states, and thence transformed by means of infinite collisions
into the gaseous condition in which they will remain for another infinite
series of ages. Is there much gained by this conception?
[44] i. 641. Thus rendered by Munro:—‘For fools admire and like all
things the more which they perceive to be concealed under involved
language, and determine things to be true which can prettily
tickle the ears and are varnished over with finely sounding phrase.’
[45] This has been spoken of as an exaggeration. We hope it may be
so; but when it was written (in the winter of 1874) the newspapers
were full of the sickening details of the gouging of an old man by a
gang of miners, who afterwards filled the sockets with quicklime!
These human fiends are probably already at liberty, having had their
few months of simple imprisonment!
[47] See also the extremely interesting article Atom, by Clerk-Maxwell,
in the 9th ed. of the Encyclopædia Britannica.
[48] Here it is important to observe that the speculations of Sir W.
Thomson with regard to the density of the Ether assign only the
inferior limit of that density. The real density may possibly be very
much greater.
[50] In Art. 148 we made a suggestion that gravitation might be the
visible result of a tendency to a minimum of some affection of the fluid
in which atoms are immersed. The exertion of gravitating force might
thus be associated with a change in the constitution of visible things,
and might perhaps point to an ultimate dying out, just as the radiation
from the sun, which obeys the same formal law as that of gravity,
points to a dying out of our luminary.
If this be conceivable, the really trivial nature of gravitating force
(Art. 139) might come to be associated with the extraordinary persistence
of the present state of things.
[51] The words ‘left to its own laws’ must not be taken too literally.
We ought perhaps rather to say, the procedure of the Governor of the
visible universe is at present such as to indicate uniformity of physical
laws, while, on the other hand, His procedure when producing the
universe indicated an intelligent agent designing uniformity of product.
[59] It is surely unnecessary to inform our readers that we adopt this
hypothesis, not because we imagine it to have any inherent probability,
but simply as a concrete mode of bringing development before the
understanding.
[60] We are not here opposing the theological doctrine that the Universe
is in the Son of God. In fact, when we contemplate any past phase of
the Universe, we are driven to look upon this as having been previously
developed by the Son of God, who doubtless also sustains it. This
therefore represents the theological doctrine, nevertheless it will at once
be acknowledged that we may speak of Christ as being in the Universe.
[62] See a specially interesting and exhaustive paper by Lister (Trans.
R. S. E., 1874-5). A very clear analysis of it is given by Crum
Brown (Proc. R. S. E., 1875).
[64] The Rev. James Martineau has, we perceive, taken up a similar
line of argument. (See Art. on ‘Modern Materialism,’ Contemporary
Review, February 1876.)
[65] See Sermon preached at Belfast by Dr. Reichel, August 23, 1874.
[66] [Those who believe that the New Testament asserts the annihilation
of the wicked in Gehenna, of course hold that only the just obtain the
spiritual body. But we have no definite term for the body as it shall
be (in the Hades of the New Testament) between death and the resurrection.
It is probable that the want of such a term is due to the fact
that the authors of our recognised version have unfortunately rendered
both Hades and Gehenna indifferently by the word Hell, itself a term
from Scandinavian mythology.]
[67] ‘As the word went out of the king’s mouth, they covered Haman’s
face.’—Esther vii. 8.
[68] St. Matthew xxii. 11-13. [See, however, also Luke xiii. 28,
where the true meaning obviously is ‘while ye are being cast out.’
There are other obvious mistranslations in our version; such as for
instance that of Mark ix. 43, where for ‘the fire that cannot be put
out’ we have ‘the fire that never shall be quenched.’ It is to be
hoped that the revised version will be such as to give readers ignorant
of Greek a thoroughly correct idea of the meaning of the original,
most especially on points of such awful importance as this.]
[69] The extent of our knowledge, or rather of our ignorance, on this
subject has been happily rendered by the Rev. Dr. Irons, when he
states that all we are authorised to infer is that retribution will be
morally complete.
[70] The sense is as follows:—Master, said I, will these torments increase
after the great judgment, will they be less, or equally severe?
He replied—Go back to your scholastic learning, which tells you that the
more perfect the being the more he feels both pleasure and pain. And,
although these accursed ones can never reach full perfection, they
expect to be more perfect after than before (the judgment).
[71] [We ought perhaps to inform our readers that what we have here
said refers to that particular state after the present—the dying out of
which, in consequence of voluntary separation from its centre of life and
energy, has been called the second death. Whether this dying out is
equivalent to absolute annihilation is a point which we do not pretend
to discuss.]
[72] Including in it a state of things like the present physical universe;
not, however, the very things that now exist, these being evanescent in
energy at least, if not also in material.
Obvious typographical errors and punctuation errors have been
corrected after careful comparison with other occurrences within
the text and consultation of external sources.
Some hyphens in words have been silently removed, some added,
when a predominant preference was found in the original book.
Except for those changes noted below, all misspellings in the text,
and inconsistent or archaic usage, have been retained.
Pg 78: ‘tell us’ replaced by ‘tells us’. Pg 115: ‘τρισμυριόις’ replaced by ‘τρισμυρίοις’. Pg 118: ‘first to recal’ replaced by ‘first to recall’. Pg 150: ‘The griding sword’ replaced by ‘The grinding sword’. Pg 205: ‘in the charracter’ replaced by ‘in the character’. Pg 213: ‘its continous energy’ replaced by ‘its continuous energy’. Pg 227: ‘John iii. 16’ replaced by ‘John iii. 13’. Pg 243: ‘school of thought are’ replaced by ‘school of thought is’. Footnote 44, Pg 131: ‘tickle the the ears’ replaced by‘tickle the ears’.